Yamaha QL5/QL1 V5.8 Reference Manual [English]

How to Use This Reference Manual
The QL5/QL1 V5.8 Reference Manual (this document) allows you
to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software
you’re using to view this document.
If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box
and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search
for occurrences of that term.
Displaying the next/previous view
V5.8 Reference Manual
If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next
view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back
to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different
page.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the QL series is provided on page 4 and
following. You can use this function tree to find the page that
explains an on-screen display or function.
EN
Contents
Contents
Using dynamics ...................................................................................................... 63
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries ......................................................................... 66
Channel Job ............................................................................. 67
How to Use This Reference Manual .......................................................................... 1
DCA group ............................................................................................................. 67
Mute group............................................................................................................ 69
Using the Recall Safe function................................................................................. 72
Channel Link function ............................................................................................ 76
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel.............................................................. 80
About Mix Minus.................................................................................................... 84
Function Tree ............................................................................ 4
SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ....................................................... 6
Channel Strip section.............................................................. 12
Scene memory ......................................................................... 85
Operations in the Channel Strip section................................................................. 12
Storing and recalling scenes ................................................................................... 86
Editing scene memories.......................................................................................... 90
Using the Global Paste function.............................................................................. 92
Using the Focus Recall function .............................................................................. 95
Using the Fade function.......................................................................................... 97
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall
(GPI OUT) ................................................................................................... 99
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall............................................. 100
Using Preview mode............................................................................................. 102
Input and output patching..................................................... 16
Changing the input patch settings.........................................................................
Changing the output patch settings ......................................................................
Inserting an external device into a channel ............................................................
Directly outputting an INPUT channel ...................................................................
17
18
20
22
Input channels ........................................................................ 25
Signal flow for input channels................................................................................
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel color...........................................
Making HA (Head Amp) settings............................................................................
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus ...................
Added pan function (Monaural input channels only) .............................................
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus ..............................
Channel name display indication ...........................................................................
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay) ..................................................
Surround output for input channels .......................................................................
Channel library operations .....................................................................................
25
26
28
34
36
38
41
41
44
49
Monitor and Cue functions ................................................... 103
Using the Monitor function .................................................................................. 104
Using the Cue function......................................................................................... 110
Talkback and Oscillator......................................................... 118
Using Talkback ..................................................................................................... 118
Using the Oscillator function ................................................................................ 120
Meters.................................................................................... 123
Operations in the METER screen ........................................................................... 123
OUTPUT channels .................................................................... 50
Signal flow for output channels .............................................................................
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel color...........................................
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus .............................
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to
MATRIX buses.............................................................................................
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) ...............................................
Using the PORT TO PORT function ........................................................................
Channel library operations .....................................................................................
50
51
52
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack....... 129
About the virtual rack ...........................................................................................
Virtual rack operations ..........................................................................................
Graphic EQ operations .........................................................................................
About AUTOMIXER...............................................................................................
Editing the internal effects ....................................................................................
Effects and tempo synchronization .......................................................................
Using the Premium Rack.......................................................................................
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries .............
54
56
57
58
EQ and Dynamics .................................................................... 59
129
130
133
140
143
149
151
162
Using EQ ............................................................................................................... 59
Simultaneously setting EQ type.............................................................................. 62
2
V5.8 Reference Manual
Contents
I/O devices and external head amps .................................... 163
Using an I/O device .............................................................................................
Remotely controlling an R series unit ...................................................................
Third-party equipment’s HA control function.......................................................
Remotely controlling an amp...............................................................................
Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit.....................................................................
Using an external head amp ................................................................................
Remotely controlling an external head amp.........................................................
Controlling an internal head amp ........................................................................
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive................................ 232
Remount function to USB flash drives ................................................................... 239
Word clock and slot settings ................................................................................. 239
Using cascade connections ................................................................................... 241
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses .................................................... 245
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off.............................................. 246
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays,
and lamps ................................................................................................. 246
Setting the date and time of the internal clock ..................................................... 247
Setting the network address ................................................................................. 247
Setting up the Dante audio network..................................................................... 249
Dante Device Lock................................................................................................ 251
Support for Dante Domain Manager .................................................................... 252
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) .................................................................. 263
163
166
170
172
175
180
182
184
MIDI....................................................................................... 185
MIDI functionality on the QL series console .........................................................
Basic MIDI settings ..............................................................................................
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items....................................
Using control changes to control parameters .......................................................
Using parameter changes to control parameters ..................................................
185
185
188
190
192
Help function......................................................................... 268
Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive ..................................................... 268
Viewing Help ........................................................................................................ 268
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly................................................... 269
Recorder................................................................................ 193
About the USB memory recorder .........................................................................
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder .......................................
Recording audio to a USB flash drive....................................................................
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive .....................................................
Editing the title list...............................................................................................
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW ..............................................
Using the QL console with Nuendo Live ..............................................................
193
193
195
197
198
199
202
Other functions ..................................................................... 270
Initializing the unit to factory default settings .......................................................
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) ..............
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ...........................................................
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ...............................
Adjusting the LED color (Calibration function) ......................................................
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display ..........................................
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display ..............................................
Initializing the Dante audio network settings ........................................................
Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware...................................................
Update function to Dante firmware ......................................................................
AFC IMAGE Control ............................................................... 206
AFC IMAGE settings .............................................................................................
NETWORK window (AFC IMAGE page) ................................................................
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen .......................................................................
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen (1ch)......................................................
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen (CH 1-32, CH 33-64)..............................
SCENE LIST screen: AFC IMAGE tab .....................................................................
270
270
271
271
273
273
274
274
274
275
206
206
207
207
208
208
Warning/Error Messages ...................................................... 276
Setup ..................................................................................... 209
Index...................................................................................... 279
About the SETUP screen.......................................................................................
User settings ........................................................................................................
Preferences ..........................................................................................................
USER DEFINED keys .............................................................................................
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ........................................
USER DEFINED knobs...........................................................................................
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs ....................................
Custom fader bank ..............................................................................................
Console Lock .......................................................................................................
209
212
219
221
222
227
228
229
231
3
V5.8 Reference Manual
Function Tree
Function Tree
FUNCTION ACCESS AREA
TO STEREO/MONO
52
1ch
171
53
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
165
CH33–64/ST IN
53
6
OUTPUT
53
12
SURROUND
44
(17)
17, 26, 51
28
28
8ch
30
CH1–32
CH33–64/ST IN
OUTPUT
INPUT DELAY
32
32
Indication only
CHANNEL LIBRARY
49
EQ LIBRARY
66
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY
42
VIRTUAL RACK
DELAY SCALE
42
RACK MOUNTER
INSERT/DIRECT OUT
20
GEQ EDIT
1ch
59
8ch
61
CH1–32
62
CH33–64/ST IN
62
OUTPUT
62
DYNAMICS
64
1ch
64
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT
65
8ch
65
CH1–32
66
CH33–64/ST IN
OUTPUT
66
66
183
EXTERNAL HA EDIT
183
INTERNAL HA
MONITOR
CH33–64/ST IN
59
182
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT
184
66
Portico5033/Portico5043/Portico5045/U76/
Opt-2A/EQ-1A/DynamicEQ/Buss Comp 369/
MBC4 LIBRARY
RACK
21, 23
175
MONITOR
42
165
EXTERNAL HA
162
42
8ch
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
WIRELESS
EFFECT LIBRARY
CH1–32
20, 23
172
162
162
164
41
1ch
AMP
GEQ/PEQ LIBRARY
8ch
HPF/EQ
166
CH1–32
CHANNEL PARAMETER
GAIN/PATCH
I/O
165
REMOTE HA EDIT
LIBRARY
PATCH/NAME
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
52
Main
OVERVIEW
41
8ch
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner’s Manual (booklet).
SELECTED CHANNEL
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND
130
133
134
GEQ LINK
134
EFFECT RACK
104
CUE
113
MONITOR
106
OSCILLATOR
121
TALKBACK
119
METER
INPUT METER
123
OUTPUT METER
123
RTA METER
125
145
EFFECT EDIT
145
EFFECT TYPE
145
PREMIUM RACK
151
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
151
PREMIUM RACK EDIT
152
AUTOMIXER
140
PARAMETRIC EQ
137
SETUP
USER SETUP
219
USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP
221
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List)
USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List)
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER
FADER ASSIGN SELECT
I/O DEVICE
DANTE PATCH
163
DANTE SETUP
163
DANTE INPUT PATCH
164
4
209
PREFERENCE
USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY
221
227
227
230
229
212
CREATE KEY
213
SAVE KEY
216
LOGIN
214
V5.8 Reference Manual
Function Tree
SETUP
PATCH
SAVE/LOAD
232
WORD CLOCK/SLOT
239
CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH
OUTPUT PORT
MIDI/GPI
242, 244
56
186
PROGRAM CHANGE
188
CONTROL CHANGE
191
GPI
264
FADER START
266
BUS SETUP
245
SURROUND SETUP
210
CONSOLE LOCK
231
DATE/TIME
247
NETWORK
248
DANTE SETUP
249
SCENE
87
GLOBAL PASTE
93
FADE TIME
97
SONG SELECT
FOCUS RECALL
PREVIEW
CH SELECT
18, 131, 194
185, 263
MIDI SETUP
SCENE LIST
21, 24, 30, 107,
114, 165, 183,
243
PORT SELECT
Others
CONFIRMATION
219
SOFT KEYBOARD
(23)
LOGIN
214
Startup Menu
MODE SELECT
270
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
270
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
270
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
270
INPUT PORT TRIM
272
OUTPUT PORT TRIM
272
SLOT OUTPUT TRIM
272
FADER CALIBRATION
271
LED COLOR CALIBRATION
273
101
96
102
NOTE
• The explanations in this reference manual will use the QL5.
• In the case of the QL1, some screens will not show channels
and faders that do not exist on those models.
RECORDER
USB
193
NUENDO LIVE
202
CH JOB
CH LINK MODE
77
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
68
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
70
RECALL SAFE MODE
73
CH COPY MODE
81
CH MOVE MODE
82
CH DEFAULT MODE
83
5
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
SELECTED CHANNEL section
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display corresponds to a
channel module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to use the knobs on the panel
to set all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL]
key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip,
either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels
will be linked.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section to select the bank that includes
the channel you want to operate.
2. Use a [SEL] key in the top panel channel strip section or the Main section, to select
the channel to control.
3. If the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is not displayed, press one of the knobs in
the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
4. Use the knobs and the buttons in the screen to edit the parameters of the selected
channel.
NOTE
• The number and name of the currently-selected
channel is shown in the channel select field located in
the Function Access Area of the touch screen.
• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been
assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch
between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same
[SEL] key.
 SEND field
In this field, you can view the send level and pre/post from the channel
to each MIX/MATRIX bus. You can also switch the on/off status of the
send signals. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in
the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels
(odd-numbered and even-numbered) are comprised of two mono
channels or a stereo channel.
Channel number
Channel name
1
1 Tabs
Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be
displayed in the SEND field.
• MIX tab .................................. displays MIX buses 1–16.
• MATRIX tab ........................... displays MATRIX buses 1–8.
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access
Area. Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the
field to select the next channel.
• If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the
PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button),
pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the screen (1ch).
• Even if a different screen is selected, the channel selected with the
[SEL] key can be set using the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will
appear on screen when you operate a knob.
6
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
If the destination bus channels are two mono channels:
When using CUE B
Indicates that channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX
bus are combined with CUE B.
1
2
NOTE
For details about how to use CUE B, see the
CUE screen (When configuring CUE B).
3
 GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also
view the operational status of the head amp.
1 SEND knob
Adjusts the send level to the corresponding bus.
1 GAIN knob
2 PRE indicator
Sets the analog gain/digital gain of the head amp.
Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch
window.
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND
8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3 ON button
3
4
2
1
2 GC indicator
Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio
network if the Gain Compensation function is
turned on.
If the destination bus is a stereo channel:
1
5
67
8
3 OVER indicator
2
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
3
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the status of the phase setting.
5 +48V indicator
1 SEND/PAN knob
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp.
The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (evennumbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the
same signal.
6 HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
7 AG-DG LINK indicator
2 PRE indicator
Indicates a link between the analog gain and digital gain of the head amp.
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND
8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
8 Digital/Analog gain value
3 ON button
Switches the send signal to the two buses on or off.
If analog gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the digital gain value is shown here. If digital
gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the analog gain value is shown here.
NOTE
NOTE
• If the indices of a SEND/PAN knob are white, the send point is assigned as PRE; if the indices
are black, it is assigned as POST.
• If the send point is PRE, you can specify the PRE point as either VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE
FADER] in the BUS SETUP popup that appears when you press the SETUP button  BUS
SETUP button.
• If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers 1–2 mentioned above will not be
displayed. The send level will be fixed at nominal level, and the send point will be fixed at POST
FADER. For details, see “Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses” on page 245.
• Press the SEND knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch window.
• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7
will not be shown. For an output channel, 1–7 will not be shown.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP PREFERENCE
screen, the digital gain knob will appear for 1, and 2, 5, 6, and 7 will not be shown. For
details, refer to “Making HA (Head Amp) settings” on page 28.
7
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
If patched to a wireless mic (SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen)
1 RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1
Sets the gain for the transmitter or receiver. Press the knob
to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.
The knob name will change depending on the connected
device.
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
2
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the
STEREO bus.
1
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch
window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can
specify whether to view the PAN knob or the
BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel,
the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and
the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
NOTE
When remote control connection is disabled for the connected
device, a gray circle is displayed here instead of a knob, and the
gain cannot be adjusted.
3
45
6
2
NOTE
2 OL indicator
• For mono input channels, the pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or
right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.
• For ST IN channels, if the PAN knob is selected, the pan level is nominal when panned either left
or right and -3dB at center. If the BALANCE knob is selected the balance level is nominal at
center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link
is used.
Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.
3 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is
enabled.
2 ST/MONO button
NOTE
Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the
channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the
LCR button appears in location 2. The LCR button
is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from
the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength
of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
4 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
2
When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected:
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation
time, refer to the manual from Shure.
1 BALANCE knob
If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the
BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust
the volume balance for the left and right channels.
If the channel signal is monaural, the BALANCE
knob is not shown and cannot be used.
Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch
window.
5 MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
6 Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
 PAN/BALANCE field
This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel
to the STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the
selected channel.
1
When using Surround mode (MIX1-MIX6)
3 DOWN MIX
This field enables you to view the downmix
coefficient and L/R button settings.
Press this field to open the TO STEREO/MONO
window.
8
3
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
3 GAIN knob
 INPUT DELAY field
This field enables you to view the delay settings.
Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band.
1
NOTE
1 ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
• If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN
knob on the panel.
• If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN
knob on the panel.
2
2 Delay time
The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If
the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the
ms value appears in the middle row.
Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window.
NOTE
When the BYPASS button is on, the knobs turn gray.
 EQ graph field
 HPF field (input channels only)
This field enables you to set the HPF. If an output channel
is selected, a gray circle will appear in location 1, and 2
1
will not be displayed.
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open
the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF, and EQ.
2
1 HPF knob
Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
2 ON button
Switches the HPF on or off.
 EQ parameter field
 DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field
This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings. Press each
knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
This field enables you to set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
1
1 Q knob
Specifies the Q for each band.
If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H. SHELF (highshelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L. SHELF
(low-shelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the
filter type name will be displayed.
2
3
NOTE
4
• Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counterclockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter
type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing
and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving.
• Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while
pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to lowshelving.
1
2
3
• If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW
band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter
type to HPF.
• You can also switch the filter type in the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
1 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
2 Level meter
Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange)
when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.
3 Threshold
Specifies the threshold.
2 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band.
9
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
4 Parameters
 FADER field
Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected
dynamics type.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch window, in which you can
make detailed parameter settings.
This field enables you to make settings for the channel on/off
status and the level.
Displays the current level.
Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.
 INSERT field
1
This field enables you to make insert settings.
2 Level indicator
2 ON button
2
3
1
3
Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If
the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the
ΣCLIP indicator will light.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch
window.
2
1 Fader
4
3 ON button
Switches the channel on or off. The button is linked with
the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel.
Switches the insert on or off.
3 RACK EDIT button
4 CUE SETTINGS button
Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit
screen for the inserted rack.
4
Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen.
4 IN indicator
Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is
sent to the insert-in.
When two channels are
used for CUE, and CUE
OPERATION MODE is set
to CH
 DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make Direct Out settings.
 DCA/MUTE field
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch
window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the
button.
1
This field enables you to select the DCA or mute group to which the
channel is assigned.
2
1 Tabs
Select a DCA or mute group. Press the selected tab once again
to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
2 ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE window.
2 ON button
3
When the DCA group tab is selected:
 RECALL SAFE field
This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.
1
2 DCA group select buttons
Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
1
3
2
3 Mute group indicators
Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
2
Switches the Recall Safe status on or off.
3 PARTIAL indicator
This will light if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters, not to all channel
settings.
10
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
When the mute group tab is selected:
4 Mute group select buttons
5
Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights
orange.
5 MUTE SAFE button
6
4
Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group.
6 DCA group indicators
Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
11
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Strip section
 CHANNEL NAME field
Channel Strip section
This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number,
name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected
channel is highlighted.
The Channel Strip section located below the touch screen lets you recall and control input
channels, output channels, or DCA groups. If you press the Bank Select key in the Fader Bank
section, you can control them using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys for the channels
or DCA groups corresponding to that key.
: Selected channel
: Unselected channel
Operations in the Channel Strip section
 GAIN/PATCH field
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to
control.
2. Use the faders and [ON] keys in the Channel Strip section to adjust the level of the
selected channels and switch them on or off.
3. Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust
the parameters for the channels.
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also
view the operational status of the head amp.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the
selected channel.
If the head amp is patched:
2
3
4
1
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, which
enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an
indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the knob
to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.
Bank Select keys
OVERVIEW screen
2 OVER indicator
NOTE
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
The OVERVIEW screen
appears when you press a
USER DEFINED key to which
OVERVIEW is assigned.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is
not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp.
NOTE
• If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be
displayed.
• Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then
set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value
by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
Channel Strip section
12
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Strip section
NOTE
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN, the DIGITAL GAIN knob will appear instead
of knob 1, and indicator 3 will not be displayed.
• You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN DIGITAL GAIN to a USER
DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key and then
adjusting the USER DEFINED knob or the GAIN knob for the selected channel while
ALTERNATE is on.
If the audio signal for the receiver is muted, 5 is displayed.
5 MUTE indicator
Displayed only if the audio signal for the receiver is muted.
NOTE
If patched to a wireless mic (OVERVIEW screen)
1
If the audio signal for the receiver is not muted, 4 is displayed.
2
If the slot is patched:
The slot name will appear.
If the rack is connected:
The patch and module name will appear.
34
If the output is connected:
Only the patch will appear.
5
1 RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the gain for the transmitter or receiver.
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, which
enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an
indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the knob
to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.
• The name of knob will change depending on the connected device.
 INPUT DELAY field (input channels only)
This field displays the delay status for the input channel. Press this field to open the INPUT
DELAY 8ch window.
1
NOTE
When remote control connection is disabled for the connected device, a gray circle is displayed
here instead of a knob, and the gain cannot be adjusted.
1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator
2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is
enabled.
 INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
This field displays the Insert/Direct out status. Press this field to open the INSERT 8ch
window.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength
of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
1
2
3 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator
NOTE
Indicates the insert on/off status.
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation
time, refer to the manual from each developer.
2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)
4 OL indicator
Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.
Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.
13
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Strip section
 EQ field
If the destination bus is VARI (stereo):
If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the left-hand knob will
function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function as the SEND knob.
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of
the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in
which you can set the HPF and EQ.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
 DYNAMICS 1/2 field
This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics
1/2. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch window.
If the destination bus is set to FIXED:
The SEND ON/OFF button for each bus is shown instead of the knob.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
 SEND field
This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post
settings for 16 buses.
To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX/MATRIX] key in the
Fader Bank section.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level for each bus.
Touch the knob of the bus you want to operate; it will be assigned to the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If it is assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN]
knob, touching that knob once again will display the SEND 8ch popup
screen.
This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus.
 TO STEREO/MONO field
This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/
MONO bus.
This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
If the destination bus is VARI (mono):
The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post
status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting,
the knob scale color turns gray.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1
2
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected,
you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window.
For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE
knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
2 ST/MONO indicator
Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator
will be displayed.
14
2
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Strip section
When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:
The ΣCLIP indicator will light if the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating
the balance of the left/right channels.
 DCA group field
A DCA group (1–16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row
in this field.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
 Mute group field
A mute group (1–8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field.
If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, S (Safe) will appear on the
third row. If a dimmer level has been specified for a mute group, the color of the characters
will change from red to orange.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
15
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
Input and output patching
Output port (jack/port)
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect
inserts, and how to use direct outputs.
When the QL series is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks/ports) are patched to
each input channel.
SLOT2(15)–(16)
CUE L/R
FX5L(A), FX6L(A), FX7L(A), FX8L(A)
MIX13–16
DIGITAL OUT L/R
STEREO L/R
RECORDER INPUT L/R
STEREO L/R
*1. QL1: OMNI OUT1–6
*2. QL1: MIX1–6
*3. QL1: OMNI OUT7–8
For QL5
Input channels
Input port (jack/port)
CH1–32
INPUT1–32
CH33–48
DANTE1–16
CH49–64
DANTE17–32
ST IN1L-4R
FX5L(A)–FX8R(B)
Input patching
QL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network
patching and QL console internal patching.
For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. In this
window, you can patch the QL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels for the
QL5 and thirty-two (32) channels for the QL1 can be input from a DANTE audio network.
Choose channels from Dante audio network signals and select the I/O devices that you want
to control from the QL series console.
Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window) to
channels on the QL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1–64 (for QL5)
or DANTE1–32 (for QL1) in the GAIN/PATCH window.
For QL1
Input channels
Input port (jack/port)
CH1–16
INPUT1–16
CH17–32
DANTE1–16
ST IN1L-4R
FX5L(A)–FX8R(B)
Output patching
When the QL is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks/ports) are patched to the following
output channels.
Output port (jack/port)
OMNI
Output channels
OUT1–14*1
Use the OUTPUT PORT window to patch QL console’s output channels and Dante audio
network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1–64 ports (for QL5) or
DANTE 1–32 ports (for QL1).
Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1–64 (for QL5) or DANTE 1–32 (for QL1)
(assigned in the OUTPUT PORT window) to I/O device outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH
window of the I/O DEVICE to make these assignments.
Output channels
MIX1–14*2
OMNI OUT15–16*3
STEREO L/R
DANTE1–16
MIX1–16
DANTE17–24
MATRIX1–8
DANTE25–26
STEREO L/R
DANTE27
MONO
DANTE28–29
MONITOR L/R
DANTE30
MONITOR C
DANTE31–32
CUE L/R
SLOT1(1)–(16)
MIX1–16
SLOT2(1)–(8)
MATRIX1–8
SLOT2(9)–(10)
STEREO L/R
SLOT2(11)
MONO
SLOT2(12)–(13)
MONITOR L/R
SLOT2(14)
MONITOR C
QL console internal patching and Dante audio network
patching
The following diagram shows the signal flow through the QL series console, I/O devices, and
Dante audio network.
I/O Device
I/O device
ID #3
ID #1
Dante Network
Dante-MY16-AUD
ANALOG INPUT
MY
32: QL5
16: QL1
16
SW
MY
16
I/O device
ID #2
Dante
patching
“Dante” (ports)
64: QL5
32: QL1
QL series internal
patching
INPUT PATCH
QL series console
16
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
Changing the input patch settings
PATCH/NAME screen
2
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the input channel you want to operate.
2. Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and
use the port select buttons to select the input port.
3
7
1
5
4
OVERVIEW screen
PATCH/NAME screen
6
NOTE
1 PATCH button
• You can also select an input port from the GAIN/PATCH window.
• The OVERVIEW screen appears when you press a USER DEFINED key to which OVERVIEW is
assigned.
Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an
icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.
2 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this
button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this
field, a keyboard window allowing you to change the channel name will appear.
4 Category select list
Selects the category of input port. The categories correspond to the following input
ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1–32 .......... DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ........ DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
• INPUT/PB OUT ..... INPUT1–32*1, PB OUT(L), PB OUT(R)
• SLOT1 ................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• EFFECT RACK ..... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK .. PR1L(A)–PR2R(B)
*1. QL1: INPUT1–16
17
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
5 Port select buttons
PATCH/NAME screen
Select the input port that is assigned to the currently-selected channel.
3
6 Tabs
4
5
9
Enable you to switch between items.
7 Close button
1
Closes the screen.
Changing the output patch settings
2
7
To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination
of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for
each output port.
Selecting the output port for each output channel
6
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select an output channel.
2. Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and
use the port select buttons to select the output port.
8
1 PATCH button
Indicates the port that is patched to the output channel. If you press this button when
another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set.
NOTE
Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.
3 Channel icon button
OVERVIEW screen
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or
sample name.
PATCH/NAME screen
4 Channel number display box
NOTE
Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.
With QL V1.07 and later, when you change from input channels to output channels using the Bank
Select keys, the SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen changes from the MIX
tab to the MATRIX tab. Then, if you switch back to input channels, the MIX tab will appear.
5 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this
field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
6 Category select list
Select the type of port.
18
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
7 Port select buttons
CH SELECT screen
From the category, these buttons let you select the port to patch. To cancel the
selection, press the button once again.
8 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
9 Close button
Closes the screen.
Selecting the output channel for each output port
2
1
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of
the SETUP screen.
3. In the tabs below the OUTPUT PORT screen, select the output port you want to
control.
4. Press the channel select button of the port you want to operate.
5. Use the category select list and the channel select buttons to select the send-source
channel.
SETUP screen
3
1 Category select list
Select the category of the channel. The categories correspond to the following channels.
They vary depending on the output port type.
• MIX/MATRIX ................................ MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ................. STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), MONI L,
MONI R, MONI C, CUE L, CUE R, SMON L, SMON
R, SMON C, SMON LFE, SMON Ls, SMON Rs,
MMTX L, MMTX R, MMTX C, MMTX LFE, MMTX
Ls, MMTX Rs
• DIRECT OUT 1–32 ...................... CH1–CH32 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 33–64 .................... CH33–CH64 Direct Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT 1–32 ................... CH1–CH32 Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT 33–64 ................. CH33–CH64 Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX ...... MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT 1–32 ................... CH1–CH32 Insert 2 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT 33–64 ................. CH33–CH64 Insert 2 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX ...... MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Insert 2 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 2 Outs
• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX.............. MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE ......... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), CUE L,
CUE R
OUTPUT PORT screen
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION in the PREFERENCE tab on the USER SETUP screen is ON, a
confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL
PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to
change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
19
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
2 Channel select button
INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.
3
3 CLOSE button
6 7
6 7
9
9
Closes the screen.
8
Inserting an external device into a channel
You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port
used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for
each channel.
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the channel where you want to insert the external device.
2. Press the popup button in the INSERT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3. Press the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button.
4. Select an output port or an input port.
5. Press the INSERT ON button.
1
2
4
5
 INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings. Press one of three fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the insert
position.
1 INSERT OUT button
Displays the currently-selected output port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to
open the PORT SELECT window, and select an output port.
2 INSERT IN button
Displays the currently-selected input port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to
open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port.
3 INSERT ON/OFF button
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
Switches the insert on or off.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
NOTE
Specifies whether the insert point/direct out point settings will be applied to all input
channels.
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the QL console and the external device (page 239).
5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point setting will be applied to all output channels.
NOTE
Insert 1 and insert 2 are serial connections with fixed sequential numbers.
20
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
2 INSERT ON/OFF button
 INSERT IN HA field
Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above
the button.
This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the
insert-in.
3 INSERT OUT button
6 +48V button
Displays the currently-selected port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open
the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) (currently-selected for insert 1 and insert 2)
on or off.
4 INSERT IN button
7 A.GAIN knob
Displays the currently-selected port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open
the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port. You can also view the
insert-in level by checking the indicator located to the right of this button.
Indicates the currently-selected head amp analog gain setting for insert 1 and insert 2.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain.
NOTE
• If you have selected the INPUT jack on the QL console as
the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the
INSERT IN HA field.
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal
selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press either the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button in the one-channel
or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the input/output port used for
insertion.
8 HA meter
Displays the level of the currently-selected head amp input signal for insert 1 and insert
2.
9 Close button
Closes the screen.
INSERT screen (8ch)
2
1
1
2
3
3
1 Category select list
4
Selects the category of port. The categories correspond to the following ports. The
displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1–32........................... DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64......................... DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
• INPUT .................................... INPUT1–32 (QL5), INPUT1–16 (QL1) (input channels
only)
• OUTPUT/DIGITAL ................. OMNI OUT1–16, DIGITAL OUT L/R (output channels
only)
• SLOT1.................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2.................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
3
4
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear.
21
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
• GEQ RACK ............................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ8R(B)
• EFFECT RACK ...................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK ................... PR1L(A)–PR8R(B)
The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O
device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.
2 Port select buttons
Assign the port that will be used as insert-out/insert-in for the currently-selected
channel.
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the INPUT channel that you want to output directly.
2. Press the popup button in the DIRECT OUT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen.
3. Press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window.
4. Select an output port.
5. Press the DIRECT OUT ON button.
NOTE
If a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or
insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode
will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in
which a GEQ, PEQ or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be
defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the QL console and the external device (page 239).
22
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
DIRECT OUT screen (8ch)
6
4
1
1
4
2 3
2
3
5
1 DIRECT OUT field
Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct
output position.
1 DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Out point is indicated
above the button.
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
3 DIRECT OUT ON button
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob
to adjust the level.
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
4 Close button
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob
to adjust the level.
Closes the screen.
5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input
channels.
6 Close button
Closes the screen.
23
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the one-channel or the eightchannel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the output port used for direct output.
2
1
3
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port. The categories correspond to the following output
ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• OUTPUT/DIGITAL/REC.........OMNI OUT1–OMNI OUT16 (QL5), OMNI OUT1–OMNI
OUT8 (QL1), DIGITAL OUT L/R, RECORDER IN(L/R)
• SLOT1....................................SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2....................................SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• DANTE1–32 ...........................DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 .........................DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
2 Output port select buttons
Assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
24
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
Input channels
• HPF (High Pass Filter)
Cuts the region below the specified frequency.
This chapter explains various operations for input channels.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
Signal flow for input channels
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating, ducking, expander, or
compressor.
The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O
devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1–2, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus,
MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.
• DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
• INPUT DELAY
Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms.
INPUT channel (monaural)
• LEVEL/DCA 1–16
Adjusts the input level of the effect.
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the QL series console is in the
default state, the signal from the analog input connector is assigned.
• ON (On/off)
Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
ST IN channel (stereo)
• PAN
Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus.
For the ST IN channel (stereo), you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The
BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the
ST IN channel (stereo) to the STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP
window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to
two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo.
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the QL series console is in the
default state, the input signals from EFFECT RACKS 5–8 are assigned to ST IN 1–4. There
are no assignments for ST IN 5–8.
M
O MATRIX
N (USE 7-8
ST O AS CUE B) CUE(A)
MIX
1 2 1516 L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R
CH 1-64{32},ST IN 1L-8R
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
PRE DG
METER
INPUT PATCH
80
{48}
ST IN ONLY
L
OSCILLATOR
1,3...79{47}
ST IN ONLY
R
PRE DG
METER
2,4...80{48}
OSCILLATOR
INSERT POINT
POST ON INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
CH INSERT 1, 2 OUT
1-64{32}
CH INSERT 1, 2 IN
POST DG 1-64{32}
METER
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
HPF
Digital
GAIN
DIRECT OUT 1-64{32}
LEVEL
PAN
Digital
GAIN
POST DG
METER
ON
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER/POST ON
PRE HPF
ATT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
EQ OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
Key in
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64,
ST IN 1L-8R]POST EQ(QL5)
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,ST IN 1L-8R]POST EQ(QL1)
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEY IN CUE
Key in Filter
INSERT
POST ON
METER
LEVEL/
DCA1-16
DELAY
Max
1000ms
ON
ON
ON
To MIX
ON
ON
MONO(C)
TO LCR
ST R
MIX1,3...15
MIX2,4...16
SURROUND PAN
MIX1-6
ON
ON
ON
LEVEL
VARI
ON
ON
LEVEL
To MIX
ON
ON
LEVEL
PAN
To MATRIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
ON
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
ON
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX2,4...8
To MATRIX
ON
ON
LEVEL
PAN
VARI
STEREO
VARI
STEREO
ON
POST PAN R
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–16.
PAN LINK
ON
To MIX
• LCR (Left/Center/Right)
Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal
that consists of the L/R channels plus the center channel.
PAN MODE ST L
CSR
ON
POST PAN L
To OUTPUT PATCH
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
LCR
POST ON
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
ON
POST ON
LR MONO
INSERT
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
FIXED
To MIX
FIXED
STEREO
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
PRE FADER
METER
• MIX LEVEL 1–16 (MIX send levels 1–16)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–
16. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from
the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
POST ON
LFE
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
CUE(A) L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
CUE(A) R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
ON
CUE B L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
CUE B R
TRIM
• MATRIX LEVEL 1–8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from
the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• INPUT PATCH
Assigns input signals to the input channels.
• Ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the input signal.
• DIGITAL GAIN
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
25
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
PATCH/NAME screen
• INSERT (INPUT channels (monaural) only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an
effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose
immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON]
key.
 When selecting the PATCH tab
2
• DIRECT OUT (INPUT channels (monaural) only)
You can patch this to any output port to send out the input signal directly from the
corresponding output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose
immediately before the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader,
or immediately after the [ON] key.
3
5
1
• METER
Indicates the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is
detected (page 124).
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel
color
On the QL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel.
This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the input channel.
2. Press the channel number/channel name field of the channel you want to specify on
the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Switch between items in the tabs on the PATCH/NAME screen, and specify a channel
name, icon and channel color.
4
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-patched port. If you press this button when another tab is active,
a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2 Icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or
sample name.
3 Channel name input box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. When you press the inside of this box, the
SOFT KEYBOARD window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.
4 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
OVERVIEW screen
5 Close button
PATCH/NAME screen
Closes the screen.
26
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
 When selecting the ICON tab
 When selecting the NAME tab
You can directly enter a channel name on the keyboard screen.
1
2
3
1 Channel color select buttons
Select a channel color.
2 Icon select buttons
Select a channel icon.
3 Sample name setup buttons
Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.
NOTE
• You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample
name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a
consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a
number.
• The channel indicator will turn off for any channel for which black (OFF) was selected as a
channel color.
27
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
GAIN/PATCH window (1ch)
1
You can make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for the
input channel.
• To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
9
0
Setting the gain
Head amp settings are made in the GAIN/PATCH window.
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the channel.
2. Press the GAIN knob in the GAIN/PATCH field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen.
3. Press the 1ch or 8ch tab in the GAIN/PATCH window.
4. Make settings for the head amp.
2
3
4
5 6
78
1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name.
2 HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.
NOTE
• If a slot is patched to the channel, the type of the slot/MY card and the slot meter will be displayed.
• If a rack is patched, the type of rack and type of effect will be displayed.
• +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function
is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the
analog gain when the function is turned on.
GAIN/PATCH window (1ch)
• HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference
between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
• The GAIN knob, +48V button, and Ø button are valid only on channels for which the assigned
input port is an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the INPUT jack on the QL unit, or a slot that is
connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).
• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device
to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the
monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording
via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant
level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device
is changed. If the Gain Compensation button is turned off, the compensation gain will
be reset, while the analog gain will return to the level that was obtained before you
turned on the button. Therefore, the signal level on the digital network will remain the
same.
• Gain compensation meter
Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.
28
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
2 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)
4 Icon/Channel name button
Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/
NAME window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.
5 AG-DG LINK button
Turns the analog gain and digital gain link on or off. When the link is turned on, the
digital gain is linked to adjustments made to the analog gain, even if Gain
Compensation is on.
6 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input.
7 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
digital gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, no changes will be made
to the input level of the analog gain, and therefore the input gain is adjusted with the
digital gain.
• Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
8 Digital gain meter
• Signal quality meter
Displays the quality of the received RF signal. The vertical axis represents quality and the
horizontal axis represents time, and the display of connection status is updated every
second. If you move away from the transmitter, or the quality of the RF signal decreases
due to the influence of disturbing radio waves, the bar indication becomes lower. It
displays in purple for Shure devices, and in white for the other developer’s devices.
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
9 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
0 AG-DG ALL ON button/AG-DG ALL OFF button
Switch all analog gain and digital gain links on or off simultaneously.
• RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the HA gain for the transmitter or receiver. The level meter located at the immediate
right of the knob indicates the input level.
The knob name will change depending on the connected device.
• MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
• RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is
enabled by lighting up.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength
of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
• Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation
time, refer to the manual from each developer.
3 INPUT PORT button
Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press this button to display the PORT
SELECT window, in which you can select a port to patch.
29
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
2 PATCH button
GAIN/PATCH window (8ch)
8
Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window to patch the input port to the
input channel.
9
PORT SELECT window
TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
TAKE FROM PORT button
1
2
3
4
5
• TAKE FROM PORT button
The HA settings of the port will take priority. Even if you change the patching, the HA
settings of the port will remain unchanged.
6
• TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
The HA settings of the channel will take priority. The HA settings of the port that had
been previously patched will be copied to the newly-patched port.
7
If the channel’s HA settings are selected, the following HA settings will be copied from
the channel to the port that is patched. If you patch the input channel from an input that
does not have these settings (i.e., that does not have a HA), the default values will be
specified.
1 Channel select button
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the
corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
HA setting
Default value
HA gain amount
–6dB
HPF on/off
Off
Phantom power on/off
Off
Gain compensation on/off
Off
NOTE
If you’re newly patching a previously-unpatched input channel, the default values will be specified
if the HA INFO field’s TAKE FROM CHANNEL button is pressed.
30
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
3 HA section
• MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.
• RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is
enabled by lighting up.
NOTE
If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the
MY card will be displayed.
• +48V button
This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched.
Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength
of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function
is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the
analog gain when the function is turned on.
• Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
• Level meter
Indicates the input signal level.
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation
time, refer to the manual from each developer.
4 AG-DG LINK button
• GC (Gain Compensation) button
Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel.
Turns the analog gain and digital gain link on or off. When the link is turned on, the
digital gain is linked to adjustments made to the analog gain, even if Gain
Compensation is on.
3 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)
NOTE
If it is patched to a wireless mic, the battery indicator is displayed here.
5 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input.
6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust
the level of the signal input to the input channels.
7 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
• Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
9 AG-DG ALL ON button/AG-DG ALL OFF button
• RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the HA gain for the transmitter or receiver. The level meter located at the immediate
right of the knob indicates the input level. The knob name will change depending on
the connected device.
Switch all analog gain and digital gain links on or off simultaneously.
NOTE
• When remote control connection is disabled for the connected device, a gray circle is displayed
here instead of a knob, and the gain cannot be adjusted.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength
of the signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
31
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
 If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:
GAIN/PATCH window
(1–32, 33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you
can also use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the selected head amp gain.
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
1 GAIN knob
3
Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press the knob to select a channel,
and then control the gain value using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of
the analog gain when the function is turned on.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
1 Parameter select buttons
NOTE
Switch parameters to view in the window.
• ANALOG GAIN...................... Analog gain
• DIGITAL GAIN ....................... Digital gain
• PATCH ................................... Patch selection
If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not
recognized, the knob 1 will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination.
3 will not be displayed.
If the input channel is patched to a rack, the knob 1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack.
If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob 1 will be replaced with a dotted line
“----”.
2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
 If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button:
3 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
1
2
3
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press the knob to select a channel,
and then control the gain value using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
32
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
 If you press the PATCH parameter select button:
Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain
Compensation is on
If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the
I/O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount.
Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the
digital domain.
For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain
Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to
+45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated
by –15 dB).
1
1 PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input
port to patch to the channel.
 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)
2
4
1
3
If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/O device, adjusting the
analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console. The
signal in the audio network is maintained at a constant level, and therefore increasing the
analog gain as much as possible will lower the relative noise floor and improve the S/N ratio.
The gain of each signal input to the QL series unit will be adjusted by the digital gain
parameter of the QL series console.
However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must
first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and
then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain
Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same
amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.
1 RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets and displays and the gain for the transmitter or receiver. The knob name will change
depending on the connected device.
2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is
enabled.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength
of the signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
NOTE
You can perform this operation rapidly if you’ve assigned Gain Compensation on/off as the SET
BY SEL function to one of the USER DEFINED keys.
3 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation
time, refer to the manual from each developer.
4 OL indicator
Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.
NOTE
When the receiver is muted,
is displayed on the MUTE indicator.
33
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
Sending the signal from an input channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus
STEP
1. Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the input channel from which you want
to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
3. In the PAN/BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
4. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
5. In the MAIN section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the ST IN channel
(stereo)/INPUT channel (monaural), and then raise the fader to an appropriate
level.
6. In the INPUT section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the input channel
you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used to send signals to the main speakers. There are
two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR
mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as
follows.
 ST/MONO mode
This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus
independently.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be
switched on or off individually.
• The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by
the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is
controlled by this knob.
If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals
sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually (page 35).
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was
selected for the channel in step 4.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the STEREO/MONO button to individually
turn on/off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel
to the STEREO bus.
 LCR mode
This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C))
simultaneously.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on
or off collectively.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an
input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the
input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.
8. Use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
9. Use the TO ST PAN knob to specify the panning of signals sent from the input
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or
similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the
monitor source before you continue with the following procedure.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
34
TO STEREO/MONO window
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch)
For an INPUT channel (monaural), this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right
panning of signals sent to the STEREO bus. For a ST IN channel (stereo), this acts as a
PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right
signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then
operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of signals sent from input channels
to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
1
7 Tabs
2
3
Enable you to switch between windows.
8
4
9
5
6
8 LCR button
7
ST/MONO mode
If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, this button is displayed instead of 4. This
button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input
channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
LCR mode
1 Channel select button
9 CSR knob
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to
select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob (page 37).
2 Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.
3 MODE select button
For an INPUT channel (monaural), the mode can be switched between ST/MONO and
LCR. For a STEREO channel, the mode can be switched between PAN and BALANCE.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
35
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
1 PAN LAW select button
Added pan function (Monaural input channels only)
This toggle button is used to set the PAN LAW for the Input Channel.
The pan setting for signals sent to the STEREO bus enables you to select PAN LAW settings.
You can select one of the following:
CENTER NOMINAL
The pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned 100%
either left or right.
LR NOMINAL
The pan level is -3dB at center and nominal when panned 100%
either left or right.
For CENTER NOMINAL
For LR NOMINAL
NOTE
PAN LAW settings are also enabled in LCR mode. They are also enabled in Surround mode.
NOTE
You can also check the status of PAN LAW settings in the window shown below. For channels
where the
mark is on, PAN LAW is set to LR NOMINAL.
• TO STEREO/MONO window (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
The settings are also applied to the signals sent to the stereo MIX buses.
STEP
1. Select a monaural input channel.
2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the OVERVIEW window, and then press the knob once again. Or, in the PAN/
BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the
SELECTED CHANNEL window, and then press the knob once again.
3. Use the PAN LAW select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to set the PAN
LAW for each channel.
• OVERVIEW window (STEREO/MONO field)
• SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW window (PAN/BALANCE field)
1
36
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO window
(CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
Signal level when LCR mode is selected
If LCR mode is selected, the signal level sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus
will vary according to the settings of the CSR knob and the TO ST PAN knob.
Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/
MONO bus. You can also adjust the selected pan or balance setting.
 When the CSR knob is set to 0% (INPUT channel (monaural))
The TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the
MONO (C) bus.
Signal level
1
2
3
4
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L
C
TO ST PAN knob
R
 When the CSR knob is set to 0% (ST IN channel (stereo))
The TO ST BALANCE knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent
to the MONO (C) bus.
1 Channel select button
Signal level
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
Signal sent from the STEREO (L)
channel to the STEREO (L) bus
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel,
the Σ indicator to the right of the knob will light.
L
R
Signal level
4 ST/MONO indicator
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/
off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
Signal sent from the STEREO (R)
channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L
37
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
 When the CSR knob is set to 100%
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/
MATRIX bus
Signal level
Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus
The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on
stage, or to external effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is
independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a main recorder or to
a backstage monitoring system.
You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following ways.
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
L
C
TO ST PAN knob
R
With this method, you use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/
MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.
 When the CSR knob is set to 100% (ST IN channel)
 Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the QL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the
faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When
using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be
adjusted simultaneously.
Signal level
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
L
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
This section explains how to use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels of
signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.
R
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the
MIX/MATRIX buses.
2. Turn on the ON button in the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX
buses.
Signal level
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus
L
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
38
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
 If the MIX/MATRIX bus is a stereo bus
MIX buses can be either a FIXED type that features a fixed send level, or a VARI type that
features a variable send level. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between
FIXED and VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press
the SETUP button and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP window.
 If the MIX bus is a FIXED type
You can link the main parameters of two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX
buses. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the
two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX
PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, it will
operate as a BALANCE knob).
A gray circle is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob, and you cannot
adjust the send level.
NOTE
• For an INPUT channel (monaural), the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two
MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX
buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND PAN knob counter-clockwise will increase the
amount of signal sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will
increase the amount sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.
• For a ST IN channel (stereo), if BALANCE mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO
window (8ch), the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and
the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/MATRIX
buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND BAL knob counter-clockwise will increase the
amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it
clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX
bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch), the left knob will
function as the PAN knob. The right knob will function as send level, just as in BALANCE mode.
 For a VARI type MIX bus or a MATRIX bus
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level.
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND window
3
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
1 2
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected
send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will light.
39
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
2 ALL POST button
9 SEND LEVEL knob
Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected
send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off.
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.
3 Send destination indicator
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels
to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
4 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5 Channel select button
STEP
1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,
and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the
corresponding output port.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button, or press the key
that is currently lit in the SENDS ON FADER section.
3. Use the MIX/MATRIX select buttons in the Function Access Area to switch between
MIX/MATRIX.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the Function Access Area, or the key in
the SENDS ON FADER section to select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
5. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level
of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon,
number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the
button.
6 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the
button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
NOTE
• If the PRE/POST button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE
FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS
SETUP window (page 245).
• The PRE/POST button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.
7 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send
destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use PAN/BALANCE mode setting
in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select whether PAN/BALANCE
will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. The knob for the mode
selected here will appear.
SENDS ON FADER
section
Function
access area
NOTE
• Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode.
The faders in the Channel Strip section and Main section will move to the send levels of the
signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON]
keys will also change to the SEND ON status.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be
turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor
the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
40
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
Channel name display indication
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly
switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back
again.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, ON/OFF is indicated for the channel.
SENDS ON FADER mode
CHANNEL ON
1
3
CHANNEL OFF
On the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP pop-up window, the channel number is
shown if NAME DISPLAY is set to “NAME ONLY”.
2
Channel number
display
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)
1 MIX/MATRIX select button
Use the MIX/MATRIX select button to switch between MIX/MATRIX for the bus
displayed in the Function Access Area.
This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using the Input Delay
function.
This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone
locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a
delay (a time gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for
broadcast on TV.
2 MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons
Select the buses that will be controlled by the faders.
3 Close button
Closes the SENDS ON FADER mode.
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the input channel.
2. Press the INPUT DELAY field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the delay.
4. Press the DELAY ON button.
41
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
2 Channel select button
The currently-selected input channel is indicated in blue. Press the button to select the
channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the delay value. You can view the current value
immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown
using the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY
SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob.
4 DELAY ON button
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
Switches the delay on or off.
INPUT DELAY window
5 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
INPUT DELAY window (8ch)
6 Close button
You can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay.
1
Closes the window.
6
INPUT DELAY (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit
for the delay time.
There are five delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of
samples), ms (milliseconds), and frame (frames). If you select frame as the units, you can
choose from six frame rates: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, and 24. In this case, fr will
appear as the units in the channel name display.
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit
for the delay time.
42
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
2 Channel select button
 LR-MONO
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the
channel.
Although the result is a monaural signal that is the summation of signals from both channels,
the R channel of the stereo input channel is muted.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the value. You can view the current value
immediately beside the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown
using the currently-selected scale).
NOTE
If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of
the knob.
Additional functions for stereo input channels
With V3, you can temporarily set the signals sent to a stereo input channel as mono. You can
select from the following three settings.
NOTE
 L-MONO
• When you set LR-MONO, the PAN mode is selected at the same time. In addition, the PAN knob
is set to the center position.
• When you set LR, L-MONO, or R-MONO, the BALANCE mode is selected at the same time. In
addition, the BALANCE knob is set to the center position.
Only the L channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.
ON
PAN/BAL
STEREO L
STEREO R
 Setting procedure
STEREO IN Lch
If a stereo input channel is selected, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as
shown below.
ON
PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Rch
1
 R-MONO
Only the R channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.
ON
PAN/BAL
ON
PAN/BAL
STEREO L
STEREO R
STEREO IN Lch
STEREO IN Rch
43
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
1 LR-MONO SELECT field
Surround output for input channels
Select one of the four buttons. The button you select lights up, and the others go off.
Setting Surround mode
Normal STEREO setting
You can enable surround mixes by changing bus settings to Surround mode.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the SURROUND SETUP button (page 210).
3. Press the 5.1 SURROUND button.
4. Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output.
5. Press the APPLY button.
6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
L-MONO
R-MONO
LR-MONO
If a stereo input channel is selected, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as shown below.
2
2 LR-MONO SELECT button
This a toggle button. The setting switches each time the button is pressed.
SETUP screen
SURROUND SETUP screen
NOTE
When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
change to MONO x2.
However, when you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and
5/6 remain as MONO x2.
44
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
6 Surround position
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
The color of the ball shown here changes depending on whether the surround position
is a hard pan (panned fully left or right) or any other setting.
Hard pan: Red
Any other setting: Orange
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
appears as shown below.
3
6
7
7 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH
screen.
1
2
OVERVIEW screen
3
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the OVERVIEW screen appears as shown
below.
4
5
1
2
3
1 L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
2 F/R knob
Adjusting L/R
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
3 Assign buttons for each bus
If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button
off.
4 DIV knob
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
5 LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
45
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
SURROUND PAN 1CH screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen appears
as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
3
8
9
>
1
2
3
1
2
Adjusting F/R
3
1 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH
screen.
2 L/R
F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for
adjusting F/R.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
4
5
6
7
1 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
3 LFE knob
2 Surround position
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
You can set the surround position by touching and dragging the ball in the graph.
3 Assign buttons for each bus
All of these buttons are turned on by default. If there is a bus from which you do not
want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.
4 L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
5 F/R knob
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
46
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
6 DIV knob
SURROUND PAN screen (1-32, 33-64/ST IN(QL5), ST IN (QL1))
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN screen (1-32, 33-64/
ST IN(QL5), ST IN (QL1)) appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press
the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
1
7 LFE knob
2
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
8 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all parameters to the initial values.
9 COPY button
All parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
0 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current
settings. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
Adjusting L/R
47
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO screen
1
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the TO STEREO/MONO 8CH screen for
MIX 1-8 appears as shown below. MIX 1-6 are for setting downmixes.
2
1
2
Adjusting F/R
1 L/R buttons
1 Surround graph
Use these buttons to set the output destination.
This graph shows the surround positions.
2 Coefficient Setting fader
2 L/R
Use this fader to set the downmix coefficient. There is a ∑ clip indicator.
F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for
adjusting F/R.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
48
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
The TO STEREO/MONO OUTPUT screen appears as shown below. Parameters cannot be
set for MIX 1 - 6; this screen is only for displaying parameters.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall
various parameters (including the head amp settings) for input channels.
To recall a library, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the libraries” section in the
separate Owner’s Manual.
LIBRARY button
49
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
OUTPUT channels
STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel
Each of these channels processes the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO
bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input
channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be
used together as a set of three output channels.
This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels,
MONO channels).
Signal flow for output channels
MIX
1 2 1516
M
O MATRIX
N (USE 7-8
ST O AS CUE B) CUE (A)
L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various
buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other
buses. The following types of output channels are provided.
INSERT POINT
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO
INSERT 1, 2 OUT L,R,MONO(C)
STEREO
INSERT 1, 2 IN L,R,MONO(C)
POST ON INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
MIX channels
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to
the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.
MIX
1 2 1516
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
CUE (A) ON
TRIM
MATRIX2,4...8
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MIX
INSERT 1, 2 OUT 1-16
MIX
INSERT 1, 2 IN 1-16
INSERT POINT
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
CUE (A) ON
MATRIX2,4...8
MONO(C)
POST ON
METER
LEVEL
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT PRE FADER
Key in
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ
BAL
ON
INSERT
MIX OUT1-16
INSERT
PRE FADER
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
Key in
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
MATRIX channel
(13-16)To KEY IN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports.
POST ON
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
PAN/BAL
ST L
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
CUE B ON
MATRIX1,3...7
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
ON
POST ON INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
INSERT
TRIM
POST ON
METER
BAL
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PAN/BAL
MIX 1-16
LEVEL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
CUE B ON
MATRIX1,3...7
M
O MATRIX
N (USE 7-8
ST O AS CUE B) CUE (A)
L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
MIX
1 2 1516
To MATRIX
MATRIX 1-8
VARI
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
M
MATRIX
O
N (USE 7-8
ST O AS CUE B) CUE (A)
L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
TO LCR
MATRIX
INSERT 1, 2 OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERT 1, 2 IN 1-8
PAN/BAL
LR MONO
INSERT POINT
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
METER
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
LCR
POST ON
ST R
INSERT
CSR
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
CUE(A) ON
TRIM
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER
Key in
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
POST ON
METER
BAL
ON
INSERT
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
MATRIX OUT 1-8
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
CUE B ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
This section does not exist in MATRIX 7-8.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.
• LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the channel.
50
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel
color
• ON (On/off)
Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be
muted.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel,
or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.
STEP
1. Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select an output channel.
2. In the OVERVIEW screen, press the channel number/channel name field of the
channel for which you want to specify the channel name, icon, and channel color.
3. Follow the steps for the input channels (page 26).
• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or
MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. For the position from which the signal will
be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or
immediately after the [ON] key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust
the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel
or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left
and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
• INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an
effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.
• METER
Indicates the level of the output channel.
You can switch the position at which the level is detected.
OVERVIEW screen
• KEY IN (MIX channels 13–16 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13–16 to dynamics processors and use
them as key-in signals to control the dynamics.
PATCH/NAME screen
• RACK IN PATCH
Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.
• OUTPUT PATCH
Assigns an output port to an output channel.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.
51
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/
MONO bus
There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and
LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode
are the same as for input channels.
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
2. In the PAN/BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
3. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
4. In the MAIN section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO channel/
MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
5. Turn on the [ON] keys for those channels, and use the fader in the Channel Strip
section to raise the main level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
TO STEREO/MONO window
NOTE
Refer to “Signal level when LCR mode is selected” on page 37 for details on how the signal level
sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the
TO ST PAN knob.
TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch)
You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to
the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was
selected for the channel in step 3.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
6. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the ST/MONO button to turn a signal sent
from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off.
7. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel
to the STEREO bus.
1
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
6. Turn on the LCR button in the TO STEREO/MONO window.
7. Press the CSR knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
to the MONO (C) bus.
8. Press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to
adjust the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus
and MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and
STEREO (L/R) bus.
4
2
3
8
9
5
6
7
ST/MONO mode
LCR mode
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.
52
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
3 MODE select button
TO STEREO/MONO window
(CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1), OUTPUT)
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR.
4 ST/MONO buttons
This window shows the status of signals sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO
bus/MONO bus. You can also adjust the selected pan or balance setting.
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel
to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
1
2
3
4
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob
that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the
type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that
adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To
adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN]
knob.
7 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus
and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input
channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to
select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that
channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/
off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
53
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
NOTE
• You can also use the [SEL] key in the MAIN section to directly select the STEREO/MONO
channels.
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys
in the Fader Bank section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the
appropriate [CUE] key in the Channel Strip section.
You can send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1–8 in the
following two ways.
 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
MATRIX SEND screen
With this method, you use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the
MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control the signals sent from a
specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
3
1
2
 Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the QL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the
faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MATRIX buses. When using
this method, signals sent from MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX
bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
4
5
6
7
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
8
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired
MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
9
STEP
1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and
connect an external device.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top
panel to select the channels that will send signals to the MATRIX buses.
3. In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, turn on the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF
button for the send-destination MATRIX bus.
4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected
send destination.)
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected
send destination.)
3 Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
4 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon,
number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the
button.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
54
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
6 PRE/POST button
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the
button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
7 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
STEP
1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and
connect your monitor system etc. to the corresponding output port.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button, or press the key
that is currently lit in the SENDS ON FADER section.
3. Use the MIX/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX/MATRIX.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the Function Access Area, or the key in
the SENDS ON FADER section to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.
5. Use the faders on the top panel to adjust the send level from the MIX and STEREO/
MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send
destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send destination is stereo, this is fixed to BALANCE.
9 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
Function
Access Area
NOTE
• Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode.
The faders in the Channel Strip section and Main section will move to the send levels of the
signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON]
keys will also change to the SEND ON status.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be
turned on for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to
monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly
switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back
again.
55
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
OUTPUT PORT screen
2
This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent
to speakers that are located at a distance from each other.
1
3
4
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the
SETUP screen.
3. Specifies the delay time, and turns on the DELAY button.
5
6
7
8
9
SETUP screen
0
OUTPUT PORT screen
1 Slot number/Card type
If an output channel of slot 1–2 is selected for operations, this area indicates the slot
number and the type of I/O card installed in that slot.
2 DELAY SCALE button
Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for
the delay time.
3 Output Port
This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned.
4 Channel select button
Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name
of the currently-selected channel is displayed.
5 Delay time knob
Sets the delay time of the output port. Press the knob to select it, and then operate the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the
knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE window is
indicated below the knob.
NOTE
If you have selected ms (millisecond) as the scale, the delay time value will not appear above the
knob.
56
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
6 DELAY button
Using the PORT TO PORT function
Switches the output port delay on or off.
7 Ø (Phase) button
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the
SETUP screen.
3. Press the channel select button in the OUTPUT PORT screen.
4. In the CH SELECT screen, select the output port.
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase
(black) and reverse phase (yellow).
8 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob on screen
to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. Rotate the knob to set the
value in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the
value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.
9 Level meter
HA
AD
HA
AD
Switch the output ports controlled in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized
into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group,
press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.
SLOT
SLOT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUTS
PHONES OUT LR
2
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
DA
PHONES LEVEL
SURROUND MONITOR 1-6
MONITOR MATRIX OUT 1-6
[PHONES]
[SLOT],[OMNI],[DANTE]
[SLOT],[OMNI],[DANTE]
GAIN
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
64{32}
GAIN TRIM
16{8}
+
-
DA
2
3
DANTE IN 1-64{32}
INPUT 1-32{16}
1
OUTPUT
[OMNI OUT]
(1-16{8})
GAIN TRIM
OUTPUT
PATCH
SLOT IN 1-2, 1-16
16
16
OUT [DIRECT 1-64{32}, MIX1-16, STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ,
MATRIX 1-6, 7-8,(CUE B L,R)]
OUT [MONITOR L,R,MONO(C) ,CUE (A) L,R]
INSERT 1, 2 OUT [CH1-64{32}, MIX1-16, STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ,
MATRIX 1-6, 7-8,(CUE B L,R)]
CASCADE OUT [MIX1-16, STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ,
MATRIX 1-6, 7-8,(CUE B L,R), CUE (A) L,R]
STEREO OUT L
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT R
Dante
[DANTE]
(1-64{32})
DANTE
OUTPUT
METER
OUTPUT
PATCH
STEREO L+C
STEREO R+C
OUTPUT
PATCH
GAIN TRIM
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
METER
AES/EBU
DIT
2
SLOT2
DA
SLOT
SLOT
[SLOT]
Dante
Use the PORT TO PORT function to output from an input jack on the rear panel to a Dante
connector without sending the signal through the mixer. This allows you to use the I/O jacks
on QL series consoles as I/O jacks for an audio network.
[DIGITAL OUT]
RECORDER CUE
[2TR RECORDER]
ENCODER
GAIN
SLOT1
DA
OUTPUT PATCH
0 Tabs
INPUT PATCH
INPUT
Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.
USB
57
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
CH SELECT screen
2
1
3
1 Category select list
Select the category of the channel. The categories and channels for the PORT TO PORT
function are shown below.
• INPUT IN................................ INPUT1–32*1
• SLOT1 IN ............................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 IN ............................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
*1. QL1: INPUT1–16
2 Channel select button
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “OUTPUT CHANNEL
LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall
various parameters for output channels.
To recall the library, while an output channel is selected,
press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the
libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
LIBRARY button
58
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
EQ and Dynamics
NOTE
• The EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen,
you can edit the parameter by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take
advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (page 9).
• Even when the HPF/EQ window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the EQ.
Each input channel and output channel on a QL series console provides a four-band EQ and
dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided
immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the
GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass
filter that is independent of the EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking
device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard
compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor,
which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
HPF/EQ window (1ch)
This lets you edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if
you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.
4 78 9 A
B
C D E
Using EQ
1
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output
channels.
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to select the channel that you want to
control.
2. Press the EQ graph field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3. Press the 1ch tab in the HPF/EQ window.
4. Press the EQ ON button, and adjust the EQ parameters.
G
2
3
I
<
J
F
H
L
K
5
M
N
O
P
6
1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel.
2 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen
3 HPF ON/OFF button (Output channels only)
HPF/EQ window
Turn on this button to switch the LOW band to a high pass filter.
NOTE
Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can
turn on the high-pass filter button on the window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter.
59
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
4 EQ type select button
5 ATT knob
Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.
The following EQ types can be selected.
PRECISE
AGGRESSIVE
SMOOTH
LEGACY
Indicates the attenuation value before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
6 Tabs
This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to
precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music
production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that
allow knee adjustments.
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
7 EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter.
This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to
create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic
expression.
8 RTA button
This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create
natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the
original sound.
9 HOLD button
If you turn this button ON, a graph indicating the frequency analysis for the input signal
after EQ processing is overlaid on the bottom of the EQ frequency graph.
Press this button to hold the graph that displays RTA.
0 OFFSET gain knob
This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as
the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch
between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and
TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can
adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
When the EQ type is set to PRECISE, you can press in and turn the Q knob for the HIGH
band to switch between PEQ, shelving type, and low-pass filter.
In addition, you can press in and turn the Q knob for the LOW band to switch between
PEQ and high-pass filter.
A LIBRARY button
NOTE
C COPY button
Press this button to open the EQ Library window.
B DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.
• This operation is possible only with the EQ Q knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the
console’s top panel.
• This operation is not possible with the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
D PASTE button
Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data
has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
 HIGH band
• When set to PEQ (Q=0.10), press in and turn the Q knob to the right to switch to
shelving type.
• When set to PEQ (Q=16.0), press in and turn the Q knob to the left to switch to lowpass filter.
• When set to shelving type (Q=10.0), press in and turn the Q knob to the left to switch
to PEQ.
• When set to low-pass filter, press in and turn the Q knob to the right to switch to PEQ.
E COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer
memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use the A - E buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate
Owner’s Manual.
F EQ FLAT button
 LOW band
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.
• When set to PEQ (Q=0.10), press in and turn the Q knob to the right to switch to
shelving type.
• When set to shelving type (Q=10.0), press in and turn the Q knob to the left to switch
to PEQ.
G HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the HIGH band.
H LPF ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.
60
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
I EQ ON/OFF button
HPF/EQ window (8ch)
Switches the EQ on or off.
This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of 8 channels
simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings.
J EQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicates the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these
meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
1
K EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, GAIN parameters, and BYPASS button for the LOW, LOW
MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust
this.
2
3
NOTE
• If the shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for an output
channel, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear.
• If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q
parameter will not appear.
• When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn gray.
4
5
L HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
1 Channel select button
NOTE
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number
appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Turn on the
HPF ON/OFF button, and use the HPF FREQUENCY knob to adjust the cutoff frequency.
2 EQ graph
M HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type
appears below the graph.
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to
adjust this.
3 EQ ON/OFF button
N HPF type select button (input channels only)
Switches the EQ on or off. The OVER indicator (located to the right above the button)
lights if the post-EQ signal is clipping.
Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between -12 dB/oct and -6 dB/oct.
O HA HPF ON indicator
4 HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to adjust this.
P FREQUENCY
Indicates the HPF cutoff frequency of the external head amp.
5 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
61
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
Simultaneously setting EQ type
HPF/EQ window (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1),
OUTPUT)
You can set the EQ type simultaneously for all channels or all racks in the HPF/EQ window
or the PEQ EDIT window. You can select channels by category.
This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously.
This window is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful
when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ
settings between distant channels.
STEP
1. Press the EQ type select button in the window.
2. Press the GLOBAL SETUP button on the top right side of the popup window.
3. Select an EQ type and channel category in the GLOBAL EQ TYPE window.
4. Press the APPLY button.
5. When the CONFIRMATION dialog box opens, press the OK button.
1
2
1
1 GLOBAL SETUP button
1 Channel select button
Press this button to open the GLOBAL EQ TYPE popup window, where you can set the
EQ type and channel category.
Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The
current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.
2 EQ graph
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ and filters.
62
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
Using dynamics
Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics
processor.
2
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to select the channel for which you want
to control the dynamics.
2. Press the THRESHOLD knob in the DYNAMICS1/DYNAMICS2 field in the SELECTED
3
3. Press the 1 ch tab in the DYNAMICS1/2 window.
4. Press the DYNAMICS ON button, and adjust the dynamics parameters.
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
2 EQ type buttons
Set the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.
3 GLOBAL DESTINATIONS buttons
Set for each category the channels that you set for the selected EQ type. Multiple
selections are possible.
If you select 8BandPEQ, the selected EQ type will be set as the default setting.
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
DYNAMICS1/2 window
NOTE
• The DYNAMICS 1/2 field on the OVERVIEW screen displays the dynamics on/off status and the
amount of gain reduction.
• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can
also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings on page 9.
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
63
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
7 Dynamics type buttons
DYNAMICS1/2 window (1ch)
Enables you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics
types.
All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited by channel. This is convenient when you
want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.
8
1
2
3
4
• Dynamics 1 for an input channel
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER
5
• Dynamics 2 for an input channel
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER
0
6
• Dynamics 1 for an output channel
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S
7
C
8 Dynamics graph
A
9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs
Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to
adjust the values. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-selected
dynamics type.
B
9
• GATE or DUCKING:
D
1 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library window.
• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values.
3 COPY button
All dynamics parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
4 PASTE button
• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:
Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no
valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in
buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will
happen.
• DE-ESSER:
NOTE
For details on how to use buttons 1–5, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter
This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.
These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics
processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters
indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
64
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
A KEY IN SOURCE select button
DYNAMICS1/2 window (8ch)
Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT window, in which you can select
a key-in signal that will trigger the dynamics.
This window displays the input channel or output channel dynamics settings in groups of 8
channels simultaneously. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or
certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.
1
2
3
4
5
•
•
•
•
SELF PRE EQ ....................... The pre-EQ signal of the same channel.
SELF POST EQ ..................... The post-EQ signal of the same channel.
MIX OUT 13–16 ..................... Output signals of MIX channels 13–16
CH1–64 POST EQ (QL5), CH1–32 POST EQ (QL1), ST IN1L–8R POST EQ,
MIX1–16 POST EQ, MTRX1–8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ
........................ The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel*1
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number
appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter
*1. The selectable signals are limited to the corresponding eight-channel group.
Indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain
reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears,
indicating the open/close status of the gate.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
B KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input
Type = Any type other than GATE
channel)
Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.
• Filter select buttons ............. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To
disable the filter, press the button that is turned on.
• Q knob................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can use the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob to adjust the value.
• FREQUENCY knob ............... Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
Type = GATE
If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:
Gate status
C KEY IN CUE button (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input channel)
Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE
signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature
this button, or if you move to a different screen.
Red
Yellow
Green
Off (dark)
On/Off status
On
On
On
Off
Open/Close
status
Close
Open
Open
—
Amount of gain
reduction
30 dB or more
less than 30 dB
0 dB
—
NOTE
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
D Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
65
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
3 Dynamics graph
2 Dynamics parameter area
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears
below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window for that
channel.
This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the
DYNAMICS 1ch window of that channel.
If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the
dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.
The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after
dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the
dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a
vertical line.
4 THRESHOLD knob
Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN]
knob to adjust the value.
5 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
Switches dynamics on or off.
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
DYNAMICS 1/2 window (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5),
ST IN (QL1), OUTPUT)
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. For details on
using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the libraries” section in the separate
Owner’s Manual.
This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the
corresponding channel.
EQ library
1
LIBRARY button
There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/recall EQ
settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that
lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels.
To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in
the/HPF/EQ window.
2
NOTE
You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty
(40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are
read-only presets.
Dynamics library
Use the “Dynamics Library” to store and recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics
processors on QL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will
differ between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s
Dynamics 1. You cannot recall a type that cannot be selected.)
To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS
1/2 window.
1 Channel select button
NOTE
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number,
threshold, and color appear on the button.
You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only
presets.
66
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Channel Job
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the
level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the
parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move
parameters between channels.
DCA group
QL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups that enable you to control the level of multiple
channels simultaneously.
DCA groups enable you to assign input and output channels to sixteen groups, so that the
DCA faders can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader
will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining
the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum
mics, for example, can be grouped.
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
NOTE
• You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the
sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders.
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which
each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle row of this field
indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs.
Assigning channels to a DCA group
There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.
• You can select a specific DCA group and then specify the channels to be assigned to the
group.
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be
assigned.
NOTE
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
• With QL V3.0 and later, you can now assign the Stereo/Mono bus main, Mix bus main, and Matrix
bus main channels to a DCA group on channels other than input channels. DCA groups were
formerly used exclusively for input channels. However, with this new feature, you can use the
DCA groups for output main channels, which enables for more flexible simultaneous controls.
 Selecting channels to belong to a specific DCA group
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the DCA GROUP button.
3. Use the DCA GROUP select button to select the DCA group to which you want to
assign channels.
4. Use the [SEL] keys of the input channels to select the input channel s that you want
to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
67
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
6 POST ONLY button
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as POST only.
Here you can specify the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group.
7 PRE & POST button
1
Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as PRE and POST.
The PRE & POST indicator is shown below a DCA group that has this setting.
NOTE
2
• You can set the object of muting in the DCA group individually for each DCA group.
• If you mute any of the DCA groups on a channel assigned to multiple DCA groups, the signal
route for that channel (including sends to the corresponding bus) will be muted.
3
8 CLOSE button
4
Closes the window.
5
 Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong
8
6
STEP
1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to
operate.
2. Use the DCA group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select
the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
7
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
3 DCA group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to
assign to the DCA group. The channel will be assigned to the DCA group, and the
on-screen fader for that channel will turn yellow. Press the same [SEL] key once again if
you want to remove the channel from the group.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
DCA/MUTE field
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4 NAME EDIT button
Edits the group name of the currently-selected DCA group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or
edit the text.
5 DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.
68
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Controlling DCA groups
Example 2: CH 1 is ON. Assigned to MUTE GROUP 1 and DCA GROUP 1.
Use the DCA faders to control DCA groups.
Operation Example 2
1. Set MUTE GROUP CONTROL 1 to ON (MUTE).
CH1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.
2. Press the ON key for CH1.
CH1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
3. Press the ON key for DCA1. The indicator lamp goes off.
CH1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.
4. Press the ON key for CH1.
CH1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
5. Press the ON key for CH1 again.
CH1 is muted again, and the ON key flashes.
6. Set DCA1 to ON, and MUTE GROUP CONTROL 1 to OFF.
CH1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
STEP
1. Assign input and output channels to DCA groups.
2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Main section on the top panel,
adjust the relative balance between the input and output channels that belong to
the DCA group you want to use.
3. Use the Bank Select keys to select the [ST IN/DCA] key.
4. Use the Channel Strip section to operate the DCA group.
 Using DCA groups
Use the strip section to operate the DCA group.
• Level adjustment: Faders .... The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group
can be adjusted while preserving the level differences
of each channel. The input faders will not operate at
this time.
• On/Mute switch: [ON] key
......................................... When you press an [ON] key in the strip section to
make the key indicator go dark, the channels assigned
to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as
when the faders are lowered to the –∞ dB position).
• Cue monitor: [CUE] key ....... When you press the strip section [CUE] key to make it
light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned to that
DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be
enabled. For more information about cue, refer to
“Using the Cue function” on page 110.
Mute group
QL series consoles feature eight mute groups.
Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]–[12] to mute or unmute multiple
channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously.
Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of
channels can exist in the same group.
Assigning channels to mute groups
As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.
• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to
the group.
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be
assigned.
Using the temporary unmute function
If one of the DCA group buttons on a channel is OFF (muted), press the [ON] key for that
channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in Preview mode, any operation during
mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.
Example 1: CH 1 is OFF. Assigned to DCA GROUP 1.
Operation Example 1
1. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off.
The indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 remains off. DCA 1 is muted.
2. Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
3. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp comes on.
DCA 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 comes on.
69
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
 Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Use the mute group control buttons in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE
window to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to operate
(multiple selections are allowed).
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
9
1 CLEAR ALL button
NOTE
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
• You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group.
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which
each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute
groups to which that channel belongs.
2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
3 Mute group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to
assign to the mute group. The channel will be assigned to the mute group, and the
on-screen fader for that channel will turn red. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you
want to remove the channel from the group.
If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that enabled for mute safe
(that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel
mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or
from a mute group. The on-screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, these numbers will light orange.
For a channel for which the Mute Safe function (page 72) has been turned on, an “S” indicator
will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.
4 NAME EDIT button
Edits the group name of the currently-selected mute group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or
edit the text.
70
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
5 Mute group select button
Using mute groups
Selects the mute group that you want to assign.
To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP CONTROL buttons in the MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off
function for a mute group 1–8 to a USER DEFINED key.
6 MUTE SAFE button
Use this button if you want to exclude a specific channel from all mute groups,
regardless of its assignment settings. The mute group assign field displays the channels
that are excluded from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, refer to
“Using the Mute Safe function” on page 72.
 Assigning mute groups to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4. Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute
On/Off function.
5. Choose “MUTE GROUP CONTROL” in the FUNCTION column, and choose “MUTE
GROUP x” (where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.
6. When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function will be assigned to the USER
DEFINED key that you selected in step 4.
7 MUTE GROUP CONTROL button
Switches the mute for the corresponding mute group on or off.
8 DIMMER LEVEL knob
Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is
enabled.
NOTE
• In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
CONTROL button is turned on, this button will light orange.
9 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
 Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong
STEP
1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels / output channels that you want to operate.
2. Use the mute group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select
the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned.
(Multiple selections are allowed.)
SETUP screen
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
USER SETUP window
DCA/MUTE field
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
71
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
NOTE
NOTE
The USER SETUP window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make
system-wide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using
the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
The [SEL] key of the channel set for Mute Safe will light, and the on-screen fader for that channel
will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once
again to make it go dark.
 Turning mute groups on/off with USER DEFINED keys
Temporarily disabling the Mute function
To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Mute
On/Off function.
The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected
mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] keys of the muted channels will blink. You can
turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups.
To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit.
Mute can be temporarily disabled by turning on the [ON] key; and resumed by turning it off,
when you mute one of the mute groups to which that channel belongs. However, this mute
control by turning on/off the [ON] key is disabled in the PREVIEW mode.
Using the Recall Safe function
NOTE
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from
Recall operations. Unlike the Focus Recall function (page 95), which you can apply to
individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.
Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER
DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.
Using the Mute Safe function
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the RECALL SAFE button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press the [SEL] key for the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe
operations.
4. Select the target for Recall Safe operations in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field in
the RECALL SAFE MODE window.
5. To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button on. (If you
selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)
6. To enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL
RECALL SAFE field.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the
window. Then perform a Recall operation.
Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group
operations (Mute Safe). Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute
a mute group to which that channel belongs.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press the MUTE SAFE button in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
4. Press a [SEL] key for the channel(s) you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple
selections are allowed).
CH JOB
menu
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE window
Function
Access Area
72
CH JOB
menu
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
2 CH RECALL SAFE field
NOTE
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off,
you must also perform the operation described in step 5.
• Bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe. They will always be reproduced in the recalled scene.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or
one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of
the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the
next time it is operated.
You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.
• You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus Recall function (page 95). Channels
or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be
recalled.
• If you hold down the [SEL] key while performing a recall operation, all parameters of that channel
will be treated as Recall Safe regardless of the state of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT
selections.
Indicates the channels currently specified to Recall Safe function.
All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.
3 SET BY SEL button
Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by
the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the
channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. Recall Safe will turn on. Press the same
[SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
RECALL SAFE MODE window
2
14
4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE display field
Indicates the state of Recall Safe settings that are not made in units of channels, and the
Recall Safe settings for racks. Press this field to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE window.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH
All input patches
3
OUTPUT PATCH
All output patches
5
6
9
CASCADE IN
CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings
CASCADE OUT
CASCADE OUT PATCH settings
INPUT NAME
All input channel names
HA/PATCH
A
7
0
8
1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
RACK
The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set
for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL
button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.
OUTPUT NAME
All output channel names
HA
All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external
head amps
CUSTOM FADER
BANK
Custom fader bank settings
GEQ RACK
EFFECT RACK
PREMIUM RACK
Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1 - 8, Effect racks 1 - 8,
Premium racks 1- 8 individually.
MIX
Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-16 in the BUS SETUP window.
This setting is applied to a channel pair (one oddnumbered channel and one even-numbered channel).
MATRIX
Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP
window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one oddnumbered channel and one even-numbered channel).
SURROUND
SETUP
Surround mode settings.
NOTE
The parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.
BUS SETUP
73
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
OTHERs
CH LINK
All channel link group settings
MUTE GROUP
NAME
All Mute group names
FADER BANK
SELECT
FADER BANK selection status, MAIN FADER assign
status
• MATRIX channel
NOTE
• STEREO channel
If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack
A and B individually. For other racks, the setting for racks A and B will be linked.
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
• MONO channel
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel
to all other input channels.
Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input
channels.
If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the
selected channel will light green, as follows.
8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (shown only for output channels)
Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to
all other output channels.
Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output
channels.
In this illustration, the items that are lit green indicate that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT
PATCH, and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global
parameter settings.
In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, and
OUTPUT NAME will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light
green. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following
channels:
9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (excluding DCA groups)
Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel.
The button indication varies depending on the channel type.
• Input channel
Button name
NOTE
ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT button.
• MIX channel
74
Corresponding parameter
Input
channel
WITH MIX SEND
Send level to the MIX bus
WITH MATRIX
SEND
Send level to MATRIX bus
ALL*1
All parameters
O
HA
HA-related settings
O
HPF
HPF settings
O
EQ
EQ settings
O
MIX
channel
MATRIX
channel
STEREO/
MONO
channel
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Button name
Corresponding parameter
Input
channel
MIX
channel
MATRIX
channel
STEREO/
MONO
channel
O
O
O
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
O
DYNA 2
Dynamics 2 settings
O
MIX SEND
Send level to MIX bus
O
MATRIX SEND
Send level to MATRIX bus
O
O
FADER
Fader settings
O
O
O
O
CH ON
[ON] key settings
O
O
O
O
TO ST
On/off setting for STEREO bus
assignment, PAN, etc.
O
O
MONO
On/off setting for MONO bus
assignment
O
O
INPUT PATCH
Input patch settings
O
DIGITAL GAIN
Digital gain settings
O
INSERT*2
Insert on/off
O*3
O
O
O
INSERT PATCH*2
Insert patch settings
O*3
O
O
O
DIRECT OUT
Direct Out settings
O*3
MIX ON
MIX Send On/Off
O
MATRIX ON
MATRIX Send On/Off
O
DELAY
Delay settings
O
NAME
Channel name
O
OUTPUT PATCH
Output patch settings
BAL
BALANCE parameter settings
DCA ASSIGN*4
Settings registered in DCA
group
O
MUTE ASSIGN
Settings registered in MUTE
group
O
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (DCA)
For each DCA group, selects the parameters for which Recall Safe is enabled. If the ALL
button is on, all DCA main parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on,
Recall Safe will apply to the DCA main level and on/off status. If NAME is on, Recall Safe
will apply to the DCA group name. Although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON
button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL
button.
O
0 SAFE button (excluding DCA groups)
When this button is turned on, Recall Safe will be enabled for the selected channel.
NOTE
Even if a parameter is selected with the Safe Parameter Select button, Recall Safe will not be
enabled if this button is off.
A CLOSE button
Closes the window.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(STEREO
only)
O
O
O
O
O
O
The default setting is ALL on.
Insert 1 and Insert 2 are set together.
ST IN channels do not feature these buttons.
When this button is turned on, the settings registered for the DCA group are targeted for RECALL SAFE.
Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously. Also, settings are linked according to the channel link for the
current scene when the settings are made.
75
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Channel Link function
Linking the desired input channels
This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels.
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ
between input and output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a “link
group”. There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and
combinations of channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types
of parameters to be linked for each link group. However, input channels and output channels
cannot coexist on the same link group.
NOTE
Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the CH LINK button in the CH JOB menu.
3. To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press
the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel.
4. Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field in the CH LINK MODE window to
select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
5. If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in
step 4, use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for
which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
For an input channel:
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• HPF settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 settings
• Dynamics 2 settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
• DELAY setting
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
NOTE
For an output channel:
• EQ settings
• Dynamics settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting *1
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
• You can also access the CH LINK MODE window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing
the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked.
• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the
[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel
will be ignored.
76
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
3 LINK PARAMETER field
CH LINK MODE window (input channels)
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to link. You can do
this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
You can view the channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.
5
HA
Head amp settings
However, for wireless devices, the GAIN parameter
for the receiver side is not included.
HPF
HPF settings
DIGITAL GAIN
Digital gain settings
1
2
EQ
EQ settings
DYNAMICS 1, 2
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
INSERT
Insert settings
3
DIRECT OUT
Direct Out settings
MIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
MIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
MATRIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER
Fader operations
DCA
DCA group assignment
CH ON
Channel on/off
MUTE
Mute group assignment
TO STEREO
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO
buses
DELAY
Channel delay settings
4
1 Input channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding input channels will be highlighted. If
there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this
field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link input channels in this window.
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked,
but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of
key-in signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” on
page 59.
* Units of 8ch means Ch1–8, Ch9–16, Ch17–24, Ch25–32, Ch33–40, Ch41–48, Ch49–56,
Ch57–64, ST IN 1L–ST IN 4R, and ST IN 5L–ST IN 8R.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 buttons, library recall operations will also be linked.
• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same
relative level difference between the channels.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
NOTE
• Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked.
• In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
2 Link indicator
If an input channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is
shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel that does not belong to any link
group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that
had been previously displayed.
77
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
4 SEND PARAMETER field
CH LINK MODE window (output channels)
If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons
in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination
bus(es).
MIX1–16
MIX buses 1–16
MTRX 1–8
MATRIX buses 1–8
You can view the output channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be
linked.
5
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be
linked.
5 INPUT/OUTPUT button
1
2
Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels
screen.
3
 Channel link operations
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each channel
you want to add to the link group.
4
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add
to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the
previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel
that you want to remove.
1 Output channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding output channels will be highlighted.
If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this
field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link output channels in this window.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the
parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group
temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each
other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the
case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader. While you are holding down
the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you
cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
2 Link indicator
If an output channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is
shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an output channel that does not belong to any
link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that
had been previously displayed.
78
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
3 LINK PARAMETER field
 Channel link operations
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can
do this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
EQ
EQ settings
DYNAMICS
Dynamics settings
INSERT
Insert settings
MATRIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
MATRIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
FADER
Fader operations
CH ON
Channel on/off
TO STEREO
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses *1
DCA
DCA group assignment
MUTE
Mute group assignment
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each output
channel you want to add to the link group.
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add
to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination output channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to
the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel
that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the
parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group
temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each
other while maintaining the same relative level differences. While you are holding down
the [SEL] key, the fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily
cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics for two or more output channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the
key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in
signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” (page 59).
* Units of 8ch means MIX1–MIX8, MIX9–MIX16, and MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
4 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER
field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
MTRX 1-8
MATRIX buses 1-8
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be
linked.
5 INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels
screen.
79
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
5 CLOSE button
CH LINK SET window
Closes the window.
Displayed when you press the channel display field in the CH LINK MODE window. You can
also link channels in this window.
NOTE
If you use QL5 settings data on the QL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned
to a channel that does not exist on that model.
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a
specific channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
1
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute
the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
2
3
5
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the COPY button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press a [SEL] key to select the copy-source channel.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the copy-destination channel (multiple selections are
allowed).
5. If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in
the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
6. Press the COPY button to execute the copy.
4
1 Channel select button
Select a channel that you want to link. The selected input channel will be indicated in
blue, the selected output channel will be indicated in orange, and the alphabetical
character that indicates the link group will appear for linked channels.
When selecting a channel
When linking channels
2 LINK buttons
Link the channel selected in 1.
3 UNLINK button
Cancels the link selected in 1.
4 UNSELECT ALL
De-selects all selected channels.
80
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
1 SOURCE CH field
Displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on
the top panel to select a channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press this field.
Before selection
Function
Access Area
After selection
CH JOB
menu
CH COPY MODE window
This window enables you to copy channel settings.
If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will
appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.
If these buttons are turned on, the following parameters
will be copied:
• MODULE PARAMETERS button
Selected channel module parameters
• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel
1
4
2
3
81
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
2 DESTINATION CHs field
Displays the copy-destination channel. When you specify
the copy source, you can then select a copy-destination
channel (multiple selections are allowed) by pressing its
[SEL] key on the panel, and this field will be highlighted.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination
channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model
will not be shown.
3 COPY button
Function
Access Area
Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copydestination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation.
4 CLOSE button
CH JOB
menu
CH MOVE MODE window
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Moving the parameters of a channel
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you
execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and
move-destination will move forward or backward by one.
Move
1
2
3
1
4
2
5
3
1
5
2
3
4
4
Move by one.
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between ST IN channels
1 SOURCE CH field
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the MOVE button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press a [SEL] key to select the move-source channel.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the move-destination channel.
5. To execute the move, press the MOVE button.
2 DESTINATION CH field
Displays the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on
the top panel to select an input channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this
field. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press this field.
Displays the move-destination channel. When you specify the move-source, you can
then select the move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel.
When the move-destination channel is selected, this field will be highlighted. If you
want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the DESTINATION CH field.
82
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Function
Access Area
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3 MOVE button
CH JOB
menu
NOTE
Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and
move-destination channel, the channel settings move from the move-source to the
move-destination. The settings of all channels between the move-source and
move-destination will shift toward the move-source by one channel.
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).
CH DEFAULT MODE window
Enables you to initialize parameters.
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Initializing the parameters of a channel
You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be
performed on any channel(s).
1
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the DEFAULT button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press the [SEL] key of the channel(s) to be initialized to make it light (multiple
selections are allowed).
4. Press the DEFAULT button to execute the Initialization.
2
3
1 TARGET CHs field
Indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a
[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The
field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to
de-select the channel.
NOTE
• If you press this field while a channel is selected, all selected channels will be de-selected.
• In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
2 DEFAULT button
After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.
83
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
3 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
About Mix Minus
The Mix Minus function removes a specific channel signal from the signals sent to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. You can use this function to quickly send monitoring signals to a performer or
announcer simply by removing his or her audio signal.
NOTE
This Mix Minus function is a shortcut for settings, rather than an operation to switch between
modes. Therefore, even after using this function, you can still edit any parameter on the window
without restrictions.
STEP
1. Hold the [SEL] key while pressing the MIX/MATRIX bus key in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
2. The MIX MINUS popup window will open.
3. If you wish to remove an additional input channel, press the corresponding [SEL]
key.
4. If necessary, in the DESTINATION field, select a bus.
You cannot select a FIXED bus.
5. Press the OK button to set the parameters as follows:
• The send level of the signals sent from the selected input channels is lowered to-∞dB.
• The send level of the signals sent from all other input channels is set to nominal
(0.0dB).
• Send to the destination bus is turned on, and the send point is switched to POST.
• For the stereo input channels, the send level of the signal sent from both channels is
set to -∞ dB.
NOTE
You can also access the MIX MINUS popup window by pressing the CH JOB button in the
Function Access Area, then pressing the MIX MINUS button.
84
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Scene memory
SCENE field
1
On QL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output
port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory)
as a “scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000–300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene
used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001–300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the
following parameters.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
2
4
3
You can press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window, in which you can view
and edit additional settings for the scene.
1 Scene number
Input/output port patching
Channel name and color
Bus settings
Head amp settings
Digital gain settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
Input delay settings
Rack (GEQ/Effect/Premium Rack) settings
Pan/balance settings
Insert/Direct Out settings
On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
Settings for signals sent to the STEREO/MONO bus
DCA group settings
Mute group settings
Channel link settings
Panel assignment status (PANEL SNAPSHOT)
CUSTOM FADER BANK settings
Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. When you select a new scene
number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number
is different than the currently-loaded scene number.
2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here.
Write-protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.
3 Scene title
Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene.
4 E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.
This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the
changes you made.
NOTE
You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function
Access Area.
85
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Storing and recalling scenes
SCENE STORE window
1
To store or recall the current mix settings as a scene memory, use the SCENE LIST window.
2
Storing a scene
 Using the SCENE LIST window
STEP
1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the
mix parameters as desired.
2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3. Turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the store-destination scene number.
4. Press the STORE button in the SCENE LIST window.
5. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
6. Press the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window.
7. Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store
operation.
NOTE
1 SCENE TITLE field
• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI
SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. Alternatively, rotate
the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob while pressing and holding it down.
• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all
selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the
same mix settings.
Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as
a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).
NOTE
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
86
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
SCENE LIST window
To enable/disable the scene protect setting, press the R symbol or protect symbol of the
selected scene. Pressing the protect (lock) symbol or the R (read-only) symbol repeatedly
will switch between displaying and hiding the corresponding symbol.
Here you can perform various scene-related operations. This window will appear when you
press the SCENE field.
E
• Protect (lock) symbol
You will be unable to overwrite the scene.
1
• R (READ ONLY) symbol
Not only will the scene be protected, it will also not be overwritten by any file loaded
from a USB flash drive. You can only apply the protect setting to scenes with consecutive
scene numbers starting with scene #001.
2
5
4
3
• No symbol
No scene will be protected.
NOTE
The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
6
6 Current scene
The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list.
If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will
become the current scene.
7 SCENE SELECT knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected
scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob. You can select consecutive
multiple scenes by rotating the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob while pressing and holding
it down.
7
8
8 MULTI SELECT button
9@ A B C
You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
D
9 LAST SCENE button
1 Scene list
Selects the scene that was recalled most recently.
This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.
0 SCENE STORE button
2 NO./TITLE buttons
This button stores the current mix settings. Press this button to display the SCENE
STORE window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it.
Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button
repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order.
A STORE UNDO button
3 Scene number
Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an
Overwrite-store operation.
Indicates the scene number.
4 Scene title
NOTE
Indicates the scene title. Press this button to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in
which you can edit the title.
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing.
• You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
(page 221).
5 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
An “R” symbol is displayed for read-only scenes, and a protect (lock) icon is displayed for
write-protected scenes.
B RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
87
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
C RECALL UNDO button
1 RECALL SCENE button
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a
Recall operation.
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
2 RECALL UNDO button
D Page switching tabs
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a
Recall operation.
Switch the views for the right side of the SCENE LIST window.
NOTE
E PREVIEW button
• You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
(page 221).
• You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (page 188).
Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings
in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.
Recalling a scene
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the scene number to recall.
3. Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST window.
SCENE LIST window
12
88
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall
You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or
to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a
USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED
key.
• RECALL
Immediately recalls the currently-loaded scene.
• INC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.
• DEC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.
SETUP screen
USER SETUP window
NOTE
If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the
closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled.
• DIRECT RECALL
Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you
press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be
recalled immediately.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4. Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function.
5. In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”
6. Selects the function you want to assign.
• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP
window
• To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx
is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
8. Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.
89
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
1 Sort button
Editing scene memories
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and
copy and paste them.
• NO.
Sorts the list in order of scene number.
• TITLE
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of title.
Sorting scene memories
• COMMENT
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments.
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob on the top panel to select a scene.
4. Edit the scene.
• TIME STAMP
Sorts the list in order of date of creation.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or
descending).
SCENE LIST window
1
2 Write-protect
2
1
Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A
lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.
1
3 TITLE field
Press this field to open the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can enter the title
for the scene. You can edit titles in this window.
4 COMMENT field
Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter
comments for the scene. You can edit comments in this window.
3
5 STATUS field
6
5
Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK
(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link
function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)
4
6 TIME STAMP field
Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.
For details on the TIME STAMP display format, refer to “Setting the date and time of the
internal clock” on page 247.
7
8
7 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes
made here are immediately reflected on the QL series console.
8 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right
half of the window between five different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/GPI
OUT/PLAYBACK LINK).
90
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Scene memory editing
Copying and pasting a scene
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or
cleared (erased). You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of
the SCENE LIST window.
You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.
1
2
3
4
5
NOTE
The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the
current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (page 92).
6
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the copy-source scene number, and
then press the COPY button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the copy.
4. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the paste-destination scene number,
and then press the PASTE button.
5. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the paste
operation.
1 COPY button
Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory.
2 PASTE button
Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.
3 CLEAR button
Press this button to erase the selected scene.
4 CUT button
NOTE
Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory. The
numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented by one.
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene
will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.
• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to
turn it on, and then rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. In this case, the same content will be
pasted to all selected scenes.
• A copied scene can also be inserted (page 92).
• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.
5 INSERT button
Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene
number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.
6 UNDO button
Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores
the previous state.
Clearing a scene
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the scene number to clear, and then
press the CLEAR button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Clear
operation.
NOTE
• You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn
it on, and then rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.
91
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Cutting a scene
Using the Global Paste function
This section explains how to cut a scene.
When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented
accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. To cut a scene, sort
the scene list in order of scene number.
“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or
parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed).
This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to
multiple scenes that have already been stored.
NOTE
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the SCENE LIST window of the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the scene number to cut, and then
press the CUT button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Cut operation.
4. If desired, you can paste (page 91) or insert the cut scene (that was copied to the
buffer memory).
The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT
parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the GLOBAL PASTE button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Use the tabs in the GLOBAL PASTE window to select the item you want to copy.
4. Press the [SEL] key on the top panel to select the copy-source channel, and then
press the button in the window to select a parameter.
5. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the range of paste-destination scenes.
6. Press the PASTE button to execute the paste operation.
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or
cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
Inserting a scene
You can insert a scene copied to buffer memory at a desired scene number location. To insert
a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number.
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Copy (page 91) or cut the scene you want to insert.
3. Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the insert-source scene number, and
then press the INSERT button in the SCENE LIST window.
4. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Insert
operation.
SCENE LIST window
GLOBAL PASTE window
NOTE
NOTE
• A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.
• During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to
abort the operation. In that case, part of the data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo
the operation.
• You cannot select different parameters from different channels.
• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the
selected number of times.
• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available.
• The INSERT button will be unavailable if there is already a scene stored at scene number 300,
or if the Insert operation would cause an already-stored scene to exceed number 300.
• When you insert a scene, scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location
will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted.
92
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
4 Tabs
GLOBAL PASTE window
Enable you to switch between items.
• INPUT tab
Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left
area.
You can select the following parameters.
1
2
3
4
1 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all
channels simultaneously.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3 SEND PARAMETER field
Press this field to open the SEND PARAMETER screen. In the SEND PARATMER screen, set
whether to enable global paste for bus selection and send level.
ALL
All input channel parameters
INPUT PATCH
Input patch settings
NAME
Channel name, icon, and channel color
HA
Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel, and
phase
DELAY
Input delay settings
HPF
HPF settings
DIGITAL GAIN
Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel
EQ
EQ settings
DYNA1
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
DYNA2
Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
MIX SEND
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus
MATRIX SEND
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
FADER
Fader level
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
INSERT*1
Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH*1
Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
DIRECT OUT
Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings
MIX ON
Send on/off to a MIX bus
MATRIX ON
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
TO ST
TO ST on/off, pan/balance settings
MONO
TO MONO on/off
*2
DCA ASSIGN
Settings registered in DCA group
MUTE ASSIGN*2
Settings registered in MUTE group
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• OUTPUT tab
Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left
area.
You can select the following parameters.
93
ALL
All output channel parameters
OUTPUT PATCH
Output patch settings
NAME
Channel name, icon, and channel color
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
EQ
EQ settings
Custom fader bank settings
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
CUSTOM FADER
BANK*1
DYNA 1
Insert on/off status and insert point
CASCADE IN
CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings
Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
CASCADE OUT
CASCADE OUT PATCH settings
FADER
Fader level
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
*1. While in PREVIEW mode, changes that are made in QL Editor are not applied immediately. They are applied
after PREVIEW mode is exited.
TO ST/BAL
TO ST on/off, pan/balance settings
MONO
TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1–16 only)
MATRIX SEND
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
MATRIX ON
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
WITH SEND
FROM SOURCE
CHs
SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel
DCA ASSIGN*2
Settings registered in DCA group
MUTE ASSIGN*2
Settings registered in MUTE group
INSERT*1
INSERT PATCH
*1
• DCA tab
You can select ALL, LEVEL/ON, or NAME. If ALL is selected, all channel parameters will
be copied. If LEVEL/ON is selected, the main level and DCA channel on/off status will be
copied. If NAME is selected, the DCA group name will be copied. You can select the
copy-source channels individually for each DCA group 1-16.
For DCA, although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button,
they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button.
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• BUS SETUP tab
You can select the following parameters.
MIX1/2 - 15/16
Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-16 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is
applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one evennumbered channel).
Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is
MATRIX1/2 - 7/8 applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one evennumbered channel).
SURROUND
SETUP
Surround mode settings.
• RACK tab
Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can
individually select an GEQ for a Flex15GEQ or an effect used in dual mode.
• PATCH/OTHERs tab
You can select the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH
All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches
OUTPUT PATCH
All output channel patches, insert in/out patches
INPUT NAME
Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels
OUTPUT NAME
Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels
HA
Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation, phase
settings
CH LINK
Channel link settings
MUTE GROUP
NAME
Setting a MUTE group name
94
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Using the Focus Recall function
SCENE LIST window
1
“Focus Recall” is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled
(loaded) when you recall a scene. You can specify these settings for each scene. This function
is useful if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a specific scene.
2
NOTE
In contrast to Focus, the QL series console also features a “Recall Safe” function that enables
you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However, while the
Focus Recall function is specified individually for each scene, the Recall Safe settings are applied
to all scenes.
3
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4. Follow the procedure starting with step 3 in the “Using the Recall Safe function” on
page 72 to make settings.
5. Recall a scene for which you have made Focus Recall settings.
4
1 FOCUS button
Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene.
2 SET popup button
Press this button to access the FOCUS RECALL popup window, which allows you to
select the parameters that will be subject to recall.
SCENE field
3 FOCUS PARAMETER indicators
SCENE LIST window
These indicators show the focus recall settings that are specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
NOTE
• The FOCUS field enables you to make settings for the Focus function. The buttons in this field
correspond to the scene list shown on the left side of the SCENE LIST window.
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS
field of the SCENE LIST window.
• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or
parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be
recalled.
• For FOCUS RECALL, the NAME parameter is included in the DCA indicator.
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
95
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
3 SET BY SEL button
FOCUS RECALL window
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To add
channels as the target, turn on this button, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys
for the channels you want to add.
Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
Sets the parameters that will be recalled.
2
4
1
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4 FOCUS PARAMETER display field
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any
scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE
window (page 73).
3
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Focus Recall function.
5
7
9
6
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
8
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Focus Recall parameter selection for one input channel
to all other input channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Focus Recall to the same parameters for all
input channels.
0
1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
8 Recall parameter select button
Turns off (or on) all focus channel selections and global focus parameter settings.
Selects Focus Recall parameters for the selected channel.
Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall
operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE MODE window
(page 73).
2 Focus channel display field
Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as
that in the RECALL SAFE window.
NOTE
All parameters are affected by Recall on these channels.
• If the DCA ASSIGN button is turned on, the parameters assigned to the DCA groups (1-16) for
that channel are targeted for FOCUS RECALL. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously.
• DCA ASSIGN button settings are linked according to the channel link for the scene.
Some parameters are affected by Recall on these channels.
9 FOCUS button
Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.
Recall has been canceled on these channels.
0 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
96
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Using the Fade function
SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field)
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups
to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade
function are made independently for each scene.
1
2
3
4
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4. Press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA
groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).
5. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the fade time.
6. Press the OK button to close the FADE TIME window.
7. Press the FADE button in the SCENE LIST window to enable the Fade function.
8. Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values
of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time.
5
1 FADE button
Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.
2 INDIVIDUAL button
Switches between GLOBAL mode and INDIVIDUAL mode of the Fade function. Set to
on to set the fade time and offset time for each channel. When it is on, PAN can be
individually set on the input channel.
3 SET button
SCENE field
Press this button to open the FADE TIME window, in which you can select a channel for
which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time
over which the fader will reach its new value).
SCENE LIST window
(FADE TIME field)
4 FADE TIME display
NOTE
• Scenes for which the Fade settings are made are marked by a “FADE” indicator in the STATUS
field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab).
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.
• You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving
fader.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups
will move immediately to their target positions.
This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
If the INDIVIDUAL mode is set to on, this will not be displayed.
5 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you
make here are immediately applied to the QL console.
97
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
FADE TIME window (GLOBAL mode)
FADE TIME window (INDIVIDUAL mode)
You can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. To display
this window, press the SET button in the FADE TIME field in the SCENE LIST window.
The INDIVIDUAL mode allows you to control fading and fade time of each channel
individually. When the INDIVIDUAL button is set to on, press the SET button in the FADE
TIME field of the SCENE LIST window to open the FADE TIME window.
1
3
4
1
2
3
2
1 Channel display field
The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted. To select the
channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied, press the [SEL] keys for the channels
or DCA groups. Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
2 FADE TIME knob
Sets the fade time. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the values.
The range is 0.0 sec – 60.0 sec.
NOTE
The fade time is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in the channel display field.
4
3 SET ALL button
Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene.
1 Display switch buttons
4 CLEAR ALL button
Switches the display of the FADE TIME window.
Press this button to cancel the Fade function for all faders of that scene.
TIME
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• FADE TIME knob ................... Sets the fade time. You can adjust the value by using
the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec.
98
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Outputting a control signal to an external device
in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
START OFFSET
A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the QL
series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.
NOTE
For more information on GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” on page 264.
• START OFFSET knob ............ Sets the offset time from recalling the Scene to starting
the fading. You can adjust the value by using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec.
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT
port.
4. Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.
ON
• FAD button.............................. Enables or disables the Fade function for each fader.
• PAN button ............................. Appears for input channels. Enables or disables the
Fade function for PAN.
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to restore the default parameter setting.
3 COPY button/PASTE button
Copies/pastes the Fade functions parameters for a channel.
SCENE LIST window
(GPI OUT field)
4 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
99
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene
recall
SCENE LIST window (GPI OUT field)
You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a
specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be
played automatically in a specific scene.
NOTE
• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the
root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio
file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.
• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.
• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.
• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file
name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified
file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.
1
STEP
1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3. Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
4. Press the song select button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file.
5. Press the SONG SELECT window or use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a file
that you want to link to a scene.
6. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the offset (the time duration until the start
of audio file playback).
7. Press the OK button.
8. Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.
9. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
2
1 GPI OUT CONTROL buttons
These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT.
Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions.
• ---- (OFF).................. Nothing will be output.
• TRIGGER................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled.
• TALLY ...................... A tally will be output when the scene is recalled.
2 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
SCENE LIST window
(PLAYBACK LINK field)
100
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
SONG SELECT window
NOTE
• After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear
in the Function Access Area.
• If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is
recalled, regardless of the offset time setting.
You can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. This
window will appear when you press the song select button.
2
SCENE LIST window (PLAYBACK LINK field)
3
1
4
5
1
6
7
3
2
8
4
1 Change directory button
Press this button to move to the next higher folder level.
NOTE
1 PLAY button
You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene.
2 PATH indicator
2 Song select button
This area indicates the current directory path.
Press this button to open the SONG SELECT window, in which you can select a song and
set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the
title of the selected song will appear on the button.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons
Switch between the song title list and the file name list.
3 Offset time display
4 SONG TITLE list button
5 ARTIST list button
Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified
audio file. Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT window.
Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title
and artist name respectively.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
6 Song list
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
Displays the title, artist name, and audio file time duration of the audio files in the
\YPE\SONGS\ folder. You can select an audio file by pressing the audio file name.
101
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
7 OFFSET knob
Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external
devices.
• QL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Tx
• GPI OUT
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the time duration from scene recall
until the start of audio file playback. The offset value can be adjusted in the range of 0.0
– 99.0 in 0.5 sec steps.
8 Scroll knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to scroll the list.
The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.
If cascade-connected, both leader and follower units will operate independently. Link will not
occur while in Preview mode.
Using Preview mode
Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting
the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings
of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the QL series console, but the signal
processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the
settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current
scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be
convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make
minor changes to a scene and then store it.
The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.
• Synchronization with QL Editor
• Switching users
• Changing the User Level
• Load/Save functions
• Cue changes
• USER DEFINED KEYS operations
• USER DEFINED KNOBS operations
• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display
• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings
• Changing or viewing the recorder
• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings
• FADE TIME
• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording
• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects
• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt2A, U76 and Buss Comp 369)
STEP
1. Press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
2. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate the SCENE SELECT knobs in the SCENE
LIST window, and select the scene number that you want to recall.
3. Press the RECALL SCENE button in the SCENE LIST window. To execute the Recall
operation, press the OK button.
4. If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings.
5. If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in
which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key in
the SCENE LIST window.
6. When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the
PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.
• While pasting scene or EQ settings
• While executing Global Paste
• While synchronizing with QL Editor
• While saving/loading a file
NOTE
• PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in
the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.
• RECALL SAFE and FOCUS RECALL are enabled in PREVIEW mode.
Functions in Preview mode
NOTE
The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.
• QL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Rx
• GPI IN
The scene titles shown in StageMix will be changed to the titles used when using the store
operation on a QL series console operated in PREVIEW mode.
102
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
Monitor and Cue functions
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
CUE(A) / STEREO MONITOR
The Monitor function lets you monitor various outputs through your nearfield monitors or
headphones. Below the front panel of the QL series console is a PHONES out jack for
monitoring, which enables you to monitor the monitoring source signal at any time. By
assigning the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also
monitor the same signal through external speakers.
You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO+MONO channel output signal
• INPUT 25-26, 27-28, 29-30, 31-32 (9-10, 11-12, 13-14, 15-16 for the QL1) channel input
signal (for monitoring a two channel pair)
• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output
signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and INPUT 25-26, 27-28, 29-30, 3132 (9-10, 11-12, 13-14, 15-16 for the QL1) input signals
CUE(A) TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
MONO
MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS
CUE(A) ON
CUE(A) L BUS
CUE(A) L
METER
CUE(A) R BUS
CUE(A) R
METER
CUE(A) OUT ON
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
CUE(A) OUT L
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE(A) OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE(A) OUT
LEVEL
CUE(A) LOGIC
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
INPUT 25/26{9/10}
INPUT 27/28{11/12}
INPUT 29/30{13/14}
INPUT 31/32{15/16}
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
MIX OUT1-16
MAXTRIX OUT
1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R)
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX:8ch)
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONO
MONITOR L
METER
MONITOR R
METER
MONITOR MONO(C)
METER
ON
CUE(A) INTERRUPTION
To PHONES OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR OUT MONO(C)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
+MONO(C)
To PHONES OUT
PHONES R
MONITOR OUT R
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
ON
PHONES L
MONITOR OUT L
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DIMMER
MONITOR SELECT
INPUT 25/26{9/10}
INPUT 27/28{11/12}
INPUT 29/30{13/14}
INPUT 31/32{15/16}
PLAYBACK OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
An output port delay becomes invalid by
assigning a monitor out to the output port.
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR MONITOR
MONITOR DIMM ON LEVEL
FADER
CUE(A) / SURROUND MONITOR
CUE(A) TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS
CUE(A) ON
CUE(A) L BUS
CUE(A) L
METER CUE(A) L
CUE(A) R BUS
CUE(A) R
METER CUE(A) R
CUE(A) OUT ON
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
The Cue function enables you to check an individual channel or DCA group by temporarily
monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top
panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output
from the selected output port. There is also the Solo function. (Refer to page 114.)
CUE(A) OUT L
CUE(A) OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE(A) OUT
LEVEL
CUE(A) LOGIC
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
PHONES L
To PHONES OUT
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
MONITOR
LEVEL
CUE(A) INTERRUPTION
NOTE
ON
Surround
Monitor
Select
STEREO OUT L/R
MONO
PLAYBACK OUT
MIX OUT1-16
MAXTRIX OUT
1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R)
EXT IN ST-1
EXT IN ST-2
EXT IN ST-3
EXT IN ST-4
2ch
Monitor
Select
2
MIX OUT1-6
EXT IN 5.1-1
EXT IN 5.1-2
EXT IN 5.1-3
2ch selected
SPEAKER MUTE
DIMMER
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue
signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will
always be sent to the PHONES Out jack.
Monitor Matrix
METER
6
6
6
6
2
6
5.1 Solo
Down Mix 5.1 -> Stereo, Mono
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
L
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
R
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
C
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
Ls
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
Rs
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
LFE
To OUTPUT PATCH
SURROUND MONITOR
To DANTE,OMNI OUT,SLOT
An output port delay becomes invalid by
assigning a monitor out to the output port.
MONITOR MONITOR
LEVEL
FADER
To OUTPUT PATCH
EXT IN ** are assignable from DANTE, SLOT, INPUT
MONITOR MATRIX OUT
To SLOT
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the monitor source.
• METER
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal.
• DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
• MONITOR LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK
is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
103
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
• MONITOR FADER
Use the STEREO MAIN fader or MONO MAIN fader to adjust the output level of the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with
MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at
the PHONES Out jack.
Using the Monitor function
• ON (On/off)
Switches the Monitor function on or off.
STEP
1. Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on
the rear panel. To monitor through headphones, connect your headphones to the
PHONES Out jack below the front panel.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
3. Press the MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.
4. Use the source select buttons in MONITOR screen to select the monitor source.
5. Press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to specify
the port that will be the output destination for monitor signals L, R, and C (multiple
selections are allowed).
6. Turn the OUTPUT button on to enable monitoring.
7. To adjust the monitor level, set the MONITOR LEVEL control located in the Function
Access Area by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
8. Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, and Monaural as desired.
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the
PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers.
• DELAY (Monitor delay)
Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.
• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the dedicated output level of the PHONES Out jack.
• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)
If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals
sent to the PHONES Out jack.
• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)
If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue
signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output
from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned
on.
Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers.
MONITOR screen
NOTE
Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also
be assigned to USER DEFINED keys (page 221).
104
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
4 MONITOR FADER field
MONITOR screen
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and
turn monitoring on or off.
2
3
4
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level.
5
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader.
Indicator assignments are as follows.
• ---- .......................................... No assignment
• MAIN A .................................. Main A only
• MAIN A+ ................................ Main A, Main B, Custom fader bank
• MAIN B .................................. Main B only
• MAIN B+ ................................ Main B, Custom fader bank
• CUSTOM................................ A single fader in the Custom fader bank
• CUSTOMs.............................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank
6
1
7
8
5 Meter field
Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open
the MONITOR window.
6 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches the Monitor Output on or off.
7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob or MONITOR FADER will adjust the level
of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
8 MONO MONITOR button
1 MONITOR display button
Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono.
When you press this button, the MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make
detailed monitor settings.
2 SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the
MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates
monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer
is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
105
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
2 DIMMER field
MONITOR window
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates
monitor signals.
You can make detailed settings for monitoring. This screen appears when you press the
MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.
1
4
2 3
5 6
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer
is on.
7
• DIMMER ON button
Switches the Dimmer function on or off. The monitor signal will be attenuated if this
button is on.
3 TALKBACK DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates
monitor signals when TALKBACK is on.
0
• TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor level will be attenuated when talkback is on.
• TALKBACK ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the dimmer function for talkback.
4 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level.
If this button is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob and monitor fader will adjust the
level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
A
5 CUE INTERRUPTION button
8
Press this button to interrupt the monitor signal by the cue signal. If this button is on
and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the
factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue
signal to the monitor output, switch this button off.
9
1 SOURCE SELECT field
6 MONO MONITOR button
Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
STEREO L/R
STEREO L/R channel signals
MONO (C)
MONO channel signal
LCR
STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals
Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono.
7 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches the monitor output on or off.
INPUT 25-26–31-32*1 INPUT jacks 25–32*2 signals (per two channels)
PB OUT
Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
DEFINE
The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field
LINK
Links the monitor source with the MIX/MATRIX bus
selected in SENDS ON FADER mode.
*1. QL1: 9-10–15-16
*2. QL1: 9–16
106
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
8 MONITOR FADER field
0 Meter field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• Meters
Indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
monitor level.
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned as MONITOR FADER.
Indicator assignments are as follows.
----
No assignment
MAIN A
MAIN A fader only
MAIN A+
MAIN A, as well as MAIN B fader and Custom fader bank
MAIN B
MAIN B fader only
MAIN B+
MAIN B, as well as Custom fader bank
CUSTOM
One of the Custom fader bank faders
CUSTOMs
Multiple Custom fader bank faders
PORT SELECT window
9 MONITOR DELAY field
This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out
signal is delayed.
• AUTO BYPASS button
Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.
DANTE1–64*1
Output channels 1–64 to audio network*1
OMNI1–16*2
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16*2
DIGI OUT L/R
DIGITAL OUT jack on the QL unit
SLOT1-1–SLOT2-16
Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–2
*1. QL1: 1–32
*2. QL1: 1–8
• MONITOR DELAY knob
Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal. The delay time is shown above the knob
in ms units, and below the knob in units of the currently-selected scale. However if the
scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob.
If you press this knob, you can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
NOTE
• You can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers.
• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or
LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be
distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
A ASSIGN field
• MONITOR DELAY ON button
If this button is on, the monitor signal will be delayed according to the setting of the
MONITOR DELAY knob.
If you have selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field
to specify multiple monitor sources. The following table shows the monitor sources that
you can select in the ASSIGN field.
MIX 1–16
MIX channels 1–16 output signals
MTRX 1–8
MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals
STEREO
STEREO L/R channel output signals
MONO (C)
MONO channel output signal
PB OUT
Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
INPUT 25-26–31-32*1
INPUT jacks 25–32*2 signals (per two channels)
*1. QL1: 9-10–15-16
*2. QL1: 9–16
NOTE
You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight
monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Turn off the buttons of unneeded sources.
107
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
MONITOR screen (Monitor field in Surround mode)
SURROUND MONITOR window (Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the Monitor field in the MONITOR screen
appears as shown below.
You can make detailed settings for surround monitoring. If Surround mode is set for the bus
settings in BUS SETUP, this window appears when you press the MONITOR display button
or meter field in the MONITOR screen.
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
1
5
1 SURROUND MONITOR display button
1
When you press this button, the SURROUND MONITOR window will appear, in which
you can make detailed surround monitor settings.
2 SOURCE SELECT field
6
Selects the surround monitor source. If 2CH MONITOR has been selected in this field,
use the SURROUND MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3 Speaker Mute field
7
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
4 DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
• STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
• MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
5 Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is
the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
1 SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following as the surround source that will be output to the MONITOR
bus.
MIX1-6
Surround signals in the current mix
EXT5.1-1-3
Surround signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP (3 channels)
2CH MONITOR
Stereo signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP
2 MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button
Use this button to open the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen. Set the sources and
names for EXT 5.1 - 1-3 (EXTERNAL SURROUND) and EXT ST - 1-4 (EXTERNAL STEREO).
108
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
3 DOWNMIX field
MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
Press the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open
this screen.
• STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
1
2
• MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
4 DOWNMIX SETUP button
Use this button to open the DOWNMIX SETUP screen. Set the parameters for
downmixes.
5 Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is
the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
6 Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
7 SOLO button
Turns on the solo function for the monitor speakers. When turned on, all speaker
buttons in the speaker mute field are turned on. At this time, if you press one of the
speaker buttons, only that button remains on; the other buttons go off. If you press a
different speaker button, the other buttons go off.
NOTE
If you switch to Surround mode, the patch for monitor output can be set in the OUTPUT PORT
screen rather than this screen. (Refer to page 56.)
1
1 NAME field
Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the NAME tab selected). Enter
the source name in the Keyboard screen.
2 PATCH field
Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the PATCH tab selected). Select
the port to patch.
109
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
DOWNMIX SETUP screen
Using the Cue function
Press the DOWNMIX SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this
screen. The layout of the channels is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP
screen.
About CUE groups
Cue signals on the QL series console can be categorized into the following four groups.
3
1 INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable cue for this group, press
the [CUE] key for any input channel to turn cue on.
Input channel [CUE] key
1
2 DCA CUE group
The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable cue for this group, press
the [CUE] key of one of the DCA groups to turn cue on.
2
DCA group [CUE] key
1 Output channel field
Selects the output channel. You can use the L and R buttons to switch each between on/
off.
3 OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To enable cue for this group,
press the [CUE] key of one of the output channels.
2 Downmix parameter field
Sets the downmix parameters for each channel and the main channel monitors.
3 APPLY TO MIX1-6 TO STEREO button
Output channel [CUE] key
Press this button to apply the downmix parameters for the set monitors to the downmix
parameters for the main channel (MIX1-6 to STEREO).
MIX/MATRIX channel [CUE] key
110
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
4 Other CUE group
These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the
touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE
button in the EFFECT window or the PREMIUM window, or
if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1
window. This group will automatically be disabled when
you exit the corresponding window.
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue
signals.
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue
signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the front panel PHONES jack
will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “Using the Monitor
function” on page 104 for details about the Monitor function.
On-screen CUE button
NOTE
You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group
to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs
will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.
However, if you have switched the cue signal group in a specific order when the CUE MODE
setting is MIX CUE, the state of the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be restored
when the current cue signal is defeated.
The right illustration shows the priority
order of the [CUE] keys. After you
Other CUE group
have switched groups from lower to
upper levels, if you then defeat cue for
the upper group, the previous [CUE]
INPUT CUE group
key status of the group immediately
below will be restored.
DCA CUE group
For example, if you switch groups in
the order of OUTPUT CUE group 
DCA CUE group  INPUT CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
 Other CUE group, you can then
successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to
successively restore the [CUE] key
status of the previously-selected group.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2. Press the CUE display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field in the MONITOR
screen.
3. Use the CUE MODE button to select either the mode in which channels are mixed
for auditioning, or the mode in which only the last-selected channel is auditioned.
4. Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE field to specify
the output position and output level for each CUE group.
5. Press one of the CUE OUT PATCH buttons (L/R) in the meter field to specify a port
as the output destination for cue signals L and R (multiple selections are allowed).
6. To enable cue out for the port you specified in step 5, press the CUE OUTPUT button
to turn it on.
7. Press the [CUE] key of the channel or DCA group to be monitored to turn it on.
8. Adjust the cue signal level by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate the
CUE LEVEL knobs in the CUE field.
9. To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. To clear all cue
selections, press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field.
MONITOR screen
111
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
NOTE
• If CUE is set to 2 channels, the CUE meter is displayed as shown below.
• The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES Out jacks regardless of whether the
CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output
if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES Out jack,
regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.
• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER window, you can
press the selected button once again to turn on cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel
(page 40).
• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP
window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on [CUE][SEL] LINK (page 219).
• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key
(page 221).
• If PHONES LEVEL LINK (page 105) in the MONITOR screen is ON, the cue signal level when
monitoring through headphones can be adjusted using both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the
PHONES LEVEL knob.
• To adjust the level to the output destination port for the cue signal, adjust the gain of the output
port that is patched to it.
• If you turn on the [CUE] key, the cue output level is indicated. The upper part of the cue meter
shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-on cue group or cue button. The abbreviations
displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning.
IN
INPUT CUE group
DCA
DCA CUE group
OUT
OUTPUT CUE group
EFFECT
CUE button in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK windows
(Other CUE groups)
KEY IN
KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS1 window
(Other CUE groups)
REC/PB
RECORDER INPUT CUE button or PLAYBACK OUT CUE button
(Other CUE groups)
Only CUE A
Only CUE B
CUE A&B
MONITOR screen
The CUE field on the MONITOR screen enables you to check the current cue settings, and
turn cue on or off.
2
3
4
5
1
6
CUE meter
1 CUE display button
When you press this button, the CUE window will appear, in which you can make
detailed cue settings.
112
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
2 CUE MODE buttons
NOTE
All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in
the CUE MODE section.
Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued),
or LAST CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued).
3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE section
 INPUT CUE field
Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open
the CUE window.
This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.
2 Cue point select button
4 CUE LEVEL knob
Sets the cue point to PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), or
POST PAN (immediately after PAN).
Indicates the output level of the cue out. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to
adjust the level.
NOTE
5 CUE OUTPUT button
Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to
the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.
Switches the cue output on or off.
3 PFL TRIM knob
6 CLEAR CUE button
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If MIX CUE mode has been selected, all of the
selected channels will be cleared.
 DCA CUE field
CUE window
This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue.
You can make detailed settings for the cue. This window will appear when you press the
INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field.
1
2
4
7
A
B
4 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST
PAN (immediately after PAN).
C
5 DCA TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. You can adjust the level
using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
6 UNITY button
Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when
the main level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).
E
F
 OUTPUT CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue.
G
H
7 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL
(immediately after fader).
3
5
I
6
8
D
9 >
8 PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
1 CUE MODE buttons
Select one of the following two cue modes:
• MIX CUE
All selected channels will be mixed and monitored.
• LAST CUE
Only most recently selected channel will be monitored.
113
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
 Meter field
 FADER CUE RELEASE field
Move the fader of the channel that is cued to set the FADER CUE RELEASE function for
releasing the cue.
9 ACTIVE CUE indicator
Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow,
output: orange).
E ON button
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
0 CLEAR CUE button
F THRESHOLD knob
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously.
Sets the fader value for releasing the cue. If the fader value exceeds the value set with
this knob, the cue is released.
NOTE
If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.
A Meter section
 SOLO field
This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels.
Determines the Solo function parameters.
With the Solo function, only the signal of the input/output channel or DCA for which the [CUE]
key is pressed is output from MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO on each bus. All other channels or
DCA are muted.
B CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on or off.
C CUE LEVEL knob
G SOLO SAFE popup button
Indicates the output level of the cut out. You can adjust the values by using the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knobs.
When the SOLO SAFE popup button is pressed, the SOLO SAFE popup window (which
specifies soloed channels that are not muted) appears.
D CUE OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output
port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.
DANTE1–64*1
Output channels 1–64 to audio network*1
OMNI1–16*2
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16*2
DIGI OUT L/R
DIGITAL OUT jack on the QL unit
SLOT1-1–SLOT2-16
Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–2
Here you can specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can
specify more than one.)
The channels that are selected here will not be muted when SOLO mode is enabled. This
function is convenient if, for example, you want to protect certain channels from being
set to SOLO mode accidentally, such as the main STEREO channels and MIX channels
that send signals to an external recorder.
*1. QL1: 1-32
*2. QL1: 1-8
114
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
H SOLO ON button
 CUE screen (When configuring CUE B)
Turns Solo operation on or off. A popup window will ask you to confirm Solo operation.
To execute Solo operation, press the OK button. The button will light up and SOLO
mode will be enabled. To use the Solo function, make sure this button is on, and then
turn on the [CUE] key of the desired channel or DCA. Only the corresponding channel
or DCA will be output to the buses and output jacks;
the remaining channels and DCA groups will be muted. The same signal will also be
output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks.
When you press this button, the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area will flash
as shown.
When the USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button is pressed, a confirmation popup window
appears. If you press the OK button, the screen expands so you can configure the CUE A/B
settings.
CUE A field
1
NOTE
If you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel, the signal will be sent only to the corresponding
bus.
CUE OPERATION
MODE field
2
To defeat Solo, press the currently-on SOLO ON button once again.
3
NOTE
If you press [LAST CUE] to switch the CUE MODE from LAST to MIX (or vice versa), all
previously-enabled Cue (Solo) signals will be defeated.
CUE B field
 CUE B field
I USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button
1 USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button
When this button is pressed, channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX bus are combined and
used as a two-channel CUE.
When this button is pressed to turn it off, the CUE will be only a single channel.
 CUE A field
Configures the settings for CUE A.
If the CH/REMOTE switch button (2) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will
be linked with CUE A/B.
In Surround mode, a 5.1 SOLO button is added to the CUE MODE field.
115
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
3 CUE SETTINGS button
 CUE B field
Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen.
Configures the settings for CUE B.
If the CH/REMOTE switch button (2) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will
be linked with CUE A/B.
1
2
 CUE OPERATION MODE field
3
2 CH/REMOTE switch buttons
This section explains how to use a two-channel CUE.
For example, when a single operator wants to use two separate CUEs, they can be set
separately to an in-ear monitor signal and a floor monitor signal. If a single operator
wants to use a two-channel CUE, select the “CH.” Select the desired CUE SETTINGS for
each channel. You can select from A, B, or A+B. To use one CUE each for the console
and QL Editor/StageMix, select the “REMOTE.” The console is fixed to CUE A, while the
CL Editor/StageMix is fixed to CUE B.
NOTE
When “REMOTE” is selected, the device where CUE is actually turned on and the corresponding
targets are shown in the table below.
Device
Target
Console
CUE A
Cascaded console
CUE A
MIDI
CUE B
QL Editor
CUE B
StageMix
CUE B
GPI
CUE A
4
1 CUE A ALL button
Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE A only. However, if
the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE A only.
2 CUE B ALL button
Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE B only. However, if
the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE B only.
3 A/B switch button
Use this button to switch A and B on/off. However, both cannot be turned off at the
same time.
4 Tab
Use these to select the desired edit operation.
NOTE
If the ALTERNATE function is assigned to a USER DEFINED key and the [CUE] key is pressed
while ALTERNATE is on, the channel settings will toggle between A  B  A+B each time the
key is pressed.
116
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
 MONITOR screen (When using CUE B)
CUE screen (Surround mode)
When CUE B is enabled by setting, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown
below.
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE screen (where you can make
detailed cue settings) appears as shown below.
1
In Surround mode, the CUE field appears as shown below.
MONITOR screen (CUE field in Surround mode)
1 5.1. SOLO Button
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen
appears as shown below.
5.1 SOLO is only for input channels. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be
cued.
1
1 5.1. SOLO Button
Used to cue only the input channels to be used in the 5.1 channel mix. Outputs,
PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued.
117
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
Talkback and Oscillator
Using Talkback
The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of the selected INPUT jack to the desired bus. This
is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers
and staff.
QL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the
desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical
response of the room or hall.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2. Press the TALKBACK display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3. Connect a mic to the INPUT jack on the rear panel.
4. Press a button in the ASSIGN field in the TALKBACK window to specify the bus(es)
to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
5. To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.
6. Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK button to select an input. Use the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob to adjust the volume.
MATRIX
MIX
1 2 ... 1516
M
O (USE 7-8
N
O AS CUE B) CUE(A)
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 L R
ST
CASCADE IN
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
DANTE IN 1-64{32}
CASCADE
IN
SELECT
INPUT 1-32{16}
TALKBACK
DANTE IN 1-64{32}
INPUT 1-32{16}
DANTE
IN
METER
DANTE
INPUT
[DANTE]
64{32}
ON
+48V ACTIVE
+48V
[INPUT]
[1-32{16}]
INPUT
ON
1
2
3
INPUT
SELECT
+48V
+
-
PRE GC
HA
METER
METER
AD
GAIN/TRIM
Compensation
Gain
OSCILLATOR
LEVEL
Sine Wave
Sine Wave 2CH
32{16}
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
HPF LPF
OSC
METER
ON
To CH 1-64{32},ST IN 1L-8R
MONITOR screen
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference
between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case,
you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only
while you continue holding down the key) (page 221).
• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the
talkback signal (page 106).
118
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
MONITOR screen
TALKBACK window
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback
settings, and turn talkback on or off.
Press the TALKBACK popup display button or the ASSIGN field to open the TALKBACK
popup window. In this popup window you can make detailed settings for talkback.
1
2
3
1 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
1
2
3
This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback
input.
4
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a
desired input port to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button.
1 TALKBACK display buttons
When you press this button, the TALKBACK screen will appear, in which you can make
detailed talkback settings.
• +48V button
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input
port.
2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
........................ Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in
which you can patch a desired input port to talkback.
The selected port name will appear on the button.
• INPUT GAIN knob................. Sets the input gain of the selected port.
• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain.
• ANALOG GAIN knob
Adjusts the analog gain setting for the selected input port. If you press this knob, you
can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain.
• HA meter
Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.
• GC ON button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will
appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.
3 TALKBACK ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback
signal.
• Gain Compensation meter
Indicates the level after Gain Compensation. It will appear if the input jack of an I/O
device is patched.
4 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
NOTE
These parameters and meters will not appear if no input port is selected.
119
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
2 TALKBACK ON button
MONITOR screen
Switches talkback on or off.
In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings,
and turn the oscillator on or off.
3 ASSIGN field
• Channel select buttons
Enable you to select a channel (bus) on which the talkback signal is sent.
• CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Using the Oscillator function
You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2. Press the OSCILLATOR display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3. Press a button in the OSCILLATOR MODE field in the OSCILLATOR window to select
the type of signal you want to output.
4. Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters.
5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which
the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
6. Press the OUTPUT button to enable the oscillator.
1
2
3
4
5
1 OSCILLATOR display button
When you press this button, the OSCILLATOR screen will appear, in which you can make
detailed oscillator settings.
2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field
This adjusts the level of the oscillator. A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the
output level of the oscillator. If OSCILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE, the frequency
of the oscillator is shown. If you press the LEVEL knob, you can use the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob to adjust the oscillator level.
3 OSCILLATOR MODE field
MONITOR screen
Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly
will switch modes.
4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input
channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
120
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
• FREQ knob ...........Indicates the frequency of the sine wave. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
Turns the oscillator output on or off.
Mode = SINE WAVE 2CH
OSCILLATOR window
You can make detailed settings for the oscillator. This window appears when you press the
OSCILLATOR display button in the MONITOR screen.
1
2
• LEVEL knob (ODD/L) ...... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the ODD/L
side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
• FREQ knob (ODD/L)........ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the ODD/L
side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
• LEVEL knob (EVEN/R) .... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the EVEN/ R
side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
• FREQ knob (EVEN/R)...... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the EVEN/R
side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
By default, ODD(L) is set to 1kHz and EVEN(R) is set to 400Hz. At this time, there are
two meters (L and R).
5
4
3
Mode = PINK NOISE
1 OSCILLATOR MODE buttons
Select one of the following four operating modes when the oscillator is turned on:
SINE WAVE
A sine wave will be output continuously.
SINE WAVE 2CH
Two sine waves of different frequencies will be output separately.
PINK NOISE
Pink noise will be output continuously.
BURST NOISE
Pink noise will be output intermittently.
• LEVEL knob..........Indicates the output level of the pink noise. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
• HPF knob ..............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink
noise. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
value. Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.
• LPF knob...............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink
noise. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
value. Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.
2 Parameter field
Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this
field vary depending on the selected mode.
Mode = SINE WAVE
• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the sine wave. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
121
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
Mode = BURST NOISE
• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob
....................Same as in PINK NOISE mode.
• WIDTH ...................Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. You can
use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
• INTERVAL..............Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. You can use
the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
Level
INTERVAL
Pink noise output
WIDTH
Turn BURST NOISE button on.
Time
3 ASSIGN section
Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of
the three tabs below to select the type of channels displayed, and then press the
button(s) for the desired channel(s) (multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED”
indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection.
If the mode is set to SINE WAVE 2CH, the signal is output to either odd (ODD(L) side)
or even (EVEN(R) side) of the selected channel. For example, the signal set to ODD(L) is
output in MIX1, and the signal set to EVEN(R) is output in MIX2.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4 Meter section
Indicates the oscillator output level.
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off. If you turn this button on, the oscillator signal will
be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in the ASSIGN section. When you press
the button again, the oscillator will turn off.
122
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
Meters
INPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels.
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all
channels.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on
the screen, and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which
the level is detected). To access the METER screen, press the METER field of the Function
Access Area.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
INPUT/OUTPUT/RTA tab
OUTPUT METER screen
Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen, OUTPUT METER screen, and
RTA screen.
This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels.
123
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
Fader level and meter display
METERING POINT field
This area displays the meter and fader for each channel.
Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected. The
metering point for the level meter can be specified independently for input channels and
output channels.
1
2
3
4
 For INPUT METER
5
• PRE GC .................Immediately before GAIN
COMPENSATION
• PRE D. GAIN .........Immediately before DIGITAL GAIN
• POST D. GAIN .......Immediately after DIGITAL GAIN
• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader (immediately before INPUT DELAY)
• POST ON...............immediately after the [ON] key
When the [ON] key for channel 7 is ON, and the [ON] key for
channel 8 is OFF
 For OUTPUT METER
• PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader
• POST ON...............immediately after the [ON] key
1 Channel number
Indicates the channel number.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
PEAK HOLD button
3 OVER indicator
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this
button to clear the peak hold indication. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations
will affect both input channels and output channels. When you turn this button
off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared.
Lights if the signal is clipping at the input section or output section of the channel.
4 Meter
Indicates the input or output level of the channel.
NOTE
5 Fader
You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key (page 221).
The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that
appears immediately below the fader. If the channel’s [ON] key is OFF, the fader turns
gray.
NOTE
Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Channel Strip
section.
124
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
SHOW SEND LEVEL button
RTA METER screen
If you switch to SENDS ON FADER mode when this button is on, the color and
position of the faders in the INPUT METER screen show the type of send
destination bus, the send level to that bus, and ON/OFF status.
This is the real time analyzer screen. The results of a frequency analysis for the selected
source are shown in the 1/6 octave band (61 band).
3
4
8
 For INPUT METER
5
1
Fader color
The channel color is the same as the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus (SEND MAIN).
The position of the fader is the level of the signal sent to the bus.
The fader turns gray if you switch the SEND button to OFF or switch the channel OFF.
6
2
 For OUTPUT METER
Only the fader for the signal sent from the MIX bus to the MATRIX bus changes color.
9
7
1 Frequency Response graph
A graph of a frequency analysis is shown in the 1/6 octave band.
2 Source selection buttons
Use these buttons to specify the output channel whose frequency response you want to
see.
3 OVER display
Data that exceeds 0dB is shown the same as the OVER indicator.
4 Cross-hair cursor display
The frequency and level at the point you touch on the graph are displayed.
125
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
5 CUE OVERRIDE button
8 OFFSET gain knob
If this button is switched on, the cue signal set in the CUE screen is sent to the real time
analyzer, and an analysis is displayed.
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can
adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
• If CUE MODE is set to MIX CUE, the frequency analysis is performed on a signal that is
a mix of all channels selected in the CUE screen.
NOTE
The value for this parameter is applied identically to the RTA METER window, HPF/EQ window,
GEQ window, and PEQ window.
• If CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, the signal is treated as LAST CUE. In other words, the
frequency analysis is performed on the POST ON signal of the input channel.
9 PEAK HOLD button
• If CUE is set to 2 channels, buttons will be as shown below.
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on graphs of frequency analysis.
Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication.
NOTE
The settings for the PEAK HOLD button, RTA button, and OFFSET gain knob are stored even
when the console is turned off.
6 BALLISTICS field
• BALLISTICS button
Setting this switch to ON allows you to add rate of decay to the graph.
• FAST/SLOW switch button
Use this button to set the rate of decay (FAST/SLOW).
7 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays frequency response.
RTA
GEQ RACK 1-8 OUT
EFFECT RACK 1-8 OUT
CH 1-64{32} POST EQ
16
16
64{32}
ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ
16
MIX1-16 POST EQ
16
STEREO L,R,MONO(C) POST EQ
3
MATRIX 1-6,7-8 (CUE B L ,R) POST EQ
8
MIX OUT 1-16
16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)
3
MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8 (CUE B L ,R)
8
CUE (A) OUT L,R
2
RTA
126
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
METER screen (Surround mode)
METER screen (when using 2-channel CUE)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen appears as shown
below.
1
1
2
1 CUE
1 MONITOR
Meters for CUE A and CUE B.
Meters for MIX1-6. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the
SURROUND SETUP screen.
2 SURROUND METER select button
Selects the meters displayed in the Function Access Area.
• MIX1-6
Source for MIX1-6.
• MONITOR
Source selected in SURROUND MONITOR. For 2CH MONITOR, the layout remains 5.1,
but with meters only for L and R.
127
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
Function Access Area screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen in the Function Access
Area appears as shown below.
The display specifications are as follows.
• The meter for the SURROUND signal is shown on the left side, and the meter for the
STEREO signal is shown on the right side. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the
same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
When cue is operating
• EFFECT CUE is shown on the right side, as usual.
• The 5.1 SOLO CUE display is updated on the left side. However, if CUE MODE is set to
5.1 SOLO, no cue other than 5.1 SOLO CUE is possible.
Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.
• Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.
128
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and
Premium Rack
GEQ RACK1(GEQ1)
GEQ
RACK IN
PATCH
METER RACK IN
METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
INSERT 1,2 OUT
[CH 1-64{32},
MIX 1-16,
STEREO
L,R,MONO(C),
MATRIX 1-6,7-8
(CUE B L,R)
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack.
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
GEQ1 IN
A/B
GEQ2-8 IN
A/B
About the virtual rack
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
8BandPEQ
GEQ RACK2-8(GEQ2-8) (same as GEQ RACK1)
Automixer 8ch RACK1-4 (GEQ1-4)
QL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as
“GEQ” ), parametric EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “PEQ” ), and effects/processors to
modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely
adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any
fifteen of thirty-one bands. The 8Band PEQ allows you to freely adjust 8 bands (frequency
regions), and also features an HPF, an LPF, and 3 notch filters. You can also use 54 different
effect types. The QL series consoles feature Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology.
This technology models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce amazing
analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers nine types of processors.
In order to use a GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, PEQ, effect,
or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the
desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal
processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can
mount a GEQ, PEQ instance in each of the eight racks 1-8, an effect rack instance in each of
the eight racks 1-8 and EFFECT, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8.
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the
“31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)
The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
INSERT 1,2 IN
PATCH
METER
METER
GEQ1-4 IN
A/B
Automixer8ch
8
8
INPUT
1-32{16}
Automixer 16ch RACK1-8 (GEQ1-8)
GEQ1-8 IN
A/B
OUT
EFFECT
RACK IN
PATCH
[MIX 1-16,
STEREO
L,R,MONO(C),
MATRIX 1-6,7-8
(CUE B L,R)
16
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
METER
METER
Automixer16ch
DANTE IN
1-64{32}
16
EFFECT RACK1(FX1)
METER RACK IN
METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
To RTA
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
EFFECT
GEQ1-8
OUT
A/B
FX1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
CH INSERT 1,2 IN 1-64{32}
64{32}
16
3
MIX INSERT 1,2 IN 1-16
STEREO INSERT 1,2 IN L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX INSERT 1,2 IN 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)
To CH INSERT 1,2 IN
To MIX INSERT 1,2 IN
To STEREO INSERT 1,2 IN
To MATRIX INSERT 1,2 IN
8
PR1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
EFFECT CUE
FX1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
FX2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PREMIUM
RACK IN
PATCH
PR1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PR2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
8BandPEQ
EFFECT RACK2-8(FX2-8) (same as EFFECT RACK1)
PREMIUM RACK1(PR1)
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
PROCESSOR
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT CUE
PREMIUM RACK2-8 (same as PREMIUM RACK1)
NOTE
The QL console provides a rack for mounting an I/O rack (such as an R series), external head
amps (Yamaha AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.) as well as the virtual rack for GEQ, PEQ, effects and
Premium Rack. For details, refer to “I/O devices and external head amps” on page 163.
129
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Virtual rack operations
VIRTUAL RACK window
1
This section explains how to mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the
input and output of the rack as an example.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ or EFFECT tab.
3. To mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that
rack.
4. Use the buttons in the MODULE SELECT field in the RACK MOUNTER window to
select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button.
5. Press the INPUT PATCH button.
6. In the CH SELECT window, select the input source and then press the OK button.
7. Press the OUTPUT PATCH button.
8. In the CH SELECT window, select the output destination and then press the OK
button.
23 4
6
1
5
23 4
6
5
1 Rack tabs
Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ (GEQ rack),
EFFECT (effect rack), and PREMIUM (Premium Rack).
2 Rack mount button
Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the type
of the rack you want to mount.
Function
Access Area
VIRTUAL RACK window
3 SAFE button
Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. If this button is turned on for a rack, the
contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more
information on Recall Safe, refer to “Using the Recall Safe function” on page 72.
The Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that
rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or
output-destination channel.
NOTE
• In steps 6 and 8, you can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear
(page 220).
• The type of GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack mounted in each rack, its parameter settings,
and the input-source and output-destination patch settings are saved as part of the scene.
130
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
4 INPUT PATCH button
5 OUTPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or 8Band
PEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of
the signal patched to the rack input.
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or 8Band
PEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of
the signal patched to the rack output.
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• MIX/MATRIX ...................................MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8*1
• ST/MONO .......................................STEREO L/R, MONO*1
• INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 .......................CH1-32
• INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 .....................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX..........MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO..............STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 .......................CH1-32
• INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 .....................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX..........MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO..............STEREO L/R, MONO
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• CH1-32 ............................................CH1-32*1, *2
• CH33-64..........................................CH33-64*1, *2 (QL5 only)
• ST IN ...............................................ST IN 1L–8R*1, *2
• INSERT 1 IN 1-32 ...........................CH1-32
• INSERT 1 IN 33-64 .........................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 1 IN MIX/MATRIX .............MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 1 IN ST/MONO..................STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 IN 1-32 ...........................CH1-32
• INSERT 2 IN 33-64 .........................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 2 IN MIX/MATRIX .............MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 2 IN ST/MONO..................STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–8 RACK.
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–8 RACK.
*2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• In the case of the GEQ or PEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically
assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched
on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ or PEQ, the other patch point
will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
• In the case of the EFFECT, the operation is the same as that of the GEQ, if you select
DYNAMICS & EQ as the EFFECT TYPE.
• In the case of the PREMIUM RACK, the operation is the same as that of the GEQ.
• For more information on insert-in/out, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” on
page 20.
NOTE
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• If you use QL5 settings data on the QL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned
to a channel that does not exist on that model.
131
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
6 Rack container
• If 16ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-8):
Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you
selected in the RACK MOUNTER window.
• If nothing is mounted:
Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the GEQ
or effect that will be mounted in the rack.
• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level.
Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ
settings.
• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and
output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in
which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.
• If 8ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-4):
• If 8BandPEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the EQ frequency response, the PEQ on/off status, and the input and
output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the PEQ EDIT window, in
which you can modify the PEQ settings for A and B.
• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):
Press this area to open the AUTOMIXER EDIT window, in which you can modify the
automixer settings.
This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status,
and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT window, in which
you can modify the effect settings.
132
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
5 OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
7
NOTE
Be aware that if you remove a GEQ, PEQ, or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the
RACK MOUNTER window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ, PEQ, or effect will be
discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by
mounting the same GEQ, PEQ, or effect once again.
7 Link indicator
Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, A
and B of the Flex15GEQ, or A and B of the 8BandPEQ are linked to each other.
RACK MOUNTER window
Graphic EQ operations
Mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack. This window will appear if you press the rack mount
button in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
The QL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1–8 and patch it to the
insert-out/in of an input channel, a MIX/MATRIX channel, or STEREO/MONO channel. You
can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1–8 (FX 1–8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input
channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be
adjusted using the faders and [ON] keys in the Channel Strip section.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
1
2
1
2
 31BandGEQ
3 4
5
3 4
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3
octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and
the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted.
If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of
input and output can be used for that rack.
5
1 Rack number
Indicates the number for the selected rack.
INPUT
OUTPUT
Rack
31BandGEQ
 Flex15GEQ
2 Virtual rack
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3
OUTPUT
INPUT
Rack
octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB.
Flex15GEQ (A)
The Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for
any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands
Flex15GEQ (B)
of the 31bandGEQ. (Once you have used up fifteen
bands of adjustment, you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a
previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and
“B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output.
This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.
3 MODULE SELECT field
Select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following
function.
• BLANK button....................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the
rack; the rack will be empty.
• 31BandGEQ button .............. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button ................ Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
• 8BandPEQ button................. Mounts an 8BandPEQ in the rack.
• EFFECT button (EFFECT rack only) .............Mounts an effect in the rack.
• 16ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)....Mounts a 16ch Automixer in the rack.
• 8ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)......Mounts an 8ch Automixer in the rack.
NOTE
• Input/output patching will be defeated if you change the item mounted in a rack.
• The 16ch Automixer is mounted in racks 1–8. The 8ch Automixer is mounted in racks 1–4.
4 CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
133
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
1 Rack select tabs
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
Switch among GEQ 1–8, or among EFFECT 1–8. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is
mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
2 INPUT button
STEP
1. Refer to steps 1–8 in “Virtual rack operations” on page 130 to mount a GEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2. In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you
mounted the GEQ.
3. If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two GEQ
units.
4. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input
source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output
destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button
in the GEQ field.
4 RACK LINK button
NOTE
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent GEQ
units.
In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ (A) and GEQ (B) within the
same rack will be linked.
• If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units
in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later
step.
• You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.
• For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “Using the 31BandGEQ” or “Using
the Flex15GEQ” on page 136.
GEQ EDIT window
NOTE
• The windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the
Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
• Pressing a top panel [SEL] key while operating the GEQ will switch to the popup window of GEQ,
effect, or premium rack that is inserted in that channel.
7 8 2
3
4 5 6
• GEQ x➞y button (“x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y➞x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
9
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link
GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked
status.
1
134
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
5 FLAT button
Using the 31BandGEQ
Returns all bands of the currently-selected GEQ to 0 dB.
You will use the Channel Strip section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.
6 GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off.
STEP
1. In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you
mounted the 31BandGEQ.
2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.
3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you
will control.
4. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section to adjust the selected band.
5. When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
7 RTA button
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
8 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
9 OFFSET gain knob
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can
adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
NOTE
NOTE
• When a fader in the Channel Strip section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding
[ON] key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified.
If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this
band has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band
will immediately return to the flat state.
If you press the [ON] key once again, the value that was modified is shown. However, please note
that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different
frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ±0dB.
• If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Channel Strip
section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of
bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
• When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
The value for this parameter is applied identically to the RTA METER window, HPF/EQ window,
GEQ window, and PEQ window.
135
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
4 Tool buttons
GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ)
Copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or
initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool
buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
4
NOTE
• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
• GEQ settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.
1
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Channel Strip section’s faders and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B)
in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
2
3
NOTE
If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.
However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
1 EQ graph
Indicates the approximate response of the current 31BandGEQ.
2 Faders
STEP
1. Press the rack container in which you mounted Flex15GEQ.
2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.
3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you
will control.
4. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section to adjust the selected band.
5. When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual
values are shown in the numerical boxes below.
The area of a fader you touched will turn pink as shown below.
NOTE
• When a fader in the Channel Strip section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding
[ON] key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified.
If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this
band has been modified.
If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to
the flat state. If you press the [ON] key once again, the value that was modified is shown.
However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the
fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to
±0dB.
• If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Channel Strip section
will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands
you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
• When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
3 FADER ASSIGN field
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section to select the group of bands that will be
controlled. The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups
of bands (QL1 only).
20-630
16 bands 20 Hz–630 Hz
125-4k
16 bands 125 Hz–4 kHz
630-20k
16 bands 630 Hz–20 kHz
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn
white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Channel Strip section will be
displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Channel Strip section to control the band.
136
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
 Inserting a PEQ in a channel
GEQ EDIT window (Flex 15GEQ)
This section explains how to insert a PEQ into the selected channel for use.
STEP
1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 130) to mount a PEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2. In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you
mounted the PEQ.
3. If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two PEQ units.
4. Press the PEQ ON/OFF button to turn the PEQ on.
NOTE
• You can view the input and output levels of the PEQ in the rack in the GEQ or EFFECT field.
• For details on PEQ operations, refer section “PEQ EDIT window” (page 137).
PEQ EDIT window
D E
This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS
parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that
can be controlled in the current GEQ.
For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and
xB (x is the rack number).
In addition to the standard 4-band EQ, QL series consoles also feature an 8-band parametric
EQ (PEQ) that can be rack mounted. You can mount this PEQ in GEQ racks 1-8 and patch it
to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a
STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it
to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel.
The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys.
The following type of PEQ is provided.
4 35
6
7
8
F
9
0
A
1
B
G
Parametric EQ operations
2
 8BandPEQ
This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. There are also an independent HPF, LPF, and 3 notch filters.
Two 8BandPEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) can be mounted in a rack, and
therefore you can use two channels of input and output for each rack.
C
137
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
1 PEQ graph
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
Displays the parameter values for the PEQ and filter.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
2 INPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input
source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
GEQ field.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link RACK units, a symbol
will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
3 OUTPUT button
0 PEQ ON/OFF button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output
destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button
in the GEQ field.
Switches the currently selected PEQ on/off.
A PEQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB.
All ON buttons for HPF, LPF, and notch filters are turned off.
All other parameter values are maintained and are not reset.
4 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the PEQ Library window.
5 DEFAULT button
B PEQ IN/OUT level meters
Press this button to restore the default parameter setting.
Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the PEQ.
6 COPY button
C Rack select tabs
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
Switch among GEQ 1-8 or EFFECT 1-8. For a rack in which an 8BandPEQ is mounted,
the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
7 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current EQ. If
no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use the buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
8 COMPARE button
D RTA button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer
memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
E HOLD button
9 RACK LINK button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent PEQ
units.
In the case of an 8BandPEQ, PEQ (A) and PEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked.
F EQ type select button
Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.
The following EQ types can be selected.
• GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
138
PRECISE
This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to
precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music
production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that
allow knee adjustments.
AGGRESSIVE
This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to create
an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic expression.
SMOOTH
This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create
natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the
original sound.
LEGACY
This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as
the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch
between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and
TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
G OFFSET gain knob
3 EQ parameter setting knobs
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can
adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the BAND1 - BAND8 bands. You
can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
PEQ EDIT window (HPF/LPF NOTCH)
NOTE
The value for this parameter is applied identically to the RTA METER window, HPF/EQ window,
GEQ window, and PEQ window.
PEQ EDIT window (8PEQ)
3
4
3
4
1
1
1
2
5
2
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
1 Attenuation select button
3
1
There are four types of HPF and LPF. This button switches the attenuation per octave
between -24 dB/oct, -18dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, and -6dB/oct.
3
2 8PEQ button
1 BYPASS button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating the 8-band PEQ.
You can bypass each band.
When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn
gray.
3 HPF/LPF frequency knob
This knob is used to adjust the HPF/LPF frequency.
2 HPF/LPF NOTCH button
4 ON button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating HPF/LPF/notch filters.
There is an ON button for the HPF, LPF, and each of the three notch filters.
139
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
5 Notch Filter Q knob
About AUTOMIXER
Adjusts the Q of the notch filter.
Automixer is included as a standard feature on the QL series. Automixer searches for enabled
mics and automatically optimizes gain distribution, for uses such as speeches without scripts.
This allows uniform system gain to be maintained among multiple mics, freeing the engineer
from making constant fader adjustments.
6 Notch Filter frequency knob
Adjusts the frequency of the notch filter.
Automixer operating principle
With the Dugan speech system used in Automixer, you can automatically adjust the gain for
multiple mics used for speeches.
When 1 person speaks on multiple mics
When 2 people speak on multiple mics
Mic input
audio (dB)
Mic input
audio (dB)
Gain (dB) in
Automix
Gain (dB) in
Automix
When 1 person is speaking, the gain on the mic
being used is immediately increased and the gain
on all other mics is reduced. The same operation
occurs even if another person is speaking.
If 2 people are speaking at the same time, gain is
automatically distributed so that the total gain is
consistent across both mics, and the gain on the
remaining mic is reduced.
The Dugan speech system functions differently from a limiter or auto level controller. When
multiple people are speaking, the engineer can adjust each level using the faders as normal.
Even if nobody is speaking, the system searches for mic audio and automatically distributes
gain. Therefore, faders can leave in their raised positions.
140
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Inserting Automixer in channels post-fader
 Channel control field
This section explains how to mount Automixer in a virtual rack, and insert Automixer input and
output into channels (excluding ST IN channels) post-fader (POST ON). For details on
Automixer operations, refer to the following section “Using Automixer.”
Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode. The indicator for the enabled channel
mode will light. To select a mode, either press the button for that mode or press the PRESET
button in the master field.
1
STEP
1. Refer to steps 1–8 in “Virtual rack operations” on page 130 to mount Automixer in
rack 1 and set its input source and output destination.
2. Refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” on page 20 to insert
Automixer in post-fader (POST ON field).
Using Automixer
2
3
4
5
6
8
Master field
7
Channel control field
1 Level indicator
Lights green when the audio is at an optimum level for Automix.
NOTE
• If the level indicator flashes, increase the input gain.
• If the level indicator lights up red, reduce the input gain.
2 Meter indicator
There are three display modes. Pressing the meters button in the master field will switch
modes.
Channel display
The auto mix gain meter for each channel and man (yellow), auto (green), and mute (red)
settings are shown for channels 1–8 and channels 9–16.
If you select the channel 1–8 or 9–16 region, the display channel for the channel control field
will switch to 1–8 or 9–16.
(For 8ch Automixer, only channels 1–8 are shown.)
gain
Displays the gain for Automixer.
Green
input
Displays the input level.
Yellow
output
Displays the output level.
Blue
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
3 weight
Adjusts the correlative sensitivity between input channels. When there is no input, adjust
the weight setting so that all auto mix gain meters are at about the same level.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to change the channel weight settings by adjusting
the weight slider.
Automixer calculates the ratio of input level for specific channels for all input mixes in
the group. The following example explains the weight control mechanism.
141
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 man/auto/mute
When increasing the weight setting in one channel
• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel increases, while the
values for other channels are reduced.
• Channels with high weight setting values receive a higher system gain than other
channels.
Toggles between man/auto/mute.
man: Passes the audio through without changing the gain. This mode is used for singing
with a mic.
auto: Turns on Automixer. This mode is used for conversations.
mute: Mutes channels.
When reducing the weight setting in one channel
• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel reduces, while the
values for other channels are increased.
• When speaking into multiple mics at the same time, it is difficult to distinguish between
different mics.
If you can hear noise near one mic (example: noise from a computer ventilation fan or
an air conditioner), you can suppress the noise by reducing the weight setting for that
channel.
8 preset
Selects the channel mode (man/auto/mute) when the PRESET button in the master field
is pressed. The preset button lights when a preset is programmed for a channel.
 Master field
4 group
1
Each channel can be assigned to three groups (a/b/c).
This group function is convenient for the following uses.
• Using multiple rooms: Assign the mics in each room to their own groups, and use a
different Automixer for each.
• Stereo pan: Assign mics panned to left, right and center to groups a, b, and c, to
maintain a stable stereo field.
2
3
1 OVERRIDE/PRESET/MUTE
Makes settings for each group (a/b/c) selected in the channel control field. Shows only
the selected group.
• OVERRIDE
When you press this button, channels where the channel override button is on will
fade in to 0 dB (unity gain). All channels with the override button turned off will be
muted.
• PRESET
When you press this button, each channel will switch to the mode indicated by the
mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
• MUTE
When you press this button, all channels will fade out immediately (0.5 seconds).
5 override
If you turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field, the channel will switch to man
mode or mute mode according to the settings for that channel’s override button.
• When the channel’s override button is on, the mode for that channel will switch to man
when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.
• When the channel’s override is off, the mode for that channel will switch to mute when
the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.
• When the master OVERRIDE button is turned off, the channel will return to its previous
mode.
The override function is convenient when the moderator of a panel discussion wants to
control the system.
Follow the instructions below to change the settings.
1. Turn on the override button on the moderator’s channel.
2. Turn off the override button on all other channels.
3. Turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field as needed.
2 meters
Switches the meter indicator in the channel control field. Toggles between gain, input,
and output each time you press the button.
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
6 Channel number
3 reset
Displays the channel number and channel name of the channel to be inserted.
Initializes the Automixer settings.
142
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Editing the internal effects
 STEREO type effects
The internal effects of the QL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1–8, and
patched to an output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For
each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect.
With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 13–16 are input to racks 5–8, and
from the racks are then output to ST IN 1–4 (L/R). There are no assignments to racks 1–4.
INPUT L
EFFECT L
L RETURN
INPUT R
EFFECT R
R RETURN
 MIX type effects
INPUT L
NOTE
L RETURN
EFFECT
INPUT R
Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.
R RETURN
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/
stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However,
please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.
To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input
of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the
corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input
channel is used as an effect return channel.
INPUT L
or R
Rack 1
L RETURN
EFFECT
R RETURN
EFFECT
Using an internal effect via send and return
Rack 7
INPUT PATCH
Output of the
output channel
OUTPUT PATCH
Rack 2
EFFECT
This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an
effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.
Input of the input
channel
NOTE
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow
you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it is convenient to assign the send-destination
MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, refer to “Basic settings for MIX buses and
MATRIX buses” on page 245.)
EFFECT
Rack 8
EFFECT
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a
desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.
Insert-out of a
desired channel*
EFFECT
STEP
1. Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 130, to mount an
effect in a rack.
2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select a MIX
channel as the input source for the rack (page 130).
3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the L
input of a ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack (page 130).
4. Adjust the send level from each channel in the SEND field in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5. Adjust the master level of the effect send of the MIX channel you selected as the
input source for the rack.
6. Adjust the effect return level of the ST IN channel you selected as the output
destination for the rack.
Insert-in of a
desired channel*
* Excluding a ST IN channel
The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process
the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the
two channels before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R
channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is
selected, as follows.
143
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Inserting an internal effect into a channel
NOTE
• If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs
of the rack.
• If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the ST IN channel selected
in step 3 to the R output of the rack.
• You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
• For more information on setting the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect
parameters” on page 145.
This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of
the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). For
details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters” on
page 145.
STEP
1. Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 130, to mount an
effect in a rack.
2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insertout for one of the channels as the input source for the rack (page 130).
3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the
insert-1in or insert-2in of the same channel as the output destination for the rack
(page 130).
4. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] key to select the channel into which you
inserted the effect.
5. Press the popup button in the INSERT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
6. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for
the channel into which you inserted the effect.
7. Display the EFFECT EDIT window again, and select the effect type and edit the effect
parameters.
8. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step
3, adjust the level as appropriate.
 Adjusting the effect send level of a input channel
In the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, press and select the TO MIX
SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX bus set as the input source for the rack, and use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to that MIX
bus.
NOTE
• When adjusting the effect send level, make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you
selected as the output destination for the rack to the corresponding MIX bus is set to –∞ dB. If
you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect,
possibly causing oscillation.
• If you press the knob once again, the MIX SEND window (8ch) for the send-destination MIX bus
will appear. This window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the
corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST) (page 39).
 Adjusting the master level of the effect send
Operate the fader for the MIX channel you specified as the input source for the rack.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload
point.
NOTE
NOTE
• If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel
insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output of the effect in the same way as step 3.
• For more information about how to operate the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window, refer to “Inserting
an external device into a channel” on page 20.
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right
of the EFFECT EDIT window.
• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach
the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect.
The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right
of the EFFECT EDIT window.
 Adjusting the effect return level
To adjust the effect return level, operate the fader for the ST IN channel you specified as the
output destination for the rack.
144
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Editing the internal effect parameters
EFFECT EDIT window
This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. For a rack in
which an effect is mounted, the following information is shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
Allows you to adjust the effect parameters.
1
NOTE
2
• For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
• Pressing a top panel [SEL] key while operating the effect parameter will switch to the popup
window of GEQ, effect, or premium rack that is inserted in that channel.
3
42
5
0
1 Effect title/type
6
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number
of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
7
2 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
1
STEP
1. Press the rack container in which the effect you want to edit is mounted.
2. To change the effect type, press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window, and
select the effect type in the EFFECT TYPE window.
3. Press a knob in the effect parameter field in the EFFECT EDIT window to select it,
and turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to edit the effect parameters.
4. Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary.
8
9
A
1 INPUT L/R buttons
2 OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.
3 Effect type field
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number
of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE window, in which you can select the effect type.
145
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
 PLAY/REC
This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
• PLAY button/REC button
Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using the
freeze effect. For detailed operations, refer to “Using the
Freeze effect” on page 150.
 SOLO
This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is
selected as the effect type.
• HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple
selections are allowed).
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.
NOTE
• You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting.
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you
copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.
 Gain reduction meter
This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected
as the effect type.
4 EFFECT CUE button
Cue-monitors the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only
while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch
to a different screen.
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the
compressor.
NOTE
If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be
monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the
EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily
defeated.)
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
 Type
This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect
type.
• DRIVE button/CLEAN button
Select one of two equalizer types that feature different
effects.
DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog
circuits, creating a driven sound that enhances analog
characteristics by adding some distortion.
CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits,
creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.
5 Special parameter field
Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types.
 TEMPO
This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected.
• MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect
will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock
being input from the MIDI port.
• FLAT button
This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.
6 BYPASS button
Temporarily bypasses the effect.
7 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
146
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
8 Effect parameter field
Using the Tap Tempo function
This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a
knob in this field, you will be able to use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the
corresponding horizontal row of knobs.
You can also make fine adjustments by rotating the knob while pressing and holding it
down.
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation
speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. The Tap Tempo function
can be used for delay-type and modulation-type effects in which the BPM parameter is
included, and specify the delay time or modulation speed. To use the Tap function, you must
assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key.
9 MIX BAL. knob
NOTE
Adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output
signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using
the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If you are using the effect via send and return, set this
to 100% (effect sound only).
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
 Assigning the Tap Tempo function to a USER DEFINED key
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4. On the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button for the USER DEFINED key to
which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function.
5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, and press the OK
button.
0 Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or initialize the
settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in
the separate Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library.
A Rack select tabs
Enable you to switch between EFFECT 1–8.
147
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
 Using the Tap Tempo function
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the USER DEFINED key will be calculated,
and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter.
The average interval will be input to the parameter.
(the average of a, b, and c)
a
SETUP screen
b
c
USER SETUP window
First tap
Second tap
Third tap
Fourth tap
NOTE
• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will
change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
USER DEFINED KEYS page
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3. Press the rack container in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window.
5. In the EFFECT TYPE window, select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter.
6. Set the SYNC parameter ON in the effect parameter field.
7. At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you
assigned the Tap Tempo function, to set the BPM parameter.
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
NOTE
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, you can use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).
• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, refer to “USER DEFINED keys” on page 221.
148
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some effects of the QL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types
of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time
will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the
modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ......................... This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .... These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ..... DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the
modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the
effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type
effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
Tap Tempo window
NOTE
• If the EFFECT EDIT popup window used to set TAP TEMPO is open, this popup window is not
displayed.
• With QL V3.0 and later, the delay value (msec) is also shown in the popup window.
How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value*a from the TEMPO and
NOTE.
Turn SYNC ON
Change NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
Change TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec
FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz
Example 1:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to
quarter note
DELAY = new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
149
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Freeze effect
Example 2:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to
121
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/new TEMPO)
= (1/8) x 4 x (60/121)
= 0.2479 (sec)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality
of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen
to record (sample) and play back a sound.
NOTE
Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3. Press the effect container in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window to open the EFFECT TYPE
window, and select “FREEZE.”
5. To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY
button.
6. To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.
Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects. (However, this is relevant only if you turn the MIDI
button and the SYNC parameter on, while a MIDI CLOCK is being input to the MIDI IN
connector.)
• You cannot store it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from
a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled
as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60: TEMPO=60 → Recall the effect:
TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly.
However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when
recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between
store and recall, the QL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect
is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48
= 1/24
= 1/16
= 1/12
= 3/32
= 1/8
= 1/6
= 3/16
= 1/4
= 3/8
= 1/2
= 3/4
= 1/1
= 2/1
NOTE
• The bar in the EFFECT EDIT window reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time
has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
• You can adjust the parameters in the EFFECT EDIT window to make detailed settings for
recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play
back. For details on the parameters, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
• The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off
the power to the QL unit.
EFFECT EDIT window (when FREEZE is selected)
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will
appear in the special parameter field.
1
3
2
1 PLAY button
2 REC button
3 Progress bar
NOTE
As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall the “FREEZE” effect type from
the effect library.
150
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Premium Rack
Using the Premium Rack
The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack
(page 143).
For the premium rack, only racks 1–2 can be used via send/return. Racks 3–8 are only for
patching as inserts. (Refer to “Virtual rack operations” on page 130.)
The QL series console features processors that faithfully emulate meticulously-selected
vintage analog processors, and a newly-developed Premium Rack, as well as graphic EQs
and built-in effects. The Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog
circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds.
The Premium Rack offers eight types of processors.
Name
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. Press the PREMIUM tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack in
the PREMIUM RACK field.
4. Select the processor to mount and the mounting method in the MODULE SELECT
field in the PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window, and press the OK button.
5. Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the
input source.
6. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the
insert-in of the same channel as the output destination.
7. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] key to select the channel into which you
inserted the effect.
8. Press the popup button in the INSERT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
9. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for
the channel into which you inserted the processor.
10. Adjust the processor parameters.
11. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step
6, adjust the level as appropriate.
Outline
Portico 5033
Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ.
Portico 5043
Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter.
U76
Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter.
Opt–2A
Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.
EQ–1A
Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.
Dynamic EQ
Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to
control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level.
Buss Comp 369
Models a 1970s compressor/limiter with discrete circuitry.
MBC4
Four-band compressor with intuitive controls
VIRTUAL RACK window
(PREMIUM RACK field)
151
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
window
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Editing the Premium Rack parameters
NOTE
• If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel
insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor in the same way as steps 5 and
6.
• For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack
parameters.”
• Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the
overload point at the input or output stage of the processor.
Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:
1
2
3
 Mounting a processor
There are two ways to mount each processor:
• DUAL .....................The processor is used on two mono channels.
• STEREO ................The processor is used on one stereo channel.
The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by
the Premium Rack processor.
1 ASSIST button
Press this button to indicate the numbers that control each parameter.
The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a
two-space Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more
processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an
even-numbered rack.
2 LIBRARY button
Press this button to display the Library window for Premium Rack (for each module
type).
3 DEFAULT button
Restores the default parameter setting.
NOTE
• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently
available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.
• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a [TOUCH AND TURN] knob while
pressing and holding it down.
• Pressing a top panel [SEL] key while operating the premium rack parameter will switch to the
popup window of GEQ, effect, or premium rack that is inserted in that channel.
152
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 LF/HF IN button
 Portico 5033
Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.
Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve
Designs (RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of
the “1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve.
Yamaha’s VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output
transformer that was designed by Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model
produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique
effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting
is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears.
8 Graph
Indicates the graphical EQ response.
 Portico 5043
Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor. The
actual 5043 compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the
5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range
of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio
sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can
switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type
(which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-Back) circuit which was typically used in
vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as
appropriate for your applications.
8
1
2
3
4
5
3
1
2
7
4
6
1 ALL BYPASS button
Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even when EQ bypass is on, the signal will pass through
the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
5
6
7
8
9
1 IN button
2 TRIM knob
Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button
indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass
through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
Adjusts the input gain of the processor.
3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs
Adjust the frequency for each band.
2 INPUT meter
4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs
Indicates the input signal level.
One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.
Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band.
5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs
3 FB button
Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range
in which you can control the gain for the band.
Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (FeedBack) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.
The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you
want to apply consistent compression while maintaining a consistent tonal color.
6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button
Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.
153
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2 RMS/PEAK button
The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to
apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal character that is characteristic of such
devices.
Selects the operation mode for the level detector. You can select RMS mode or PEAK
mode.
4 GAIN REDUCTION meter
3 TIME CONSTANT knob
Indicates the amount of gain reduction.
Switches the attack and release time. The settings are as follows.
5 THRESHOLD knob
RMS Mode
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied.
A: 50 ms
B: 100 ms
C: 200 ms
D: 750 ms
E 1.5 s
F: 3 s
6 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to switch to the limiter.
7 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time.
8 RELEASE knob
4 THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time.
Adjusts the level at which enhancement begins. Signals below the THRESHOLD are
attenuated.
9 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain.
5 PROCESS ACTIVE indicator
This indicator is lit when the input signal exceeds the THRESHOLD. Adjust the
THRESHOLD so that this indicator is lit when the primary audio source is being input,
and unlit during periods of silence or between phrases.
 Portico 5045
This is a processor that accurately models the Portico 5045 Primary Source Enhancer made
by Rupert Neve Designs. Operation is extremely easy, allowing you to suppress background
noise that enters the mic while increasing clarity, enhancing the primary source and also
improving the feedback margin. It is suitable not only for a hand-held mic but also for a lavalier
mic or headset mic, and can be used in a variety of situations including event PA, concerts,
or broadcast. This processor is also equipped with the audio transformer and discrete amp
circuit that are the signature of the Portico series, so that simply passing the signal through it
will increase the luster and depth of the sound.
1
3
PEAK Mode
Attack: fixed at 20 ms
Release: A: 20 ms
B: 200 ms
C: 1 s
D: 2 s
E: 5 s
F: 30 s
2
4
6 DEPTH knob
Adjusts the amount of attenuation for signals below the THRESHOLD.
56
1 PROCESS ENGAGE button
Turns the enhancement circuit on/off.
154
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
 U76
• OFF...............Turns off the meter display.
U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of
situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on
conventional compressors. Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the
balance between the input gain and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO
parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It
produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones.
1
6 OUTPUT knob
Adjusts the output level.
If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT knob, the
level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust
the volume level.
2
 Opt-2A
Opt-2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube optical compressors. It
features smooth compression produced using optical components such as a CdS cell and an
EL panel to control the level. It also features beautiful high-range overtones created by the
warm distortion typical of tube circuits, resulting in elegant and sophisticated sounds.
3
4
5
6
1 INPUT knob
Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.
1
2 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest
attack time.
2
3
4
1 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output level.
3 RELEASE knob
2 PEAK REDUCTION knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest
release time.
Adjusts the compression amount of the signal.
3 RATIO knob
4 RATIO switch buttons
Adjusts the compression ratio.
Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.
A button with a higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL
button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression
with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive
sound.
4 METER SELECT knob
Switches the meter display.
GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
With –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT
+4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to
be shown as “0VU” on the meter.
5 METER switch buttons
Switch the meter display.
• GR.................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
• +4/+8 .............Each meter uses –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and
indicates “0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or
+8 dB.
155
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 (HIGH) BOOST knob
 EQ-1A
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH
FREQUENCY knob.
EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique
style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency
ranges (high and low). The frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, and
is a uniquely distinctive characteristic of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum
tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced.
3
4 5
7
8
8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN
SEL knob.
9
9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob
Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.
 Dynamic EQ
Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of
equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This
allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a
specific frequency region, causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific
frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use
this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only
when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a
natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs
are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources.
1
2
6
1 IN switch
Turns the processor on or off.
When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the
input/output transformer and amp circuits.
C
2 LOW FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the low range filter.
1
3
4
3 (LOW) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
6
4 (LOW) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
5
9
5 BAND WIDTH knob
Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.
As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the
peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.
0
28
6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob
A
7B
1 BAND ON/OFF button
Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.
Turns each band on or off.
156
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2 SIDECHAIN CUE button
B THRESHOLD meter
Turn this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time,
the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level.
C Graph area
3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button
Displays the equalizer response.
In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and
intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ
responses.
Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus
(such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent.
At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
4 FILTER TYPE buttons
Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and
sidechain filter will link as follows:
Dynamic EQ graph
FILTER TYPE
(Low Shelf)
Main EQ
Sidechain filter
(Bell)
(Hi Shelf)
Low Shelf
Bell
Hi Shelf
LPF
BPF
HPF
Reference EQ graph
If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter
response.
5 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
6 Q knob
Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.
As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or
sidechain filter is applied will become wider.
Sidechain filter graph
7 THRESHOLD knob
Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking effect.
8 RATIO knob
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut.
Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.
9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons
Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression
or boost.
Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and
slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending
on the frequency ranges.
0 MODE buttons
Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the
threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).
A EQ GAIN meter
Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.
157
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
1 INPUT ADJUST
 Buss Comp 369
Used to adjust the input gain. However, the output gain is linked to change in the
opposite direction, to prevent changes in pass-through volume (the volume when
COMP IN and LIMIT IN are off). For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain
is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB.
See below for more information about how to use INPUT ADJUST.
Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios
and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces a smooth and natural compression
that does not interfere with the expression in the source signal, in contrast with the aggressive
compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes both a compressor and a limiter. You can
use both functions individually or in combination, according to your needs. Further, the rich
overtones generated by the audio transformers on the input/output circuits and the discrete
Class A amplifier add depth and unity to the sound quality.
1
2
3
4
5
6
• If the level of the input signal sent to effects is too low to reach the threshold, increase
the input gain.
7
• Adjust the sound quality by changing the input level sent to the input circuitry (audio
transformer and Class A amplifier).
INPUT ADJUST structure
Buss Comp 369
Linked in reverse
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION
INPUT GAIN
IN
8
> A
B
C
5
6
7
OUTPUT GAIN
LIMITER
OUT
INPUT
CIRCUIT
OUT
COMPRESSOR
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
IN
STEREO mounting
1
3
4
INPUT ADJUST
COMP THRESHOLD LIMIT THRESHOLD
dBFS
dBFS
Since there are substantial changes in threshold, the changing display
values are linked. However, the internal conditions of the COMPRESSOR/
LIMITER SECTION do not actually change.
2 LINK (STEREO mounting)
Stereo link on/off
3 COMP IN
Compressor on/off
4 COMP THRESHOLD
Compressor threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
9
> A
B
C
5 COMP RECOVERY
Compressor release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change
automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes
automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
DUAL mounting
158
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
6 COMP GAIN
Compressor make-up gain. Applied before the limiter.
7 COMP RATIO
Compressor ratio
8 METER SELECT (STEREO mounting)
Selects the signal source for the meter. You can select from IN (input level), GR (gain
reduction), and OUT (output level). When the source is switched, the design of the
meter also switches as follows: VU/GR/VU.
8
When “METER” is OUT
9 VU SELECT (DUAL mounting)
Selects the signal source for the VU meter. You can select from input level or output level.
0 LIMIT IN
Limiter on/off
A LIMIT ATTACK
8
Limiter attack time. FAST: 2ms, SLOW: 4ms
When “METER” is IN
B LIMIT THRESHOLD
Limiter threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
C LIMIT RECOVERY
Limiter release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change
automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes
automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
8
When “METER” is GR
159
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
6 CROSSOVER RANGE
 MBC4
This horizontal bar for the band color indicates the range for the CROSSOVER parameter
for each band.
This high-quality four-band compressor utilizes VCM technology and features a GUI that
offers operability and visibility. All of the advantages of the musical behavior of analog
compressors have been built into the gain reduction circuitry of the MBC4. This allows smooth
control of dynamics while keeping the sound image. You can also use the graphical display
to visually manipulate the sound image.
123
4
7 CROSSOVER BAND WIDTH
This horizontal bar for the band color changes according to the CROSSOVER parameter
for each band.
567
8 INPUT meter
Indicates the level of the input signal.
One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO.
9 OUTPUT meter
Indicates the level of the output signal.
One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO.
8
9
7
8
1
9
2
>
A
3
4
1 GAIN LINE
This horizontal red line indicates the GAIN parameter for each band.
B
C
D
5
6
2 MAXIMUM GR GUIDELINE
This horizontal orange line is a guideline for maximum gain reduction. This is only a
guideline, and not a strict limitation for maximum gain reduction.
1 GAIN
3 GR ZONE
Adjust the output gain for each band.
This red area changes according to the amount of gain reduction for each band.
2 THRESH
4 CROSSOVER LINE
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied for each band. This
value is also indicated by a red marker in the 0 INPUT meter.
These vertical lines indicate the CROSSOVER parameters for each band.
5 CROSSOVER ZONE
3 RATIO
These areas, in the color of the band, change according to the CROSSOVER parameter
for each band.
Adjusts the compression ratio for each band.
160
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
4 ATTACK
B IN button
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time for each band.
Turns each band on or off. When this button is off, the band color for the selected area
changes to gray as shown below.
5 RELEASE
Adjusts the compressor’s release time for each band.
6 LINK knob
Links and adjusts the four bands for the selected parameter. However, if a parameter in
any frequency region reaches its maximum or minimum value, the link operation is
disabled. Parameters that can be linked and adjusted are displayed in band colors as
shown below.
Also, when this button is off, the COMPRESSOR field for the selected band turns gray.
7 CROSSOVER
Adjusts the crossover frequency when splitting the frequency range into multiple bands.
8 CUE button
Cue-monitors the corresponding band output for each band. When the CUE button is
on, the button changes to the color shown below.
If the IN button is off, the uncompressed sound is cue-monitored. The CUE buttons for
multiple bands can be turned on at the same time.
9 MASTER GAIN knob
You can adjust each parameter even when this button is off.
Adjusts the gain for the final output signal.
C FLAVOUR button
0 INPUT meter
Switches the type of compressor between accurate VCA operation and natural OPTO
operation.
Indicates the input level for the audio signals sent to each band.
A KNEE knob
D HARMONICS button
Adjusts the compressor’s knee.
Switches on/off the analog circuitry that emulates musical overtones.
161
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
 Premium Rack library
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and
Premium Rack libraries
For the Premium Rack, there are seven library items for each module type. You’ll use the
library of the module type to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The libraries are
numbered 000–100, and 000 is read-only data for initialization. All library items other than
#000 can be freely read and written.
To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top
of the window for the corresponding Premium Rack.
 GEQ/PEQ library
Use the “GEQ library” or “PEQ library” to store and recall GEQ and PEQ settings. All GEQ
and PEQ units used in the QL series console can use this GEQ library or PEQ library.
Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ in the GEQ library, you are free to recall
items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen
bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is a read-only preset, and the
remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
GEQ EDIT window.
Similarly, to recall an item from the PEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top
of the PEQ EDIT window.
NOTE
• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store
and recall two Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ units independently as A and B.
• To access the GEQ EDIT window or the PEQ EDIT window, press the rack container in the GEQ
field.
 Effect library
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the
effect library. Numbers 001–027 are read-only presets. The remaining library numbers can be
freely read or written.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
EFFECT EDIT window.
NOTE
If you recall an effect whose effect type is COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER610, OPENDECK, M.BAND DYNA., or M.BAND COMP, the other effects may be
momentarily muted in some cases.
162
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page)
This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to
the QL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices
that will be mounted. For details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network”
on page 256.
2
Using an I/O device
3
QL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such
as an R series product) connected to the Dante connector.
For details on connecting the QL series console to an I/O device, refer to the “Connecting to
I/O devices” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
1
4
I/O device patching
Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante
audio network.
STEP
1. Connecting QL series consoles and I/O devices.
For details, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” and “Quick Guide” sections in the
separate Owner’s Manual.
2. In the function access area, press the I/O DEVICE button.
3. Press the DANTE PATCH tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
4. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH
page).
5. Press the AUTO SETUP button.
If you want to edit individual patches, press the port select button.
6. Press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page).
7. Press the port select button in the OUTPUT PATCH window.
8. In the PORT SELECT screen, select the output port.
1 I/O device list
This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices.
Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can specify patching from
the console’s output ports to the I/O devices. If a previously set-up device does not
currently exist on the DANTE audio network, a yellow “VIRTUAL” indicator is shown at
the lower left of that device. If devices on the network belong to different DEVICE TYPEs
but share the same ID, a red “CONFLICT” indicator will appear to the left, below the
device. If multiple devices share the same ID, a yellow “DUPLICATE” indicator will
appear to the right, below the device.
2 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
for the audio network.
3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, in which you can select the
64 channels (32 channels for the QL1) that will be input from the I/O device to the
console.
4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button
Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT window, where
you can choose the 64 channels (32 channels for the QL1) that will be output from the
console’s output ports to I/O devices.
163
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
3 Port select buttons
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
Press to display the PORT SELECT window.
“Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number
(decimal)” are shown in the upper row on the button.
The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel
Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button.
When a patch establishes an audio connection via AES67, “AES67” is
displayed on the port selection buttons, etc.
If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate “---” and the
lower row will indicate nothing.
Displayed when you press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen
(DANTE PATCH page). Specify the 64(QL5) or 32(QL1) channels that will be input from the
I/O devices to the console.
1
2
NOTE
• If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the QL series, the upper line
of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “—”, and the channel
number (decimal).
• If a QL series console is mounted, the display for the upper row of buttons will be “QL#X” (where
X is the ID number of the mounted QL unit).
• If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, a value equal to the channel number will
be displayed in the lower row.
• You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate “Dante Controller” software. For the
latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
• The Audinate “Dante Controller” software is required to use the QL console in AES67 mode.
Routing via AES67 is possible only by using Dante Controller.
• Channels with patches that use AES67 offline will synchronize with the patch settings that are
saved on the target device when connected with the device.
3
1 LIBRARY button
Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library.
You can store ten sets of settings in the library.
NOTE
• If you recall data whose I/O device registration state differs from the current state, patching to
devices not registered in the I/O device list will be kept in its current state, and will not be recalled.
(The settings are recalled for an R series console or an external QL series console.)
• Similarly, if the UNIT ID is different than when the data was stored, the settings will not be recalled;
the current state will be maintained.
2 AUTO SETUP button
The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the
console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are
registered in the I/O device list.
When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to
confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching.
Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
164
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
PORT SELECT window
OUTPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the port select button in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window or
OUTPUT PATCH window. When you change a patch, select the I/O port.
Displayed when you press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Set
the output patch.
1
2
1 Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
1
DANTE SETUP window
3
The Dante devices can be mounted on the DEVICE MOUNT page in the DANTE SETUP
window.
1 Category select list
Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign.
2 Port select buttons
Select the input port.
3 CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the window.
The indicator (
) appears in the remote control supported device.
The NXAMPmk2 supports remote control with the Dante card (NXDT104mk2).
165
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Remotely controlling an R series unit
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
button, refer to 1 on P.163, “I/O device list”.
When the CONSOLE ID select button is set to OFF in the DANTE SETUP screen, the NOT
CTRL indicator appears below the Display switch button of each device.
This section explains how to remotely control an R series unit that’s connected to the Dante
connector.
STEP
1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the I/O tab to display the I/O
DEVICE screen (I/O page).
2. Press the rack in which the I/O device that has head amp functionality is mounted.
3. Open the I/O DEVICE HA screen to remotely control the head amp of the I/O device.
4. To remotely control a head amp from an input channel, press a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel you want to adjust. The GAIN/PATCH
window will appear.
6. Control the head amp of the I/O device in the GAIN/PATCH window.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the window.
8. Press the rack in which the I/O device on the OUTPUT side is mounted.
9. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching”on page 163.
The NOT CTRL indicator also appears on the icons of the DANTE PATCH screen.
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
If the WITH RECALL button is turned ON in the REMOTE HA SELECT screen, “w/RECALL”
is displayed. If the +48V ACTIVE switch for the mounted device is turned ON,“+48V
ACTIVE” is displayed.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
for the audio network.
I/O DEVICE screen (I/O page)
1
4 SYSTEM/SYNC indicators
Error, warning, and information messages are displayed. Refer to the list (page 261) for
detailed information about messages.
Now displays error and information icons to quickly check the status of the system and
synchronization.
2
3
6
4
Error
5
Information
When touching these icons, the details of errors and information are displayed at the
bottom of the display.
When an error occurs in SYSTEM or SYNC, the Error icon will appear at the top of right
side on the Display switch button.
7
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold
down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.
166
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
5 REMOTE ONLY button
 INPUT display
This button is displayed for I/O devices that can be operated on the device itself.
Set this button to ON to disable panel operation of the I/O device unit, making only
remote controls available. The operation (selecting ON or OFF) of the REMOTE ONLY
button is available only from a console the WITH RECALL button set to ON in the
REMOTE HA SELECT screen.
This shows the input settings of I/O devices not assigned to REMOTE HA ASSIGN.
6 REMOTE CONTROL STATUS indicator
Appears in all remote control supported devices and displays the settings of the remote
control.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not
light for external QL series consoles.)
7 OUTPUT PATCH button
 OUTPUT display
Appears when selecting a device (for I/O DEVICE) having a large number of channels.
Touch to open the OUTPUT PATCH window.
This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH
window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.
 HA display
This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA
window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.
0
If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not
light for external QL series consoles.)
9
8
 RMio64-D display
A
Displays the RMio64-D panel. You can press the buttons to change settings.
1
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not
light for external QL series consoles.)
2
3
4
5
8 Analog GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be
edited.
9 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.
0 OVER indicator
Warns you when the input signal is clipping.
9
A HPF indicator
Indicates the high-pass filter on or off status for each port.
6
7
8
1 MADI SRC ON indicator
MADI SRC ON button
Switches the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) on and off.
167
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
2 MADI SRC WCLK IN indicator
9 OUTPUT PATCH button
MADI SRC WCLK IN button
Use this button to select whether to use (indicator on) or not use (indicator off) the word
clock input from the MADI WCLK IN FOR SRC jack on the rear panel of the RMio64-D
as a standard clock for SRC.
Press this button to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output
port settings for RMio64-D.
 RSio64-D display
1
3 MADI INPUT RATE Fs 44.1kHz indicator
2
3 45
6
C
MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48kHz indicator
Automatically detect and indicate whether the MADI input signal is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
Both indicators remain off if there is no valid MADI input signal.
4 MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 2Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 4Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs/2Fs/4Fs button
Select either 1Fs (1x), 2Fs (2x), or 4Fs (4x), based on the MADI input frequency. For
example, if the MADI input signal is 192 kHz (4x 48 kHz), confirm that the MADI INPUT
RATE Fs 48kHz indicator is on and then select “4Fs”.
NOTE
When “2Fs” is selected, the unit automatically detects the frame frequency (48 kHz/96 kHz) of
the MADI input signal.
5 MADI STATUS INPUT status
MADI STATUS OUTPUT status
Display information regarding the MADI input and output signals (frame frequency/
number of channels).
6 WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator
WORD CLOCK MADI indicator
WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator
WORD CLOCK WCLK IN/MADI/DANTE buttons
Used to select the word clock source.
WCLK IN
Uses the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on
the rear panel of RMio64-D. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock
input.
MADI
Uses the word clock of the MADI input signal. The indicators flash when there is no
valid word clock input.
DANTE
Uses the word clock of the Dante network.
7
8
9
0
A
B
1 CARD NAME
This indicates the names of the cards installed in slots 1 to 4. If nothing is installed, “----” will
appear.
2 IN/OUT PORT
This indicates the number of input and output ports for the cards installed in slots 1 to
4. If no card is installed, “--” will appear.
3 SLOT 1 - 4 LOCK indicators
This indicates the word clock status for slots 1 to 4. If the word clock is operating
normally, this indicator will be green.
7 WORD CLOCK Fs indicator
Indicates the word clock frequency at which the unit is operating. Flashes when not
synchronized.
Off
8 EXTERNAL CONTROL indicator
This indicator comes on when there is a valid parameter that can be operated only
externally by remote control.
Refer to “Remote Control” in the RMio64-D Owner’s Manual for details about
parameters that can be operated by remote control.
Green (On)
LOCK
168
There is no card in the slot. Or, an unsupported card is in the slot.
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the clock source selected with the
[WORD CLOCK] select key is being input from the card. If an external device
is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output is occurring properly
between that device and the RSio64-D. If the sampling frequency is close,
this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Green
(Flashing)
SYNC
ERROR
A valid clock is being input from the card, but is not synchronized with the
clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key. If an external
device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur
correctly between that device and the RSio64-D. Turn SRC ON for correct
input/output.
Red (On)
UNLOCK
A valid clock is not being input from the card. If an external device is
connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly
between that device and the RSio64-D.
Red
(Flashing)
WRONG
WORD
CLOCK
The frequency of the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select
key is outside of the operating frequency range for the card inserted in the
slot. Either set the frequency of the clock source within the operating range
for the card, or turn [SRC] ON. For an analog card, if you turn [SRC] ON, the
frequency is set to the 48kHz built into the RSio64-D.
7 WORD CLOCK select button
Used to select the word clock source for the RSio64-D.
• WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator
• WORD CLOCK SLOT1 1/2 indicator
• WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator
Indicates the word clock source status for the RSio64-D.
WCLK IN
SLOT1 1/2
4 SLOT 1 - 4 SRC indicators
Indicate the Sampling Rate Converter (SRC) status for slots 1 to 4.
Off
DANTE
On when using the word clock signal being input from the WORD
CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of the RSio64-D. Flashes*1 if
there is no valid word clock input.
On when using the word clock for channels 1/2 of slot 1 for the RSio64D. Flashes*1 if there is no valid word clock input. When using MY8AEB*2, the word clock for channels 7/8 is used.
On when using the word clock for the Dante network*3. (If there is no
valid Dante signal input, the internal Dante module will generate a
clock.)
SRC is off.
Green (On)
SRC is on, and the clock selected with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the
RSio64-D is being input correctly.
Red (On)
SRC is on, but an appropriate clock is not being input. The clock selected
with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D is either not being input
or is not within the operating range. Either turn SRC off, or change the DIP
switch settings.
*1 When flashing, Dante word clock*3 input/output is used.
*2 If you are using MY8-AEB, set the AERSVD switch for the card to RSVD.
*3 If you make changes to the frequency of the Dante word clock, use Dante Controller.
8 CURRENT PATTERN button
If you press this button, the currently selected routing pattern on the RSio64-D is
displayed. If you switch the routing pattern on the RSio64-D, it will be applied in 3
seconds.
NOTE
Use the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D to set the SRC clock sent to the Mini-YGDAI
card inserted in the slot.
5 SLOT 1 to 4 SRC buttons
Used to turn SRC on/off at both IN and OUT for each slot.
6 WCLK indicator
If the card’s internal sampling rate converter function is enabled when an MY8-AE96S
mini-YGDAI card is inserted into the RSio64-D, “CARD” is displayed.
If the card’s internal sampling rate converter function is disabled, “SLOT” is displayed.
169
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
9 USER PATTERN button
Third-party equipment’s HA control function
Press this button to open the window for setting the audio routing user pattern in the
RSio64-D. Patch to the desired output ports of the slots and Dante.
It is possible to control supported third-party equipment’s head amps (HA) from the console.
You can control HA by registering supported devices in the DANTE SETUP window.
NOTE
NOTE
Patching from one slot to another is also available (including patching to the same slot). However,
you cannot patch from Dante to Dante.
While in PREVIEW mode, changes made to HA parameters from the console are not applied to
the device.
You can turn “WITH RECALL” on and off in the REMOTE HA ASSIGN window.
You can store/recall scene libraries and save/load files.
You can register up to 8 devices, including R series units. You can also register a device that
has the same UNIT ID as a device that is already registered, including R series units. You can
adjust HA parameters in advance, even when a connection is not established with the device
to be controlled.
You can control the following parameters.
1
2
3
1 HA phantom power (+48V) on/off
0 OUTPUT PATCH button
2 HA gain
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PATCH window, in which you can set the 64
Dante channels that will be output from the console to the RSio64-D.
3 Head amp HPF on/off
A POWER INT indicator
Indicates the status of the AC IN power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power switch is
off, no power is supplied to AC IN and the indicator remains off.
B POWER EXT indicator
Indicates the status of the EXT DC INPUT power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power
supply is on, this indicator will be on. This indicator is not affected by the status of the
power switch.
C Control status indicator
Indicates the control status of the device.
Searching for device to be controlled
Found device to be controlled, but connection refused
Connecting to device
Synchronizing with device
Device can be controlled
170
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE HA window
NOTE
The indicator on the right side of the rack indicates the control status of the device.
Displayed when you press the rack in which the I/O device on the head amp side is mounted.
You can remotely control the head amp of the I/O device from the QL series console by using
the on-screen knobs and buttons or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob on the top panel.
7
Searching for device to be controlled
1
Found device to be controlled, but connection refused
2
3
Connecting to device
8
4
5
Synchronizing with device
6
1 +48V ACTIVE
Device can be controlled
Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s phantom power. (Switching this on or off
is performed on the I/O device itself.)
2 +48V button
You can perform the following operations from input channels patched to the target device:
• Store/recall input channel library
• Channel jobs (channel link, etc.)
• HA controls at user level (only when operating HA from an input channel)
• AG-DG LINK
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob
to select it, and then use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The level meter located at the
immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
NOTE
NOTE
You cannot perform this operation on devices that do not support Gain Compensation.
For devices with a wider setting range than the QL series, since some values cannot be set from
the QL series. Likewise, if the value set on the connected device side is outside the QL series
setting range, it will be displayed as an approximate value or limit value.
4 GC button
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal
level on the audio network.
5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O
device, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press and select the FREQUENCY knob, you
can make adjustments using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
NOTE
For devices that differ in how the setting value changes from the QL series, the cutoff frequency
will be set as an approximate value.
171
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
6 Displayed port switch tabs
Remotely controlling an amp
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA window.
This section explains how to remotely control an amp unit that’s connected to the Dante connector.
7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
STEP
1. Press the AMP tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2. Press the I/O device displayed on the I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page).
3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” on page 163.
8 GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation
function is turned on.
 Remotely controlling from the input channels
To remotely control the I/O device’s head amp from an input channel of the QL series console,
operate the GAIN/PATCH window for the channel for which you want to control.
I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page)
1
2
3
 Remote control settings
• MTX/MRX series
The following settings are necessary to control the MTX/MRX series remotely..
STEP
1. Install the MTX-MRX Editor on the computer.
2. Connect the MTX-MRX series and Editor according to the MTX-MRX Editor user
guide.
3. Set remote (RS-232C) BET RATE: 38400 in Chapter 7 Remote Control dialog of the
MTX-MRX Editor User Guide.
4. Match the subnet of the QL series on the NETWORK screen (FOR DEVICE CONTROL
page) with the subnet of MTX-MRX series.
5. Place the ANALOG IN component using the MRX Designer, since the MRX Series
components can be freely placed therein.
1 Display switch buttons
• Stagetec NEXUS(XDIP)
Network configuration is required to control NEXUS(XDIP) remote. For details, please contact
the Stagetec Company, or refer to the website of the Stagetec Company.
Also, in order to validate the remote control setting contents from the QL series, NEXUS must
be used to properly set the internal routing of XDIP.
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
button, refer to 1 on page 163, “I/O device list.”
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
for the audio network.
172
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
 For NEXO NXAMPmk2
I/O DEVICE EDIT screen
This screen is displayed when you select the desired I/O device in the I/O DEVICE screen
(AMP page). You can remotely control the amplifier or the speakers.
 For NEXO NXAMPmk2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
3
4
7
8
6
1
7
8
:
9
A
C
1 Channel name
Displays the channel name (the speaker preset name for the NXAMP).
2 Output level meter
Displays the level of Voltage (amplifier output) and the level of Protect (gain reduction).
B
3 LIMIT status indicator
Lights when the limiter for amplifier protection is applied.
1 STATUS indicator
Indicates the status of the device.
4 PROTECT status indicator
Lights when the limiter for speaker protection is applied.
Status
5 VOLUME setting value
Displays the volume.
6 MUTE indicator
Indicates the currently set mute status.
7 Control status indicator
Indicates the control status of the device.
*
8 Device status indicator
Indicates the status of the device.
OVERALL
Overall status of the device
ALERT
Alert
AMP
Operating status of each amplifier channel
PS
Operating status of power supply unit
FAN
Operating status of each FAN unit
Indicator display
Green:
Yellow:
Orange:
Red:
Normal operation
Fault detection
Temporary malfunction
Malfunction that cannot
be resolved
ALERT indicator display is green and red only. When an alert occurs, the indicator turns red and the alert
contents are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2 SCENE
Displays the recalled scene number and title.
173
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
3 CABINET
 For Yamaha DZR-D series, DXS XLF-D series
Displays the name of NEXO Setup selected in the NXAMP.
2
4 VERSION
5
8
Displays the firmware version of the device.
5 INPUT METER
1
Displays both the input analog input levels and digital input levels.
6 STANDBY button
A
Switches the standby mode on or off.
3
7 OVERMUTE button
C
D
E
Switches the over mute (mute all channels) on or off.
8 Output level meter
Displays the output level of the channel.
9 VOLUME knob
67 9 : B
4
Sets the channel volume.
1 PRESET
0 LIMIT indicator
Displays the set preset number and title.
Lights while the limiter for amplifier or power supply protection is applied.
2 VERSION
A PROTECT indicator
Displays the firmware version of the device.
Lights while the limiter for speaker protection is applied.
3 STATUS indicator
B MUTE button
Indicates the status of the device.
Switches the channel mute on or off.
Status
C Channel name
Displays the channel name (the speaker preset name for the NXAMP).
*
OVERALL
Overall status of the device
ALERT
Alert
AMP
Operating status of each amplifier channel
PS
Operating status of each FAN unit
Indicator display
Green:
Yellow:
Orange:
Red:
Normal operation
Fault detection
Temporary malfunction
Malfunction that cannot
be resolved
ALERT indicator display is green and red only. When an alert occurs, the indicator turns red and the alert
contents are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
4 INPUT meter
Displays both the input analog input levels and digital input levels.
5 HPF ON button (DZR-D series only)
Switches the HPF on or off. The LPF is hidden and always on.
6 HPF/LPF FREQUENCY knob
Sets the HPF frequency for DZR-D series or the LPF frequency for DXS XLF-D series.
7 EQ ON button
Switches the EQ on or off.
174
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
8 DELAY ON button
Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit
Switches the delay on or off.
This section explains how to remotely control a WIRELESS unit that’s connected to the Dante
connector.
9 DELAY knob
Sets the delay time.
NOTE
0 DELAY TIME
For supported devices and compatible versions, refer to Yamaha Pro Audio website.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
Displays the delay time by time (TIME) and distance (meter, feet).
A Output level meter
STEP
1. Press the WIRELESS tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2. Press the I/O device displayed in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page).
Displays the output level of the speakers.
B MAIN LEVEL knob
Sets the output level.
C LIMIT indicator
I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page)
Lights while the limiter for amplifier or power supply protection is applied.
1
D MUTE button
2
Switches the mute on or off.
3
E Channel name
Displays the channel name (the LABEL for the DZR).
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
If you press and hold down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will
blink.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
button, refer to 1 on page 163, “I/O device list.”
175
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
2 ID/Model name display
6 RX.LEVEL/RX.GAIN
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
Indicates the gain for the receiver. This window is only for display; the value cannot be
edited.
3 DANTE SETUP button
7 MUTE indicator
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
for the audio network.
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
8 Signal quality meter
 Wireless device display
Displays the quality of the received RF signal. The vertical axis represents quality and the
horizontal axis represents time, and the display of connection status is updated every
second. If you move away from the transmitter, or the quality of the RF signal decreases
due to the influence of disturbing radio waves, the bar graph becomes lower. It displays
in purple for Shure devices, and in white for the other developer’s device.
A
1
2
3
9 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
4
5
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown
on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
In the Diversity mode, both A and B are shown. In the Quadversity mode, the one with
the strongest level among A to D is shown.
6
7
NOTE
For details about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF
signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
8
9
0 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
>
NOTE
For details about the relationship between number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to
the manual from each developer.
NOTE
A Control status indicator
Displayed contents and channels will be changed depending on the device.
Indicates the control status of the device.
1 Connection status indicator
Indicates the connection status with the wireless device.
The icon will be changed depending on the devices.
Searching for device to be controlled
Found device to be controlled, but connection refused
2 Channel name (transmitter)
Indicates the channel name that is set on the transmitter.
Connecting to device
3 TX.GAIN/TX.ATT
Synchronizing with device
Indicates the gain value for the transmitter. This window is only for display; the value
cannot be edited. The knob name is changed depending on the connected device.
Device can be controlled
4 Channel name (receiver)
Indicates the channel name that is set on the receiver.
NOTE
When control on the receiver side is possible, the parameter values for the receiver are sent to
the console.
5 Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
176
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE EDIT screen
4 TX.GAIN
This screen is displayed when you select the desired wireless device in the I/O DEVICE
screen (WIRELESS page). Here you can set the channel name and HA. You cannot set when
the device is offline. Note that when the device is online, the settings on the device are
applied.
5 Channel name (receiver)
Displays the gain value for the transmitter.
Press this button to display the NAME screen for setting channel names on the receiver
side. The number of characters that can be set varies depending on the device.
6 Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
B
1
2
7 RX.LEVEL knob/RX.GAIN knob
Sets the gain value for the receiver. To adjust the value, touch the screen, then press the
knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs. The level meter located at the
immediate right of the knob indicates the input level. The knob will not display when
the wireless device is not support this control.
3
4
5
6
8 MUTE button
Mutes the audio signal for the receiver.
9 Signal quality meter
7
Displays the quality of the received RF signal. The vertical axis represents quality and the
horizontal axis represents time, and the display of connection status is updated every
second. If you move away from the transmitter, or the quality of the RF signal decreases
due to the influence of disturbing radio waves, the bar graph becomes lower. It displays
in purple for Shure devices, and in white for the other developer’s device.
8
9
0 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
0
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown
on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
In the Diversity mode, both A and B are shown. In the Quadversity mode, the one with
the strongest level among A to D is shown.
A
C
NOTE
For details about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF
signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
NOTE
Displayed contents and channels will be changed depending on the device.
A Battery indicator
1 Connection status indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
Indicates the connection status with the wireless device.
The icon will be changed depending on the devices.
NOTE
For details about the relationship between number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to
the manual from each developer.
2 Channel name button (transmitter)
B Mode indicator
Press this button to display the NAME screen for setting channel names on the
transmitter side. The number of characters that can be set varies depending on the
device.
Indicates the mode status of the device such as Diversity mode or Quadversity mode.
When not activated, it shows “Diversity mode: off” or “Quadversity mode: off”
respectively.
3 TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the gain value for the transmitter. To adjust the value, touch the screen, then press
the knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs. The knob will not display
when the wireless device is not support this control.
177
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
C PORT ASSIGN tab
Example: Connecting the output of a Shure AXT400 to OMNI 1 on a QL console, and
assigning the signal to input channel 1.
Press the PORT ASSIGN button to open the PORT SELECT window. Select the port to
which the output from the AXT400 is connected (OMNI 1).
Select these tabs to switch between the windows that specify the ports where the actual
input signals are assigned.
178
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Access the GAIN/PATCH window.
This assigns the output signal from the AXT400 to the input channel, and at the same
time allows you to control and monitor the level of the AXT400 from the input channel.
Press the INPUT PORT button, and on the PORT SELECT window select the port to which
the output signal from the AXT400 is connected (OMNI 1).
Precautions
• If the target device is unmounted, the parameters on the console return to their default
values. If a new device is mounted and patched, that device’s parameters are applied to the
console.
• All port assignments for a rack are defeated only if the status of the rack is NO ASSIGN.
• Regarding the control of each developer’s device, control parameters are not stored in
scenes and saved in console files.
• For devices that can set both Dante Input Patch and Port Assign, if Dante Input Patch has
already been set, the Port Assign setting will be ignored.
179
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Using an external head amp
QL5
Audio signal
If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head
amp in the QL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the QL console some parameters
of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V)
on/off status, gain, and HPF.
For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the Owner’s Manual for the I/O card.
Remote signal
Connecting the QL series console to an AD8HR
To remotely control the AD8HR from the QL series console, install an MY16-ES64
EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the QL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the QL unit
to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA
REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection
enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the QL series console. To transmit audio
signals (input to the AD8HR) to the QL series console, connect the DIGITAL OUT A (or B)
connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a D-sub 25-pin
AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the QL series
console via the MY16-ES64 card.
Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units
simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second
AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to four
AD8HR units. Each slot of the QL series console provides up to 16 channels of input, so if you
want the audio signals from the AD8HR to be input to the QL series console, you’ll need to
install two MY16-EX cards in the console and connect the MY16-ES64 via an Ethernet cable.
MY16-EX
MY16- ES64
NAI48-ES
DIGITAL
OUT A
connector
HA REMOTE connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 1
HA REMOTE 2 connector
DIGITAL OUT A
connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 2
HA REMOTE 2 connector
DIGITAL OUT A
connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 3
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Up to four units
180
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
 Ring connection
Connecting the QL series console to an SB168-ES
To remotely control the SB168-ES from the QL series console, install an MY16-ES64
EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the QL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the QL unit
to the SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the QL
series console.
Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install one MY16-EX
expansion card in the slot on the QL unit to remotely control up to two SB168-ES units
simultaneously.
QL5
Audio signal
Remote signal
NOTE
Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 of the QL series console.
MY16-ES64
 Daisy chain network
MY16-EX
QL5
Audio signal
OUT
Remote signal
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
MY16-ES64
MY16-EX
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
NOTE
IN
Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/
MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.
SB168-ES
181
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Remotely controlling an external head amp
I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page)
5
An external head amp (“external HA”) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES can be
remotely controlled from the QL series console. For details on how to connect a QL series
console with an external head amp, refer to “Using an external head amp” on page 180 and
the external head amp’s operating manual.
STEP
1. Connect the QL series console to an external HA.
2. In the function access area, press the RACK button.
3. Press the EXTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
4. Press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button for the corresponding rack in the I/O
DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
5. Use the PORT SELECT buttons in the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window to select
the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected.
6. Press the CLOSE button to close the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window.
7. In the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page), press the rack in which the external
HA you want to control is mounted.
8. Remotely control the external head amp in the EXTERNAL HA window.
6
1
2
3
4
1 EXTERNAL HA field
Shows the state of the connected external HA.
2 ID/Model name/+48V ACTIVE
This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is
automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to 4. This field also
enables you to view the on/off status of the phantom power.
VIRTUAL RACK screen
(EXTERNAL HA page)
3 Virtual racks
These are up to four racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be
mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN
setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the
EXTERNAL HA window for that rack.
4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button
Press this button to display the HA PORT SELECT window, in which you can set the input
port for the external head amp mounted in the rack.
NOTE
If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the QL series console, you must specify an
appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected
correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.
182
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
5 VIEW switch buttons
EXTERNAL HA window
Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view that’s
appropriate for the connected device.
Remotely control the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the virtual rack in
the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
6 COMM PORT switch buttons
Specify whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select
“SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA.
1
2
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window
3
Select the input port for the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
1
4
5
1 +48V ACTIVE
If an external HA is connected, the phantom power on/off status is shown here.
(The on/off setting is made on the external HA unit itself.)
2 +48V button
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
These indicate the gain of the external HA. If you press and select the GAIN knob, you
can make adjustments to gain using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The level meter
located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the
corresponding port.
4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and
adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press and select the FREQUENCY knob, you can make
adjustments using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
1 PORT SELECT buttons
Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected.
5 Rack select tabs
These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window.
NOTE
• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used.
These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window even if an AD8HR is not
connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.
• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to
set the EtherSound parameters. Use AVS-ESMonitor for these functions.
183
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
 Remotely controlling an external HA from the input channels on a QL
series console
INTERNAL HA window
You will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on an I/O device or
on the QL console. For details on the GAIN/PATCH window, refer to “Making HA (Head Amp)
settings” on page 28.
1
2
3
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen that includes the channel for the head amp that you want to control.
2. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel whose external HA you want to adjust.
3. Press the PATCH button in the GAIN/PATCH window, and select the input port
assigned to the external HA.
4. Remotely control the external head amp in the GAIN/PATCH window.
4
5
1 +48V ACTIVE
Indicates the phantom power on or off status.
SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW
screen
2 +48V button
GAIN/PATCH window
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 A. GAIN knob
These indicate the gain of the internal HA. To adjust the value, press the knob to select
it, and then use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The level meter located at the
immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
Controlling an internal head amp
4 GC button
Control the internal head amps (“internal HA”) in QL series consoles. It is not necessary to
change the input patch.
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal
level on the audio network.
5 Displayed port switch tabs
STEP
1. Press the INTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE window.
2. Set the output port on the INTERNAL HA window, as necessary.
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the INTERNAL HA window
I/O DEVICE screen (INTERNAL HA page)
184
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
MIDI
NOTE
As the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages, you can select either the rear
panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in slot 1. All of the functionality described
in this section will be available on the port you select.
This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the QL series
console to control the QL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from
the QL console as you operate the unit.
The following illustration shows an example of connecting the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to
transmit and receive MIDI messages.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Basic MIDI settings
You can select the type of MIDI messages the QL series console will transmit and receive, the
MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
MIDI OUT
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the MIDI/GPI button in the center of the SETUP screen.
3. Press the MIDI SETUP tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4. Press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the MIDI
SETUP page.
5. In the MIDI SETUP window for port selection, select the port type and port number
that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
6. Press the channel select button in the MIDI SETUP page.
7. In the MIDI SETUP window for channel selection, select the channel that will
transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
8. In the MIDI SETUP page, turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI
message.
External device
QL5
MIDI functionality on the QL series console
The QL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations.
 Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the QL series console, a
Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an
external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program
Change message is received from an external device.
 Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the QL series console,
the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device.
Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an
external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or
other external device, and play them back later.
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen
(MIDI SETUP page)
 Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception
NOTE
When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user
settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be
transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter
Changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, QL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer
or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and
executed by another QL console.
• For details on using Program Change messages, refer to “Using program changes to recall
scenes and library items” on page 188.
• For details on using Control Change messages, refer to “Using control changes to control
parameters” on page 190.
185
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page)
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode.
• SINGLE...................... If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and
received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).
• MULTI ........................ If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/
received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).
• OMNI.......................... If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will
be received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/reception
and Single mode transmission are disabled.
• BANK......................... If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted
and received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch
the group of Program Change messages to be used.)
You can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose
the port that will be used.
1
2
3
4
5
4 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or
off.
• Tx............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx .............................. Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO......................... Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages.
(If this function is on, Control Change messages received from
an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
6
7
5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode.
• NRPN button ............. If this button is on, the QL mix parameters will be transmitted/
received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN
mode).
• TABLE button ........... If this button is on, the QL mix parameters will be transmitted/
received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel
(TABLE mode).
1 PORT/CH field
Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
• Tx PORT/Tx CH......... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can
respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI
messages.
• Rx PORT/Rx CH........ Press these buttons to open windows in which you can
respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI
messages.
6 PARAMETER CHANGE field
Enables you to turn transmission/reception of SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or
off. (These are special messages used to control the parameter of the QL console.)
• Tx............................... Switches parameter change transmission on/off.
• Rx .............................. Switches parameter change reception on/off.
• ECHO......................... Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change
messages. (If this function is on, Parameter Change messages
received from an external device will be retransmitted without
modification.)
NOTE
When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used
as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
2 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or
off.
• Tx ............................... Switches program change transmission on/off.
• Rx............................... Switches program change reception on/off.
• ECHO......................... Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages.
(If this function is on, Program Change messages received
from an external device will be retransmitted without
modification.)
7 OTHER COMMMAND field
Switches on or off echo output of other MIDI messages. (If this function is on, other
MIDI messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without
modification.)
186
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
MIDI SETUP window (for port selection)
MIDI SETUP window (for channel selection)
Here you can select the port that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. This
window appears when you press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx)
in the PORT/CH field.
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission
and reception. This window appears when you press the channel select button in the PORT/
CH field.
1
2
1
2
3
1 CH field
1 TERMINAL field
Enables you to select CH1–CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI
messages.
Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
NONE
No port will be used.
MIDI
MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel
SLOT1
A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on
the rear panel
2 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
2 PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1–8 in this field. (The
number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.)
The currently-available card is valid only for port 1.
3 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
187
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
Using program changes to recall scenes and library
items
MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page)
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted
and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned
to each program number.
The QL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to
each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the QL console, a
Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external
device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change
message is received from an external device.
1
STEP
1. Connect the QL series console to an external device.
2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 185, select the ports and MIDI
channels that will be used to transmit/receive program changes.
3. Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4. In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, switch Program Change transmission/reception on
or off, select transmission/reception mode, and set echo output.
5. To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event
in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
2
3
5
4
6
1 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked
with the PROGRAM CHANGE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx...........................If this is on, the corresponding Program Change messages will be
transmitted when events on the list are executed.
• Rx ..........................If this is on, the corresponding events will be executed when
Program Change messages are received.
• ECHO.....................If this button is on, Program Change messages received from an
external device will be retransmitted without change.
MIDI/GPI screen
(PROGRAM CHANGE page)
NOTE
2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than
for individual scenes.
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked
with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
188
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on):
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/
receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program
Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program
number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on a QL series console, the Program Change of the
corresponding program number will be transmitted on the MIDI channel shown in the
list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on multiple MIDI
channels/multiple program numbers, only the lowest-numbered program number on
each MIDI channel will be transmitted.)
• CH/BANK...............If “CH” is shown, this column indicates the MIDI channel (1–16)
on which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program
Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the
BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical
value in this column will correspond to the bank number.
• NO..........................Indicates the program number 1–128.
• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
.........................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each
channel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual
event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE
window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign.
• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):
Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the
MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx
channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding
channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on a QL series console, the Program Change of the
corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list.
(If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the
lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.)
4 Scroll knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to scroll the list up or down.
5 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to erase all events from the list.
6 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
• When the OMNI button is on in SINGLE mode
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI
channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of
the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the
operation for Program Change transmission.
MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window
You can specify the event assigned to each program number. Display this window by pressing
the list in the PROGRAM CHANGE page in the MIDI/GPI screen.
1
• When the BANK button is on in SINGLE mode
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select
(Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and
received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single
MIDI channel.
When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on
the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the
list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the QL series console, bank select + program
change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will
be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the
list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
2
3
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received,
the last-selected bank number will be used.
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,
Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
3 List
4
Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI
Program Change number. The list shows the following items.
189
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
1 TYPE field
STEP
1. Connect the QL series console to an external device.
2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 185, select the ports and MIDI
channels that will be used to transmit/receive control changes.
3. Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4. Switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/
reception mode, and set echo output.
5. To change the event assignment for each control number, press the desired event
in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
Enables you to select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
NO ASSIGN
No assignment
SCENE
Scene memory recall operations
EFFECT
Effect library recall operations
PREMIUM RACK
Recall operations for the corresponding Premium
Rack library
2 DESTINATION field
Enables you to select the rack for which you want to recall a library item. If EFFECT or
PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE
is selected, this will indicate “- - -”, and no choice is available for this field.
3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY TITLE field
Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall.
If SCENE or EFFECT is selected in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY TITLE is shown. If PREMIUM
RACK is selected, the LIBRARY NUMBER is shown.
4 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
MIDI/GPI screen
(CONTROL CHANGE page)
Using control changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob
operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the QL series console. This capability can be
used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and
play back this data later.
You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
NOTE
Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for
individual scenes.
 Using Control Changes
This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can
freely assign an event to each control number.
 Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte)
and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted
Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of
that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be
changed.
NOTE
For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
190
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page)
NOTE
The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/
CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (page 186).
You can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event
(fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
3 List
1
Shows the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to
each control number.
• NO..........................This indicates the control number. You can use control numbers
1–31, 33–95, and 102–119.
• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
.........................Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to
each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI
CONTROL CHANGE window will appear, allowing you to change
the control number assignment.
2
4 CLEAR ALL button
3
Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list.
5 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
4
6
6 Scroll knob
5
Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate
this.
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify
whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL
CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx button ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx button............................... Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO button......................... Selects whether incoming control changes will be
echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.
2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This
setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):
Various mix parameters on the QL series console will be transmitted and received on a
single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the
list will be ignored.
• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):
Various mix parameters on the QL series console will be transmitted and received on a
single MIDI channel as Control Change messages, according to the assignments in the
list.
191
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
Using parameter changes to control parameters
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window
Display this window by pressing any event in the CONTROL CHANGE page. In this window,
you can specify the event assigned to each control number.
On the QL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called
“Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off
operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or
NRPN messages.
For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI
Data Format” in the QL Data List (End of Manual).
STEP
1. Connect the QL series console to an external device.
2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 185, select the ports and MIDI
channels (device number) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes.
3. Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field in the MIDI
SETUP page to turn on parameter change transmission/reception.
2
1
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.
The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used
as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does
not match the device number of the receiving QL console, the message will be ignored.
• Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.
Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other
problems.
3
1 MODE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
2 PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.
3 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
NOTE
• The list shown is the same for all models of the QL series. For the QL1, the display will indicate
“Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this
window are ignored.
• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the QL Data List (End
of Manual).
192
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Recorder
Assigning channels to the input/output of the
recorder
This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.
Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB
memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT
channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input
channel.
About the USB memory recorder
The QL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record
internal audio signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash
drive.
As the file format for recording, the QL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3).
For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4
AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be
recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on the USB flash
drive can be played back via an assigned input channel.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2. Press the USB tab in the RECORDER screen.
3. Press the RECORDER INPUT L or R button.
4. Use the category list and the port select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select
the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input.
5. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
6. Assign a channel to the other input in the same way.
7. Press the PLAYBACK OUTPUT L or R button.
8. Use the category list and the channel select buttons in the CH SELECT window to
select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
9. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
10. Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.
 Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
MIX1-16
MATRIX1-8
RECORDER
INPUT
L
PLAYBACK
OUT
USB memory
recorder
STEREO L/R
MONO
L
R
R
INPUT1-64*
ST IN 1L1R-8L8R
INPUT1-64*
DIRECT OUT
* QL1: INPUT1-32
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
RECORDER screen
NOTE
• The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in
monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to
the same channel.
• You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output.
• In steps 4 and 8, if you select a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box
will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
193
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
6 PLAYBACK OUTPUT GAIN knob
In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder,
and perform recording and playback operations.
7 PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button
Sets the level of the signal output to the recorder.
Press this button to monitor the signal output from the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
8 Meters
Indicate the level of the signals output to the recorder.
CH SELECT window
Display this window by pressing the RECORDER INPUT L or R button or the PLAYBACK
OUTPUT L or R button.
1
1
23
4
8
7 6
2
1
2
5
1 RECORDER INPUT L/R buttons
1 Category List
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals
patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels.
Enables you to select the type of channel.
2 Channel select button
2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs and
outputs. The channels that can be patched at input or output are different.
Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s inputs
• MIX 1–16.................... MIX channels 1–16
• MTRX 1–8.................. MATRIX channels 1–8
• ST L/R........................ STEREO channel L/R
• ST L+C....................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO(C) channel
• ST R+C ...................... STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO(C) channel
• MONO........................ MONO channel
• CH1–64 (QL5), CH1–32 (QL1)
............................. Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–64 (QL5) or INPUT
channel 1–32 (QL1)
• INPUT ........................ INPUT1–32 (QL1: INPUT1–16)
• SLOT1 IN ................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.
3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button
When this button is turned on, you can monitor the signal input to the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
4 Meters
Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.
5 PLAYBACK OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals
patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback.
194
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
• SLOT2 IN ................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• DANTE1–32 ............... DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ............. DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s outputs
• CH1–64 (QL5), CH1–32 (QL1)
............................. INPUT channel 1–64 (QL5) or INPUT channel 1–32 (QL1)
• STIN 1L/1R-STIN 8L/8R
............................. ST IN channels 1–8L/R
Recording audio to a USB flash drive
You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB
flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.
1
2
STEP
1. Refer to “Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder” on page 193 to
assign channels to the input/output of the recorder.
2. Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.
3. To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are
patched to the input of the recorder.
4. Press the REC RATE button in the lower right of the RECORDER screen, then select
the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded.
5. Press the REC () button located at the bottom of the screen.
6. To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button in the lower part of the
screen.
7. To stop recording, press the STOP () button.
8. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
8-1. Press the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button to play back the recording.
8-2. To stop playback, press the STOP () button.
7
8
9
0
A
34 5
6
 TRANSPORT field
This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song.
1 Current song
Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following
indicators will appear during playback or recording.
Playing
Recording
NOTE
• The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity in the USB flash drive.
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
• The level meter on the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder.
If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the
recorder. Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports
from the corresponding output channel.
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE
folder in the USB flash drive. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS
folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.
2 Elapsed time display
Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the
elapsed recording time during recording.
3 Remaining time display
During playback, this indicates the remaining playback time of the current song.
4 Current song format
Indicates the file format information for the current song (the file being recorded).
195
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
5 REC RATE button
 Directory structure of a USB flash drive
Switches the recording rate.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio
quality, but will increase the size of the data.
When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder
within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the
currently-selected folder below that level.
NOTE
The word clock rate at which the QL series console is currently operating will automatically be
selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.
YPE folder
Root directory
6 Display switch buttons
Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUTPUT
fields at the bottom of the song list.
Songs folder
7 REW button
Song
(audio file)
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song and stops playback. If
the playback point is already at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of
the preceding song that has been selected for playback.
If the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this
button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which
the button was released.
8 STOP button
The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.
9 PLAY button
Changes the recorder mode as follows.
Stop modePlayback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current
song.
Playback modePlayback-pause mode
Playback pause modePlayback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.
Recording standby modeRecording mode
Recording modeRecording-pause mode
Recording-pause modeRecording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.
0 FF button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY
check symbol.
If you hold down this button for two seconds or longer, fast-forward will occur.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which
the button was released.
A REC button
Places the recorder in recording standby mode.
The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button will light.
NOTE
You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (page 221).
196
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
RECORDER screen
35
You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files
that were recorded on the QL series console, you can also play files that were copied from
your computer to the USB flash drive.
The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz
and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.
4
1
2
NOTE
• If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder,
or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of
unsupported formats will not be recognized.
• The QL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.
If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories
can be managed.
A
0
C
B
STEP
1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3. You can use the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen and the folder icon
in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.
4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob or press the on-screen file name to select the
desired file.
5. Press a button in the PLAY MODE field to select the playback mode.
6. If you turned on the REPEAT button in step 5, press the PLAY checkmark for the song
you want to play.
7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button to play back the song.
8. To stop playback, press the STOP () button.
6 7
8
9
 Title list
This list enables you to perform operations related to the songs and directories that are saved
on the USB flash drive.
1 Selected song
The currently selected song will appear in a blue frame.
NOTE
• Even if the sampling rate at which the QL series console is operating differs from the sampling
rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically
convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.
• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.
2 Status indicator
Displays a symbol to indicate whether the currently-selected file is playing or paused.
: Playing, : Paused
3 Track number
Indicates the file number in the title list.
197
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
4 Sub-directory
C REPEAT button
Indicates each song’s track number, the name of upper level directory, and whether a
sub-directory exists (in the case that the directory has been selected).
• Upper level............Press this to move up to the directory that is one level higher than
the current one.
If this button is on, after playback of the current song is complete, the recorder will play
the first song on the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol (unless there are no
subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol).
If this button is off, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete
(unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). One
of the following playback methods is selected according to the on/off settings of the
SINGLE button and the REPEAT button.
• Sub-directory........Press this to move to that sub-directory.
SINGLE
button
NOTE
• If you switch folders, that folder will be selected as the recording destination.
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and
folders located below the SONGS folder.
5 PLAY check symbol
REPEAT
button
On
On
The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop
playback.
On
Off
The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.
Off
On
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order,
starting with the currently-selected song, and then they are
played again from the first song in the title list. The currentlyselected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
Off
Off
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order,
starting with the currently-selected song. After the final song in
the title list is played, playback stops.
Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.
6 SELECT knob
Mode
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a song.
7 NOW PLAYING button
Editing the title list
Press this button to always select the currently-playing song on the list.
8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist
names.
Change the order of the selected song in the list.
9 Display switch buttons
STEP
1. Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3. Press the No. button and the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen to view
a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.
4. If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT
button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.
5. Edit the title or artist name, and press the OK button.
6. If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,
and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.
7. When editing is complete, press the SAVE LIST button to save the changes.
Switch the list between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display.
0 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist.
A RELOAD button
Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current
playlist you are editing back to the previous state.
 PLAY MODE field
Sets the playback method of the currently selected song.
B SINGLE button
If this button is on, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete.
If this button is off, the recorder will play the next song on the list after playback of the
current song is complete.
NOTE
• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be
converted into
for display.
• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.
198
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
3
4
If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes
a QL console, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) software. DVS works as an audio
interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that
includes a QL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track
recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a
virtual sound check.
This section explains the steps required when adding DAW software to an audio network.
1
2
Required devices and software
• QL series
• A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit
Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW software
• A GbE-compatible network switch
• CAT5e cable
• Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software or Dante Accelerator card
• Dante Controller control software
5
6
NOTE
• You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. A sheet with the DVS token needed
to acquire the license ID is included in the QL unit package.
• The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at
the following website:
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list.
2 ARTIST EDIT button
Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.
NOTE
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the
title and for the artist name. If the title cannot be shown completely, the text will scroll horizontally.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title.
4 ARTIST SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name.
5 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist on
the USB flash drive.
6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/
FILE NAME field.
199
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Word clock settings
Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
In a Dante network, the leader device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the
network. If the leader device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will
automatically take over as the clock leader.
To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then the WORD
CLOCK/SLOT button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window.
Install Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and
Dante Controller in the computer that you
want to use for audio recording.
Make the following settings before turning
DVS on.
• Connect the GbE-compatible network port
of the computer to a GbE-compatible
network switch.
• Configure the computer to obtain an IP
address automatically
(this is the default setting).
• Set the audio format.
(Example: 48kHz, 24 bit)
• Set the Dante latency. (Use a high setting to
ensure stability when using multiple
channels.)
• In the Advanced settings, select the number
of channels to be used for recording and
playback (the default is 8 x 8).
Less than V3.7
V3.7
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User’s Guide for more information on ASIO settings
(Windows).
Dante Accelerator settings
After mounting a Dante Accelerator card on the computer, install the Dante Accelerator Driver
and make the following settings. For information about how to install the driver, refer to the
Installation Guide included with the driver.
• Use a network cable to connect the Dante jack on the Dante Accelerator card to the Dante
network, and then connect the computer’s network port to the same network.
• Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
NOTE
For more information about selecting a computer for remote control from a QL series console,
refer to “When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS” in “Specifying DVS
or Dante Accelerator” on page 204.
200
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Setting up Dante Controller
Setting up DAW software
Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the
computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
The following settings can be made via Dante Controller.
• For multi-track recording, patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS or the Dante
Accelerator card.
• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the
computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the QL console
(page 163).
The following example shows Dante Controller settings for when channels 1–16 of an I/O
device are patched to DVS.
You must make driver settings in your DAW software. You must make driver settings in your
DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante Virtual Sound Card-ASIO” (“Dante”
for Mac) or “Yamaha AIC128-D” as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output.
Some DAW software may require internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For
more information, refer to the DAW software manual.
 Setting up Nuendo Live
When you start up Nuendo Live and create a new project, tracks corresponding to the number
of channels specified in DVS will be created automatically, and the channel names and colors
from the QL series console will automatically be assigned as each track name.
Audio recording and playback
After you have made driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back
audio.
For multi-track recording, set the input ports for the tracks of the DAW software to the ports
that receive audio signals from the I/O devices.
For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the
QL console. To do so, patch the signals so that they will be output from the DAW software to
DANTE 1–64 on the QL console (DANTE 1–32 for the QL1). It may be convenient for you later
if you store two sets of the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing
audio signals from the I/O devices, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW
software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante
Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the
I/O device to monitor during a virtual sound check.
In this case, you’ll need to switch the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the QL series console
depending on whether you’re performing multitrack recording or multitrack playback. If you’ve
saved these different sets of settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (page 164),
you’ll be able to switch between them conveniently.
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings
of the Dante Controller.
201
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Using the QL console with Nuendo Live
RECORDER screen (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
The QL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live
DAW software.
The “Yamaha Console Extension” software which integrates the QL series and Nuendo Live
can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the QL series
console to easily perform multi-track recording operations.
This section explains how to operate Nuendo Live from the QL series console.
1
2
Preparing the project
Refer to “Recording or playing back using a computer DAW” on page 199 to make the
following settings.
• Settings for Dante Virtual Soundcard or Dante Accelerator
• Setting up Dante Controller
• Setting up Nuendo Live
3
4
G
5
Recording into a project
6
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2. Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the RECORDER screen.
3. Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.
4. When you finish recording, press the record lock button and then press the STOP
button.
7 8 9 0
A
B
C
D H EI
F
1 Nuendo meter display field
This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live.
2 PEAK CLEAR button
Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function.
3 Marker list field
Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.
The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
4 Nuendo Live SETUP button
Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with
Nuendo Live (page 203).
5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo
Live tab)
Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH window (page 164).
6 Location information display
This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can
press the button at the right to switch the time display format.
202
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
 Transport field
Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator
Here you can operate the transport of Nuendo Live.
Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For
details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network” on page 256.
7 GO TO PROJECT START button
Returns the location to the start of the project.
STEP
1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.
2. In the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window, press the setting method select button.
3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button
Returns the location to the previous marker.
9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button
Advances the location to the next marker.
0 GO TO PROJECT END button
NOTE
Advances the location to the end of the project.
• You can specify either DVS or Dante Accelerator in the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window.
• However, do not select the same DVS or Dante Accelerator from multiple QL series consoles.
A CYCLE button
Turns repeat on/off for the project.
NUENDO LIVE SETUP window
B STOP button
In this window, specify the device that the console will use for communication when working
with Nuendo Live.
Stops playback/recording of the project.
C PLAY button
Starts playback of the project.
D RECORD button
1
Starts/stops recording of the project.
E EASY RECORDING button
Immediately starts recording on all tracks.
When you press this, the location will move to the last-recorded position, all tracks will
be set to record mode, recording will begin, the record panel will be displayed, and the
panel will be locked. The recording will be started retrospectively.
(Initial setting: 10 seconds)
F Record lock button
Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally
stopped during recording.
G DVS information display
Shows the device label of the selected DVS.
H ADD MARKER button
Adds a marker to the project at the current location.
I RECALL LINK button
Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is
turned on, the button will be lit.
NOTE
Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys (page 221).
203
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
1 Setup method select buttons
 When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
Choose one of the following methods by which to specify DVS or Dante Accelerator.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not assigned
• DVS ..................................... Select a DVS from the device list
• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS .. When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of
the computer
When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer in the SPECIFIED IP
ADDRESS field. Since the IP address of Dante Accelerator will differ from the IP address used
by Yamaha Console Extension, you must specify the IP address manually.
 When setup method selection button = DVS
To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to
display the DEVICE LIST field.
1
1
1 IP ADDRESS knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to specify an IP address.
2
NOTE
• As the IP address, specify the IP address of the computer that is running Nuendo Live.
• Set the address of that computer in the range of 169.254.0.0–169.254.255.255, and set the
subnet mask as 255.255.0.0.
• For the computer in which Dante Accelerator is installed, the Dante port of Dante Accelerator as
well as the Ethernet port of the computer must both be connected to the same network.
Refer to the illustration below.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.
Computer
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Dante Accelerator
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the DVS to switch to.
QL
SW
(Primary)
Ethernet
P
S
Dante
SW
(Secondary)
P
S
204
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
NOTE
• Depending on the firmware version, Dante Accelerator might not support redundant networking.
Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the Dante Accelerator firmware
supports redundant networking.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
Playing a multi-track project
STEP
1. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the RECORDER screen (Nuendo Live page).
2. In the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, press the PORT SELECT button for the port to
which you want to assign the signal from Nuendo Live.
3. In the list at the left of the PORT SELECT window, select the DVS you’re using with
Nuendo Live, and select the port you want to assign it to.
4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the window to switch the port, and
assign a DVS port to it in the same way.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the
window.
6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close
it.
7. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.
8. Operate the channels so that sound is output.
9. To stop playback, press the STOP button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
PORT SELECT window
NOTE
If you save the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in a library, the settings of the QL series console
can be switched conveniently (page 164).
205
V5.8 Reference Manual
AFC IMAGE Control
AFC IMAGE Control
NETWORK window (AFC IMAGE page)
AFC IMAGE settings
1
2
3
AFC IMAGE allows you to intuitively create a variety of effects without worrying about
individual speaker settings, by arranging large numbers of objects and moving them freely.
4
5
6
1 ENABLE button
When this is off, press it to start communication with the device. Press it when lit to end
communication with the device.
2 SYNC STATUS indicator
Displays the communication status with the device.
3 REFRESH
Matches the channel name of the main unit with the object name of the device.
Select the copy direction and press the REFRESH button to start copying.
4 PREFERENCE SCENE RECALL
STEP
1. Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the NETWORK button to display the NETWORK screen.
3. Press the AFC IMAGE tab to display the “AFC IMAGE tab.
When this is turned on, you can recall AFC scenes from the console.
5 IP ADDRESS
Set the IP address of the device.
6 OBJECT ASSIGN
Sets the start channel and the number of objects for the channel.
206
V5.8 Reference Manual
AFC IMAGE Control
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen (1ch)
When the AFC IMAGE is set, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen appears as follows.
AFC IMAGE parameters can be viewed and edited for the corresponding multiple channels.
1
4
1
2
6
5
3
1 AFC IMAGE graph
Displays parameters for AFC IMAGE.
1 AFC switch button
2 Z meter
Press to display the AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom-up screen that displays / changes the
AFC IMAGE parameter.
Displays the Z axis of the object.
3 SEND level
Displays the send level.
4 AFC CONTROL button
Switches the control on or off. When this button is turned off, the position cannot be
operated from the console.
5 Parameter knobs
Displays the position (X, Y, Z), size and send level of AFC IMAGE. Use the TOUCH AND
TURN knob to operate the parameters.
6 SOLO
Switches the Solo function on or off. The SOLO CLEAR button disables all solo functions.
The SOLO and SOLO CLEAR buttons for which Show mode is turned on in AFC IMAGE
will be hidden.
207
V5.8 Reference Manual
AFC IMAGE Control
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen
(CH 1-32, CH 33-64)
SCENE LIST screen: AFC IMAGE tab
The AFC IMAGE tab of the SCENE LIST screen contains the following items.
AFC IMAGE parameters can be viewed and edited for the corresponding multiple channels.
1
2
1
3
4
1 AFC IMAGE button
1 Channel select buttons
Sets the scene number to be linked to the AFC IMAGE when the scene is recalled. You
can turn this function ON or OFF with PREFERENCE SCENE RECALL on the AFC IMAGE
tab of the NETWORK screen.
For selecting the desired channel for operating. The current channel icon, channel
number, channel name, and color appear on the button.
2 Immersive sound graph
Displays AFC IMAGE parameters.
3 Parameter knobs
Displays the position (X, Y, Z), size and send level of AFC IMAGE. Use the TOUCH AND
TURN knob to operate the parameters.
4 Tabs
For selecting the channels that you want to view on the screen.
208
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Setup
4 PASSWORD CHANGE button
About the SETUP screen
5 SAVE KEY button
Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE window, in which you can change
the password.
Press this button to open the SAVE KEY window, in which you can overwrite (save) the
user authentication key (page 216).
The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire QL console.
To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The
screen contains the following items.
1
3
2 54
6
 STORAGE field
This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key.
7
6 CREATE USER KEY button
Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY window, in which you can create a new
user authentication key.
7 SAVE/LOAD button
Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD window, in which you can save or load user
authentication keys and console files.
8
A
E
9
D
B
F
H
G
0
C
 SYSTEM SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the QL series console.
8 +48V ACTIVE button
Switches the console’s +48V ACTIVE phantom power on or off. When this button is off,
+48V phantom power for all the head amps turns off.
NOTE
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of each channel
is on.
9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT button
Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window, in which you can make
word clock settings and various settings for each slot.
I
J
0 CASCADE button
K
Press this button to open the CASCADE window, in which you can make patch settings
for cascade connections.
 CURRENT USER field
A OUTPUT PORT button
This field enables you to make various user-related settings.
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT window, in which you can make output
port settings.
1 USER SETUP button
Press this button to open the USER SETUP window, in which you can make various
settings for each user.
B MIDI/GPI button
Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI window, in which you can make MIDI and GPIrelated settings.
2 CURRENT USER button
Press this button to open the LOG IN window, in which you can switch log-in users.
C DANTE SETUP button
3 COMMENT EDIT button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window. This window enables you to make
various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality
setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; and selections for devices controlled via the I/O
DEVICE screen).
Press this button to open the COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter
comments that will be displayed in the comment area.
209
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 BUS SETUP field
This field enables you to make bus-related settings.
D BUS SETUP button
Press this button to open the BUS SETUP window, in which you can make MIX bus/
MATRIX bus-related settings.
E SURROUND SETUP button
Press this button to call up the SURROUND SETUP screen. In this screen, you can switch
the bus settings from Stereo mode to Surround mode. If set to Stereo mode, the bus
settings for MIX1-6 will be grayed out. If you press the 5.1 SURROUND button to switch
to Surround mode, you can then set the bus settings for MIX1-6.
For Surround mode
Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output. You can press the APPLY button to
open the CONFIRMATION dialog box. Press the OK button to set the bus to Surround
mode.
NOTE
• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
change to MONO x2.
• When you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
remain as MONO x2.
• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the STEREO and MONO(C) inserts are
turned off.
For Stereo mode
210
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 CONSOLE LOCK button
If you set Surround mode, the BUS SETUP screen appears as shown below.
This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set,
pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION window. Enter the correct password to
execute Console Lock.
If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute Console Lock
immediately.
 CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field
This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast.
I BANK A/BANK B buttons
Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can
save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.
J CONTRAST NAME knob
Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display.
K BRIGHTNESS NAME knob
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob
Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob
Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs.
BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob
Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.
 DATE/TIME button
Press this button to open the DATE/TIME window, in which you can set the date and time.
 NETWORK button
Press this button to open the NETWORK window, in which you can set the network address.
 Indicator field
This field displays various information about the console.
F BATTERY indicator
Indicates the status of the internal battery.
NOTE
The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact
your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual
(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.
G POWER SUPPLY indicator
Indicates the currently-running power supply.
• INT .........................Internal
H Version indicator
Indicates the version number of the CPU and DANTE module.
211
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
User settings
Privileges for each user are as follows.
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or
to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user.
Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or
together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in
the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be
limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc.
can be locked to prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
Logged-in user
Editing user
User authentication
setup data,
key
such as USER Editing User Level Password Editing
DEFINED keys
settings
setting comments Create Overwrite
and
new
-save
Preferences
Administrator
Available
(Cannot edit the
Available
user level, since the
(Can edit the
administrator can
settings for
always perform all
Administrator
operations. Can edit
and for Guest.)
the settings for
Guest.)
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the QL series console, you must log-in
as a user.
• Administrator.......... The administrator of the QL console can use all of its
functionality. Only one set of Administrator settings is internally
maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user
authentication keys for other users. Even if the console was
locked by another user, the administrator can use the
administrator password to unlock it.
• Guest ............A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the
console.
• User ..............A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive
as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in
internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name.
A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user
authentication keys with a specified user level.
User
Guest
Available
—
Available
—
Power user
Available
Available
Available
Available
Normal
user
(User without
Power User
privileges)
Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
Available
Available
—
Available
(Excluding
User Level
settings)
Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
—
Available
—
—
Available Available
When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the
following information.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User Level settings (except for Administrator)
• Preferences
• USER DEFINED keys
• USER DEFINED knobs
• CUSTOM FADER BANK
• MAIN fader
212
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Setting the Administrator password
STEP
1. To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive
to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the CREATE USER KEY button.
4. In the CREATE USER KEY window, when you have specified the user name, comment,
password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.
5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory,
press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field in the CREATE KEY
window. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive,
press the button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.
6. Press the CREATE TO button.
7. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log
in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the
operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
3. In the keyboard window, enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then
enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and
finally press the OK button.
SETUP screen
Keyboard window
NOTE
SETUP screen
• The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the
Administrator password will be set.
• For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
CREATE USER KEY window
Creating a user authentication key
You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s
internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power
User. The user level is specified when the authentication key is created, but USER SETUP
settings other than the user level (such as preferences and the USER DEFINED keys) will be
carried over from the user who is currently logged-in.
NOTE
• You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory.
• The file name of the user authentication key will be the current user name, and it will be created
and saved in the root directory.
CREATE KEY window
213
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
CREATE USER KEY window
2
Logging-in
3
4
To operate the QL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log
in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the
USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user
authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you
remove the USB flash drive after logging-in.
1
NOTE
If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state
in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter
the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.
 Logging-in as Administrator
5
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3. In the LOGIN window, press the ADMINISTRATOR button.
4. Enter the password and press the OK button.
1 USER NAME
Displays the user name. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can
enter a user name of up to eight characters.
2 COMMENT
Displays a comment about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in
which you can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
3 PASSWORD
Enables you to specify a password. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which
you can enter a password of up to eight characters.
SETUP screen
LOGIN window
NOTE
4 POWER USER
• If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press
the LOGIN button. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to
enter the password.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of
the screen.
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user.
5 ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on
each item, refer to page 217.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
214
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 Logging-in as Guest
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3. In the LOGIN window, press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.
SETUP screen
LOGIN window
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN
button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of
the screen.
SETUP screen
With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive
LOGIN window
STEP
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
4. In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, press the (LOAD .CLU
FILE) button.
5. In the SAVE/LOAD window, choose the user authentication key with which you want
to log in.
6. Press the LOAD button.
7. Enter the password and press the OK button.
 Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB
flash drive. If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key
created on a different QL series console.
With a user authentication key stored in the console
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3. In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, choose the user
authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOGIN button.
4. Enter the password and press the OK button.
LOGIN window
215
SAVE/LOAD window
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Editing a user authentication key
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 6 when you press the LOAD
button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of
the screen.
• If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different QL series console,
a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the QL series
console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not
appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will
appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. If you re-save the user
authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. Refer to
“Editing a user authentication key” on page 216.
• For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from a USB flash
drive” on page 235.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your preference settings, USER DEFINED keys,
USER DEFINED knobs, custom fader banks, main fader, comments, and password, and save
(overwrite) them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you
can also change the user level.
STEP
1. Log in as a user, and edit the Preference settings (page 219), USER DEFINED keys
(page 221), USER DEFINED knobs (page 227), and CUSTOM FADER BANK
(page 229) settings.
2. Close the USER SETUP window.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE KEY button.
4. In the SAVE KEY window, choose the save-destination button, and then press the
SAVE TO button.
5. A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user
authentication key; press the OK button.
Changing the password
Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. The Guest account
does not have a password.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
3. In the keyboard window, enter the current password and press the OK button.
4. Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same
password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK
button.
5. Refer to “Editing a user authentication key” on page 216 to overwrite the user
authentication key.
NOTE
SETUP screen
After you change the password, if you log out from the console without saving the user
authentication key, the changed password will be discarded.
SAVE KEY window
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
• If you loaded a user authentication key from a USB flash drive, press the SAVE KEY button before
removing the USB flash drive. If you do remove the USB flash drive before pressing this button,
load the user authentication key again.
216
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Changing the user level
USER SETUP window (USER LEVEL page)
8
You can view or change the user level.
• Administrator................The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can
change the user level setting of the Guest account.
• Guest .............................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest
account, but cannot change it.
• Normal user ..................A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her
User account, but cannot change it.
• Power User....................A power user can view and change his or her User account.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER LEVEL tab. (If you are logged-in as the
Administrator, press the FOR GUEST button to switch to the USER LEVEL for Guest
page.)
4. Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.
5. When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP
button in the Function Access Area.
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
1 CH OPERATION
SETUP screen
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input
channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currentlyselected channel.
Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION
section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access
Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings. The type of buttons
shown will depend on the selected channel or group.
• INPUT channel................... [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• MIX/MATRIX channel......... [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• STEREO/MONO channel
...................................... [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• DCA group ......................... [DCA MAIN], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]
• HA....................................... Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that
channel.
• PROCESSING .................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters
for that channel (excluding the fader, channel on/off, and
send level).
• FADER/ON.......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, channel on/
off, and send level.
USER SETUP window
217
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
5 FILE LOAD
• WITH SEND ........................ Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters.
(From MIX, From MATRIX)
• DCA MAIN .......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader,
ON/OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN........ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.
• SET BY SEL ....................... If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of
a channel to enable or disable the above-mentioned
operating restrictions for that channel.
Specifies the settings that will be applied when a file is loaded from a USB flash drive.
The user authentication key contains settings such as the user level, preferences, and the
USER DEFINED key settings (USER SETUP settings). Other data is saved in an “ALL” file.
The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest.
• USER SETUP (Preference and USER DEFINED keys settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
• SCENE LIST
• LIBRARY LIST
2 CURRENT SCENE
Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory.
• INPUT PATCH/INPUT NAME
..................... Restricts operations for input channel patching and
names.
• OUTPUT PATCH/OUTPUT NAME
..................... Restricts operations for output channel patching and
names.
• BUS SETUP........................ Restricts operations for bus setup.
• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK
..................... Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open
the RACK USER LEVEL window, in which you can set
this restriction.
However, there will be no restriction on operating the
MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and
modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button
displayed for the FREEZE effect.
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP CONTROL
..................... Restricts operations for mute group assignment and
mute group control.
6 MONITOR SETUP
Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
• SOLO
7 SYSTEM SETUP
Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.
• MIXER SETUP
• OUTPUT PORT
• MIDI/GPI
• DANTE SETUP
NOTE
• The content that is restricted with the DANTE SETUP button is as shown below.
• Changing the CONSOLE ID
• Changing the SECONDARY PORT setting
• Changing control of DANTE PATCH changes (THIS CONSOLE or DANTE
CONTROLLER)
• Changing BIT DEPTH
• Changing LATENCY
• Changing DEVICE MOUNT
• Changing REMOTE HA ASSIGN
• Changing the Dante Input Patch
• Changing the Dante Output Patch
• Changing the Dante Input Patch Library (Changing Store, Recall, Clear, Library Name)
• Changing the PREFERRED LEADER
• If an operation is restricted, the message “This operation is not allowed.” is displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
• With the factory settings, this is turned off (no restrictions).
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3 SCENE LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories.
• STORE/SORT operations
• RECALL operations
4 LIBRARY LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries.
• STORE/CLEAR operations
• RECALL operations
8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
Permits/clears all items.
218
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
1 STORE/RECALL field
Preferences
Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations.
Follow the steps below to make various settings for the QL console operating environment,
such as how windows appear, and whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. These
settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the
Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings.
• STORE CONFIRMATION
• RECALL CONFIRMATION
If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a
Store or Recall operation respectively.
2 PATCH field
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the PREFERENCE tab.
4. Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings.
5. When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP
button in the Function Access Area.
Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations.
• PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch
or output patch.
• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or
output patch item that is already patched to a port.
NOTE
3 LOCALE SETUP field
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account.
In the SAVE/LOAD screen or RECORDER screen, select a language to be displayed.
JA: Japanese, EN: English, DE: German, FR: French, ES: Spanish
(This does not affect the Help language.)
USER SETUP window (PREFERENCE page)
4 ERROR MESSAGE field
Specifies whether error messages will be displayed.
• DIGITAL I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a digital audio I/O error occurs.
1
• MIDI I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI transmit/receive error occurs.
2
• DANTE ALERT
If this is on, an alert message will appear at the bottom of the LCD when the Dante
network is not connecting at gigabit speeds.
If this alert message is displayed, check the following items:
• Switch settings
• Is the console connected to a switch that does not function at a speed of 1000Mbps?
• Are you using a cable that does not support 1000BASE-T?
5
3
4
5 PANEL OPERATION field
Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation.
• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT
Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the
[ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input
channels) and OUTPUT (output channels).
• [CUE]  [SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK
button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected.
219
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
• [FADER BANK]  [SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set
this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and
CUSTOM (Custom fader bank).
If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in
that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.
• NAME DISPLAY
Specifies the content of the name display in the Channel Strip section.
When the NAME ONLY button is lit, the channel name and the channel number appear.
When the GR METER button is lit, GR METER information and fader level are also
displayed.
NOTE
• [SEND SEL]  [CUE] LINK
In SENDS ON FADER mode, set whether SEND destination switching and CUE switching
are synchronized. When this is set to off, you can continue to cue a specific channel even
if the SEND destination is switched.
• You can now view the gain reduction meter for DYNAMICS 1 and 2, as well as other information,
on the channel name display.
• If a channel is off during SENDS ON FADER mode, the channel name display will be highlighted.
• The GR METER simply lets you confirm the changes in gain reduction.
• ON KEYS BEHAVIOR DURING MUTE
Sets the operation when pressing the [ON] key during MUTE.
In OVERRIDE mode, when pressing the [ON] key during MUTE, the MUTE is temporarily
canceled and the sound comes out. In CH OFF mode, pressing the [ON] key switches
the channel on/off during MUTE.
• IDENTIFY I/O DEVICE PORT BY [SEL]
Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port
connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel.
If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator
to flash for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by
the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings.
GR METER display
Highlighted display
- The channel is off in SENDS ON FADER
mode.
- The channel is assigned to a DCA group, and
that DCA [ON] key is off.
- The channel is assigned to a mute group, and
that mute group control is on.
• POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED
Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel while
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a window (1ch) to appear.
If the ON button is lit, a window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.
NOTE
If you press the PAN knob, a window (8ch) will open.
• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION
Specifies what will happen when you operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. When
ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the head amp. When
DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console.
• SCENE UP/DOWN
Specifies what the USER DEFINED key assigned to INC or DEC will do when pressed in
the SCENE windows.
When the SCENE +1/–1 button is lit, pressing the USER DEFINED key assigned to INC
RECALL or DEC RECALL will increment or decrement the scene number.
When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the USER DEFINED key assigned to INC
RECALL or DEC RECALL will scroll the list upward or downward.
• LIST ORDER
Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list.
When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When
the REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order.
220
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
USER DEFINED keys
• The twelve buttons in the USER DEFINED KEYS page correspond to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[12] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each key appears to
the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the key, an indication of “---” will
appear next to the button.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window is the same for all models of the QL
series.
For the QL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not
exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the
key is operated.
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the
USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and to press these keys to execute the
defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED key settings for the user. If you
are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED key settings for
the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
assigned to USER DEFINED keys” on page 222.
Using the Alternate function
If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you
will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key
to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light).
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign a function.
5. In the FUNCTION field of the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, select the function
you want to assign.
6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[12]
key on the panel.
The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH.
• UNLATCH ..............Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and
holding down the USER DEFINED key.
• LATCH ...................Each press of the USER DEFINED key will turn Alternate mode
on or off. You do not need to hold down the key.
NOTE
• If you select LATCH for the Alternate function, the console disables the Alternate function when
you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen, or when you open a window.
• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.
In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.
• [GAIN] knob
Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for
HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP window, rotate this
knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.
• [HPF] knob
Press this knob to switch the high-pass filter on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 1] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.
USER SETUP window
(USER DEFINED KEYS page)
• [DYNAMICS 2] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
• [CUE] key
Each time this key is pressed, the channel’s CUE SETTING switches as follows: A B
A+B.
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest
account.
NOTE
In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs
mentioned above will be disabled.
221
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
Switching banks for USER DEFINED key settings
You can register the USER DEFINED key settings (12 keys for QL series consoles) to a
maximum of four banks.
FUNCTION
NO ASSIGN
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
—
No assignment.
LATCH
—
Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is
pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
UNLATCH
—
Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while
pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
group a OVERRIDE ON
—
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group a where
the override button is on, until the level drops to
0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the
button turned off.
group a PRESET ON
—
Switch the channels in group a to the mode
indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute)
next to the lit preset indicator.
group b OVERRIDE ON
—
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group b
where the override button is on, until the level
drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels
with the button turned off.
group b PRESET ON
—
Switch the channels in group b to the mode
indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute)
next to the lit preset indicator.
group c OVERRIDE ON
—
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group c where
the override button is on, until the level drops to
0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the
button turned off.
group c PRESET ON
—
Switch the channels in group c to the mode
indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute)
next to the lit preset indicator.
BRIGHTNESS
BANK CHANGE
—
Toggle between the brightness settings stored in
A and B.
CH ON
SPECIFIC CH
*4)
Switch the CH ON/OFF.
—
Increment or decrement the selected channel
number.
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
AUTOMIXER
Use the four BANK SELECT buttons on the left to select a bank.
The selected bank name is displayed in the field in the bottom right side of the Function
Access Area.
INC
CH SELECT
You can press the CLEAR ALL button on the top right side to clear the content of the selected
bank.
DEC
SPECIFIC CH
*1)
Select a channel from list 1).
OUTPUT
—
Switch CUE on/off.
A
This clears the CUE for CUE A.
B
This clears the CUE for CUE B.
CLEAR CUE
A+B
This clears the CUE for CUE A and CUE B.
*2)
CUE the channel selected from list 2).
A
Switches the CUE MODE for CUE A. In Surround
mode, it toggles between MIX, LAST, and 5.1
SOLO with each press. When set to MIX, the
lamp is off. When set to LAST, the lamp is on.
When set to 5.1 SOLO, the lamp flashes.
B
Switches the CUE MODE for CUE B.
CUE INTERRUPTION
—
Switches the CUE INTERRUPTION function on or
off
FADER CUE RELEASE
—
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or
off.
SPECIFIC CH
CUE
CUE MODE
222
Explanation
—
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
FUNCTION
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
A
INPUT CUE POINT
B
Explanation
FUNCTION
PARAMETER 1
DCA CUE POINT
B
A
CUE
OUTPUT CUE POINT
B
Explanation
INPUT EQ LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
LIBRARY
A
PARAMETER 2
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
Selects the cue point for the input channel for
CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL
(immediately before fader), AFL (immediately
after fader), and POST PAN (immediately after
PAN) with each press.
Selects the cue point for DCA for CUE A or CUE
B. It toggles between PRE PAN (immediately
before PAN) and POST PAN (immediately after
PAN) with each press.
EFFECT LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT CH LIBRARY
OUTPUT CH LIBRARY
PEQ LIBRARY
Portico5033 LIBRARY
Selects the cue point for the output channel for
CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL (before
fader) and AFL (immediately after fader) with
each press.
Portico5043 LIBRARY
Portico5045 LIBRARY
U76 LIBRARY
A
CUE SETTING
B
PREMIUM RACK
LIBRARY
For CUE A or CUE B, press the [CUE] key while
holding this key to switch the CUE SETTING for
the selected channel to A or B, and to turn on
the CUE.
Opt-2A LIBRARY
EQ-1A LIBRARY
DynamicEQ LIBRARY
Buss Comp 369 LIBRARY
DANTE
INPUT
PATCH LIB
DIRECT RECALL
MAIN
SENDS ON FADER
A+B
Press the [CUE] key while holding this key to
switch the CUE SETTING for the selected
channel to A and B, and to turn on the CUE.
LIBRARY #000-#010
Directly recalls the desired number of the
DANTE INPUT PATCH library. However, it does
not function during a scene recall.
MBC4 LIBRARY
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
EDITOR
CONTROL
—
PATCH EDITOR
—
RACK
GEQ 1–8
CH33-48 {QL5}
EFFECT 1–8
CH49-64 {QL5}
ST IN
RACK EDITOR
MIX1-16
DCA
Access the corresponding screen of QL Editor.
PREMIUM 8B
METER
B1 17-32
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
DCA GROUP
B2 1-16
B2 17-32
GROUP/LINK
B3 1-16
MUTE GROUP
CHANNEL LINK
OUTPUT CHANNEL LINK
B3 17-32
SCENE MEMORY
B4 1-16
B4 17-32
SELECTED CHANNEL
PREMIUM 1B
PREMIUM 8A
B1 1-16
CUSTOM FADER BANK
PREMIUM 1A
:
MATRIX
STEREO/MONO
Access the corresponding screen of QL Editor.
PATCH LIST
CH17-32 {QL5/QL1}
EDITOR
CONTROL
OUTPUT INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT PATCH
CH 1-16 {QL5/QL1}
OVERVIEW
INPUT INSERT PATCH
SCENE
—
RECALL SAFE
FADE TIME
FOCUS RECALL
223
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
FUNCTION
EFFECT
BYPASS
FADER BANK
SNAPSHOT
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
EFFECT RACK 1–8
—
PREMIUM RACK 1A
—
PREMIUM RACK 1B
—
:
—
PREMIUM RACK 8B
—
LATCH
GEQ FREQ
BANK
GPI OUT
HELP
INC
DEC
LATCH
UNLATCH
Takes a snapshot of the bank settings (hold
down the key for two seconds or longer), or
displays the last bank for which a snapshot was
taken (press and release the key within two
seconds).
—
—
Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is
selected. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
—
Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while held
down.
* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is
switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE
screen etc., this will remain lit until the next time
it is pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is
switched.
PORT1–PORT5
SELECTED CH VIEW
—
Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
OVERVIEW
—
Displays the OVERVIEW screen.
TOGGLE
—
Each press of the key will alternately display the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the
OVERVIEW screen.
HOME
—
Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit
when on.
SURROUND METER
—
For Surround mode, toggle between the
content to be shown in meters displayed in the
Function Access Area. The lamp is off for MIX 16, and on for SURROUND MONITOR.
PROGRAM CHANGE
PGM 1–128
CONTROL CHANGE
CC 1–31, 33–95,
102–119
METER
NOTE ON C-2 (0)
NOTE ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
—
While holding down this key, press the SEL key
of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the
assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]
LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding
down this key will be stored. Pressing the key
again will recall the stored setting. Settings can
be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid
assignment switching. It goes OFF when the
bank is switched.
DIMMER ON
—
Enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor
signal.
MONO (C)
SOURCE SELECT
MONITOR
LCR
PB OUT
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
*5)
DEFINE
SURROUND SOURCE
SELECT
*6)
Recall the selected signal to the surround
monitor.
SURROUND
DOWNMIX
STEREO, MONO
When this function is off (the lamp is off),
the setting returns to 5.1 monitor.
SOLO
When this function is on (the lamp is on),
the SURROUND MONITOR screen opens.
When this function is off (the lamp is off),
the SURROUND MONITOR screen closes.
L, R, C, Ls, Rs, LFE
This functionality is the same as the
SPEAKER MUTE function in the
SURROUND MONITOR screen. When the
SOLO button is on, it functions as a SOLO
key.
—
Switch MUTE GROUP CONTROL on/off.
—
Turns all MUTE GROUP CONTROL settings on/
off together.
Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.
—
Explanation
Switch the monitor output on/off.
Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.
—
MIDI
PARAMETER 2
—
STEREO L/R
Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ
EDIT screen.
—
Opens and closes the HELP window. Operating
the controllers on the panel (excluding faders),
or controllers on the screen, while holding down
this key will display the related information.
PEAK HOLD ON
PARAMETER 1
OUTPUT
GAIN KNOB
FUNCTION
UNLATCH
FUNCTION
—
PREMIUM RACK 8A
—
Explanation
SURROUND SPEAKER
MUTE GROUP 1
MUTE
GROUP
CONTROL
:
MUTE GROUP 8
ALL MUTE
Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.
For NOTE ON, it goes OFF when the bank is
switched.
:
NOTE ON G 8 (127)
224
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
FUNCTION
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
Explanation
FUNCTION
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
GO TO PROJECT START
NO ASSIGN
GO TO PREV MARKER
(TITLE 1)
REWIND
RECORDER
FAST FORWARD
DIRECT PLAY
:
GO TO NEXT MARKER
TRANSPORT
NUENDO
LIVE
OSCILLATOR
GO TO PROJECT END
CYCLE
INC RECALL
—
STOP
DEC RECALL
—
Recall the scene of the previous existing number.
START
DIRECT RECALL
SCENE #000–#300
Directly recall the scene of the specified number.
REC
RECALL UNDO
—
Execute RECALL UNDO.
EASY RECORDING
STORE UNDO
—
Execute STORE UNDO.
INC
—
Select the scene of the next existing number.
DEC
—
Select the scene of the previous existing
number.
SCENE
PEAK CLEAR
—
Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live
screen.
ADD MARKER
—
This function executes ADD MARKER of
NUENDO Live.
OSCILLATOR ON
—
Switch the OSC on/off.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
—
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a
channel to switch the assignment on/off. During
this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON,
or dark if OFF. It goes OFF when the bank is
switched.
DIRECT ASSIGN
*1)
Assign the oscillator to the channel selected
from list 1).
—
Memorize the currently-selected screen (hold
down the key for two seconds or longer), or
display the last-memorized screen (press and
release the key within two seconds). Popup
windows can also be memorized. In the case of
a rack, the number of that rack is also
memorized.
BOOKMARK
PAGE
CHANGE
BOOKMARK with “SEL” —
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
CLOSE POPUP
RECORDER
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.
TRANSPORT
Explanation
The specified audio file will be played once from
the beginning.
Audio files to be played should be saved in the
SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note
that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the
root directory or in any other folder. When you
execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST
screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\.
SEND MODE
RECALL
—
Recall the currently-selected scene.
STORE
—
Store the current settings.
MIX/MATRIX
—
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch output bus
channels (MIX, MATRIX) to be displayed in the
SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen.
NORMAL/WITH CUE
This function switches between the normal
function on/off (NORMAL), and the function
with cue on/off (WITH CUE). With the WITH CUE
option, cue will be enabled if SENDS ON FADER
mode is engaged or if you switch mode during
SENDS ON FADER mode. Also, with the WITH
CUE option, cue for all output channels will be
canceled if SENDS ON FADER mode is
disengaged.
—
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it
on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or
dark if off.
If [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON FADER”
mode is engaged while you are holding down
the [SEL] key.
Press SEL to switch between auto/man if
[AUTOMIXER AUTO/MAN] is selected. It goes
OFF when the bank is switched.
—
While holding down this key, press SELECTED
CH or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to reset it
to the default value. It goes OFF when the bank
is switched.
MIX1–MIX16
MTRX1–MTRX8
SENDS ON
FADER
MIX ON FADER
MATRIX ON FADER
SENDS ON FADER
+48V
Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the
addition of the SEL status.
Ø
INSERT ON
—
Display the previous/next page.
—
Close the displayed window.
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,
FF/NEXT,
REW/PREVIOUS, REC
Recorder transport functions.
AUTO REC
Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If
this is executed during recording, the file being
recorded will first be closed, and then recording
will continue with a new file.
REC & START
Start recording immediately without entering
record-ready mode.
Recall the scene of the next existing number.
DIRECT OUT ON
PRE SEND
SET BY SEL
TO STEREO
TO MONO
TO LCR
GAIN COMPENSATION
AUTOMIXER AUTO/
MAN
SET DEFAULT
VALUE
225
—
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
FUNCTION
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
Explanation
SET
NOMINAL
VALUE
—
—
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to
set the fader of that channel to nominal level.
You can also push a knob in the SEND field of
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to set the
send level to nominal level.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
SOLO
SOLO ON
—
Switches solo mode on/off.
*5)
In Surround mode, this is used to set hard
panning for the channel selected in list 5).
FUNCTION
TALKBACK
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
DIRECT ASSIGN WITH
ON
*3)
CURRENT PAGE
—
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed
screen.
L ON
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
PANNING L
WITH POPUP
TAP TEMPO
EFFECT RACK 1-8
PANNING R
WITHOUT POPUP
PANNING Front Center
SURROUND
PAN
PANNING Ls
PANNING Rs
*5)
In Surround mode, this is used to set hard
panning for the channel selected in list 5).
PANNING Back
USER
DEFINED
KEYS
PANNING Center
PANNING TOGGLE
TALKBACK ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
*5)
LATCH
Switch TALKBACK on/off.
UNLATCH
Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
—
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of
an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment
on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit
if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding
down this key will be stored. Pressing the key
again will recall the stored setting. Settings can
be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid
assignment switching.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
*3)
The operations performed when this key is
pressed are as follows.
- Toggle assignment of channel selected in list 3)
ON and OFF.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned, the LED will be on.
Otherwise, the LED will be off.
TALKBACK
DIRECT ASSIGN
In Surround mode, this is used to toggle the
settings for hard panning for the channel
selected in list 5).
With each press, the setting is toggled in the
following order: Center  L  Front Center  R
 Side R  Rs  Back, Ls  Side L  (Center).
Use the tap tempo function for the specified
effect. If WITH POPUP is selected, the Tap
Tempo screen is displayed. If WITHOUT POPUP
is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is not
displayed.
BANK A
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding
key comes on.
BANK B
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding
key comes on.
BANK C
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding
key comes on.
BANK D
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding
key comes on.
PREVIOUS BANK
Switches to the previous bank. If the current
bank is BANK A, it switches to BANK D.
NEXT BANK
Switches to the next bank. If the current bank is
BANK D, it switches to BANK A.
PANNING Side L
PANNING Side R
Explanation
The operations performed when this key is
pressed are as follows.
- Assignments other than for the channel
selected in list 3) are removed.
- If a channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at
the same time, TALKBACK is turned OFF and
the channel assignment is removed.
- Otherwise, TALKBACK will be ON and the
channel assignment will be ON.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON
at the same time, the LED will be on.
- Otherwise, the LED will be off.
BANK SELECT
*1)
*2)
*3)
*4)
QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C)
MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C),
DCA1-DCA16
*5) QL5: INPUT25/26-31/32, QL1: INPUT9/10-15/16
SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*6) MIX1-6, EXT5.1 1, EXT5.1 2, EXT5.1 3, EXT ST 1, EXT ST 2, EXT ST 3, EXT ST 4, MIX1/2, MIX3/4, MIX5/6,
MIX7/8, MIX9/10, MIX11/12, MIX13/14, MIX15/16, MATRIX1/2, MATRIX3/4, MATRIX5/6, MATRIX7/8, STEREO,
MONO, PB OUT
226
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
USER DEFINED knobs
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
the SOFTWARE USER DEFINED KNOBS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED knob
settings for the Guest account.
• The four buttons in the SOFTWARE USER DEFINED KNOBS page correspond to USER
DEFINED knobs [1]–[4] in the lower part of the touch screen. The name of the function or
parameter assigned to each knob appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is
assigned to the knob, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window is the same for all models of the QL
series.
For the QL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist
on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the key
is operated.
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the
lower part of the touch screen, and to press these knobs to execute the defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED knob settings for the user. If
you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED knob settings
for the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
assigned to USER DEFINED knobs” on page 228.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to
assign a function.
5. In the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window, make sure that the FUNCTION field is
enclosed by a frame, then select the function that you want to assign.
6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.
8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[4]
knob in the lower part of the touch screen, then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN]
knob.
USER SETUP window
(USER DEFINED KNOBS page)
About TOUCH AND TURN
You can press a desired knob in the touch screen and then use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to immediately operate that on-screen
knob.
At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch
screen, indicating that you can operate that knob.
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window
227
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Functions that can be assigned to
USER DEFINED knobs
Function
PARAMETER 1
—
—
AUTOMIXER
WEIGHT
*1)
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
EQ
*2)
—
—
HIGH Q
SCREEN
—
HIGH FREQUENCY
CH COLOR
—
NAME
—
EXTERNAL HA
GAIN 1–GAIN 8
*10)
A
HPF
FREQUENCY
*4)
B
I/O DEVICE
GAIN 1–GAIN 32
*11)
A
INPUT DELAY
DELAY TIME
*3)
B
INPUT GAIN
DCA TRIM
HIGH GAIN
A
B
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE
ANALOG GAIN
DIGITAL GAIN
*4)
CTRL 1–CTRL 31
—
CTRL 33–CTRL 95
—
CUE LEVEL
—
LEVEL
*14)
CTRL 102–CTRL 119
—
THRESHOLD
*2)
DIMMER LEVEL
—
RANGE
*4)
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
MONITOR
*2)
*4)
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
*2)
OSCILLATOR
KNEE
WIDTH
*13)
THRESHOLD
RATIO
OUTPUT LEVEL
FREQUENCY
DYNAMICS 2
HIGH MID FREQUENCY
PANEL
RATIO
DYNAMICS 1
LOW MID FREQUENCY
LAMP
OUTPUT PFL TRIM
DIRECT OUT LEVEL
PARAMETER 2
HIGH MID GAIN
INPUT PFL TRIM
CUE
PARAMETER 1
LOW MID Q
PARAMETER 2
NO ASSIGN
BRIGHTNESS
Function
ATTACK
RELEASE
OUTPUT PORT
*4)
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
—
MONITOR DELAY
—
MONITOR FADER
—
LEVEL
—
FREQUENCY
—
LEVEL(EVEN)
—
FREQUENCY(EVEN)
—
HPF
—
LPF
—
WIDTH
—
INTERVAL
—
LEVEL
*6)
DELAY TIME
GAIN
*12)
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
EFFECT
Displays the EFFECT RACK No. (1-8) for
the target operation as well as the
name of the mounted EFFECT TYPE or
the name of the GEQ/PEQ TYPE *a).
Displays the names of the 32
parameters for the EFFECT TYPE *b).
Displays “----” if a GEQ/PEQ is
mounted.
ATT
EQ
LOW Q
LOW FREQUENCY
*2)
LOW GAIN
228
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Function
PREMIUM RACK
RECORDER
PARAMETER 1
Displays the PREMIUM RACK No. (1A8B) for the corresponding operation, as
well as the name of the mounted
PROCESSOR*a).
INPUT GAIN
—
OUTPUT GAIN
—
SELECT
—
TO MIX LEVEL
MIX1–MIX16
*3)
TO MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX1–MATRIX8
*7)
TO MIX PAN
MIX1/2–MIX15/16
*3)
TO MATRIX PAN
MATRIX1/2–MATRIX7/8
*7)
PAN/BAL
CSR
Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.”
There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader
banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types.
This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank.
Displays the names of the 64
parameters for the PROCESSOR *b).
SCENE
TO ST/MONO
Custom fader bank
PARAMETER 2
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.
4. Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels
you want to add to the custom fader bank.
5. In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER page, press the bank select button for
the custom fader bank you want to set up.
6. In the CHANNEL ASSIGN field, press the select button for the fader you want to set
up.
7. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected
in step 6.
8. To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 5 through 7.
*5)
*1) SELECTED CH, Automixer ch1-16
*2) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,
MONO (C)
*3) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*4) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8
*5) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-SIX16
*6) MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*7) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX16, ST L, ST R, MONO (C)
*10) #1-#4
*11) REMOTE HA #1-#8
*12) QL5: DANTE1-64, QL1: DANTE1-32, QL5: OMNI 1-OMNI 16, QL1: OMNI 1-OMNI 8, SLOT1 1-SLOT1 16,
SLOT2 1-SLOT2 16, DIGITAL OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R
*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*14) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32
*a) If not mounted in the RACK, “----” is displayed.
*b) If there are no parameters, “----” is displayed.
USER SETUP window (CUSTOM
FADER BANK/MAIN FADER page)
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank settings
for the Guest account.
• You can also press the channel select buttons to assign channels to faders.
229
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
USER SETUP window
(CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER page)
Custom fader bank settings for individual scenes
Custom fader bank settings can be stored/recalled for individual scenes. For details, refer to
“Using the Focus Recall function” on page 95.
Custom fader bank settings
1
QL1
QL5
2
Recall
Store
QL5 console
5
Recall
Store
QL1 console
3
NOTE
4
• Custom fader bank settings differ between models, and are not compatible. For example, scenes
stored by the QL5 cannot be recalled on the QL1.
• In addition, the user level affects storing/recalling of custom fader bank settings. For example, if
you are logged-in as a user or Guest, you cannot recall settings stored by the Administrator.
Precautions for when Loading Console Data
Custom fader bank settings are not only included in user settings, but in scene data as well.
The custom fader bank settings that are called up vary depending on the logged-in user, the
type of the loaded data, and the version. Please note the following points:
• If you load console data of the ALL type as Administrator, the custom fader bank settings
for the saved Administrator are called up.
If you load ALL data as Guest or another user, the custom fader bank settings for the saved
current scene are called up.
• If you load ALL data that was saved in CL V1.70 or earlier, since scenes do not include
custom fader bank settings, the custom fader bank settings for the current scene when the
load was performed are applied to all scenes. Therefore, before loading ALL data, we
recommend that you either change users to set the custom fader bank to the desired
setting, or that you enable Recall Safe for the custom fader bank.
1 Bank select buttons
Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of
channels.
2 Block indicators
Display the graphics of the top panel block and faders that are the current target for
editing.
The graphics vary depending on the console model.
QL5: A (MAIN only), B (16 faders x 2 channels, MAIN)
QL1: A (MAIN only), B (16 faders, MAIN)
For CUSTOM FADER BANK A1-4, only MAIN can be selected.
3 Fader select button
Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press [SEL] keys on the top
panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank.
4 Fader assign select button
Opens the Fader assign select window, in which you can change the channel assigned
to the fader.
5 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a
confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to
return to the previous screen without changing the setting.
230
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Console Lock
Locking the console
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This
setting disables operations of the panel, so that controllers cannot be operated by an
accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console
Lock function. When the Console Lock function is enabled, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will
appear and all controllers will become inoperable.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the CONSOLE LOCK button.
3. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the
user.
4. Press the OK button to enable Console Lock function.
SETUP screen
NOTE
Unlocking the console
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the unit to factory default settings” on
page 270.
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, you can operate the console from an external device via MIDI
or QL Editor as usual.
STEP
1. Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
2. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the
user or for the Administrator, then press the OK button.
NOTE
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked when
you touch the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
231
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image
If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the
CONSOLE LOCK screen.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it
from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to
“Loading a file from a USB flash drive” on page 235.
NOTE
Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be
converted into 16-bit for display.
SETUP screen
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB
flash drive
SAVE/LOAD window
You can connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to
the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the QL
series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive.
The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.
5
123 4
6
NOTICE
An ACCESS indicator is shown in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved,
loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB port or power-off the QL unit.
Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives.
• The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this
does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32
formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in
FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
7
 Basic operation
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
3. Save/load/edit the data.
8 9 0
C
A
B
1 COPY button
Copies a file into a memory buffer (a temporary holding area).
2 PASTE button
Pastes the file that has been copied into a buffer memory.
3 DELETE button
Deletes the selected file or directory.
NOTE
A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear.
232
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
4 MAKE DIR button
9 SAVE button
Creates a new directory.
Saves all of the QL console internal settings together (page 233).
5 PATH
0 LOAD button
Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next
higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.
Loads the selected QL setting file (page 235).
A CREATE USER KEY button
6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
Creates a user authentication key (page 212).
Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the
USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME
field.
B FORMAT button
Initializes the USB flash drive.
If an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, this button will become a USB
REMOUNT button. Press this button to remount a USB flash drive (page 238).
7 File list
This area lists the files and sub-directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. The
highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.
The file list contains the following items. When you press an item name, it will turn
orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the
sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• FILE NAME.......... Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon
indicating its type.
• COMMENT........... The comment added to the QL console setting file is displayed
here. You can press this area to open a keyboard window, allowing
you to enter a comment for the file.
• READ ONLY ........ A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file
is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the
protect setting.
Protected files cannot be overwritten.
• TYPE.................... Indicates the file type.
ALL: File containing QL internal settings
KEY: User authentication key
XML: Help file
BMP: Bitmap image file
MP3: MP3 file
[DIR]: Directory
C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button
If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings as well as word clock settings will
be omitted when a settings file is loaded.
NOTE
The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even
if the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is on.
Saving the QL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive
All of the QL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file.
The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF.”
STEP
1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the SAVE button.
2. In the SAVE SELECT screen, select the data to be saved, the data type, and the save
destination.
3. In the SAVE SELECT screen, press the SAVE button.
4. Enter a file name and comment.
5. Press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation.
NOTE
• If the file format version is earlier than V1.70, “old” is displayed in the
second line of this field. Data can be loaded even if “old” is displayed.
• If the console version is V2 or later, data from any version can be
loaded.
• TIME STAMP ....... Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most
recently.
8 File selection knob
Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the [TOUCH AND TURN]
knob.
233
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
SAVE SELECT screen
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
EFFECT LIB
1
Data content
Effect library
GEQ LIB
GEQ library
8 PEQ LIB
8Band PEQ library
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
2
3
4
5
6
7
Data content
5033 LIB
Portico 5033 library
5043 LIB
Portico 5043 library
5045 LIB
Portico 5045 library
U76 LIB
U76 library
Opt-2A LIB
Opt-2A library
EQ-1A LIB
EQ-1A library
DynaEQ LIB
DynamicEQ library
BussComp LIB
Buss Comp 369 library
MBC4 LIB
MBC4 library
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
4
1 TYPE field
Button
Specifies the types of data to be saved. The view of the TYPE field will vary depending
on the tab you select.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
Data content
MIXER SETUP
Mixer setup
OUTPUT PORT
Output port
MONITOR
CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI SETUP
MIDI setup
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
MIDI PGM
MIDI program changes
MIDI CTL
MIDI control changes
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Dante In Patch
Dante input patch library
Button
NOTE
Data content
IN CH LIB
Input channel library
OUT CH LIB
Output channel library
IN EQ LIB
Input EQ library
OUT EQ LIB
Output EQ library
DYNA LIB
Dynamics library
When the output port items are saved individually, channel assignments for the port will not be
saved. To prevent this, save the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel
assignment as well.
2 SOURCE field
Indicates the internal data of the QL series console.
3 DESTINATION field
Indicates the save destination.
4 Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
234
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
5 MULTI SELECT button
Loading a file from a USB flash drive
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
Follow the steps below to load a QL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive
into the QL series console.
You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as settings files.
6 SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
Extension
7 CLEAR ALL button
Type
Contents of file
Press this button to clear all selections.
.CLF
ALL
NOTE
.CLU
KEY
QL console user authentication key
• To select a different directory as a save destination, in the SAVE/LOAD window, press a directory
icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field.
• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog
will ask you to confirm the overwrite.
• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name,
and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you may be unable
to save the file, depending on the length of the file name. If this error indication appears at the
bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again.
.XML
XML
XML file for displaying Help
.TXT
TEXT
Text file for displaying Help
BMP
Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more
colors, uncompressed bitmap format)
.BMP
QL console internal setting file
NOTICE
Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after
the data is loaded. Before you load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the QL
series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem
even if a signal is output from the QL console.
NOTE
• When the file has finished being loaded, the window that shows the progress of the loading
operation and the type of data will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data
up to the cancellation point will still be loaded.
• Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load
operation.
STEP
1. To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file
list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
2. If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the QL
settings file (file name extension .CLF) and the word clock settings to be applied to
the QL console, press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.
3. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the LOAD button.
4. In the LOAD SELECT screen, select the data to load, the data type, and the load
destination.
5. Press the LOAD button to load the selected file.
235
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
LOAD SELECT screen
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
EFFECT LIB
1
Data content
Effect library
GEQ LIB
GEQ library
8PEQ LIB
8Band PEQ library
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
3
2
4
5
6
7
4
Portico 5033 library
5043 LIB
Portico 5043 library
5045 LIB
Portico 5045 library
U76 LIB
U76 library
Opt-2A LIB
Opt-2A library
EQ-1A LIB
EQ-1A library
DynaEQ LIB
DynamicEQ library
BussComp LIB
Buss Comp 369 library
MBC4 LIB
MBC4 library
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
1 TYPE field
Button
Indicates the type of data to be loaded. The view will vary depending on the tab you
select.
NOTE
The console version at the time when the data was saved is displayed on the top right side. If no
data has been saved, “NO DATA” will be displayed. If data has been saved but the version cannot
be determined, “later than V4.00” will be displayed.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
Data content
MIXER SETUP
Mixer setup
OUTPUT PORT
Output port
MONITOR
CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI SETUP
MIDI setup
MIDI PGM
MIDI program changes
MIDI CTL
MIDI control changes
Dante In Patch
Dante input patch library
NOTE
When the output port items are loaded individually, channel assignments for the port will not be
applied. To prevent this, load and then recall the scene that contains input/output patching for the
channel assignment.
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
Data content
5033 LIB
Data content
IN CH LIB
Input channel library
OUT CH LIB
Output channel library
IN EQ LIB
Input EQ library
OUT EQ LIB
Output EQ library
DYNA LIB
Dynamics library
236
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive
• ADMIN tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Type
Follow the steps below to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories
on the USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting.
Data content
ADMIN PREF
PREFERENCE (for the Administrator)
ADMIN UDEF
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the
Administrator)
ADMIN FADER
CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Administrator)
GUEST PREF
PREFERENCE (for the Guest)
GUEST UDEF
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Guest)
GUEST FADER
CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Guest)
GUEST LEVEL
USER LEVEL (for the Guest)
 Sorting files
To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,”
“TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the SAVE/LOAD window. The list will
be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
1
2 SOURCE field
2
3 4
5
1 FILE NAME
This area lists the data that is saved on the USB flash drive.
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names.
3 DESTINATION field
2 COMMENT
Indicates the load destination.
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment.
4 Data selection knob
3 READ ONLY
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status.
5 MULTI SELECT button
4 TYPE
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
Sort the list by file type.
6 SELECT ALL button
5 TIME STAMP
Press this button to select all items.
Sort the list by date and time of update.
NOTE
7 CLEAR ALL button
By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or
descending order) in which the list is sorted.
Press this button to clear all selections.
 Editing file names/comments
STEP
1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each
file.
2. Enter a file name or comment in the keyboard window, and press the RENAME
button or SET button.
NOTE
You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file.
237
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 Copying and pasting a file
Formatting a USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a
different file name.
Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive.
A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash
drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
STEP
1. Turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the copy-source file, and press the
COPY button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field to move to the
directory into which you want to paste the file.
3. Press the PASTE button.
4. Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
3. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FORMAT button.
4. Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.
5. To execute the Format operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.
 Deleting a file
STEP
1. Turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE
button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2. To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
SAVE/LOAD window
You cannot delete a protected file.
 Creating a directory
STEP
1. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field in the SAVE/
LOAD window to change the directory.
2. Press the MAKE DIR button.
3. Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.
NOTE
You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
238
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Word clock and slot settings
Recovering after overcurrent at the USB port
Even if the connection with the USB device was stopped because an overcurrent condition
occurred at the USB port, it is possible to use the USB device again without turning the
console power off and back on.
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal
processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must
be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an
unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may
be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the
entire system (the word clock leader), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock
followers) so that they synchronize to the word clock leader.
If you wish to use the QL series console as a word clock follower that is synchronized to the
word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source
(the port through which the word clock is obtained).
This section explains how to select the clock source that the QL series console will use.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT
button.
3. In the LEADER CLOCK SELECT field of the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window, select a
clock source.
4. Press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
 Recovery procedure
After removing the cause of the overcurrent at the USB port, press the location that shows
“USB REMOUNT” at the FORMAT button of the SAVE/LOAD window.
Remount function to USB flash drives
If USB flash drive is not mounted, the FORMAT button will become a USB REMOUNT button.
Press this button to mount a USB flash drive. Use this button if a USB flash drive is not
recognized after it has been removed and reinserted.
SETUP screen
239
WORD CLOCK/SLOT window
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
WORD CLOCK/SLOT window
• DANTE 48k
• DANTE 44.1k
The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be
used as the clock source.
4
1
NOTE
With QL V1.07 and later, if you initialize the console to factory settings, the default value for the
word clock is set to DANTE 48k. This allows you to synchronize word clock even when using
multiple CL and QL consoles at their default settings.
2
• SLOT 1–2
The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as
the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot.
3
7
6
8
5
3 Clock status Indicator
Indicates the console's status as a leader or a follower in the Dante audio network.
Leader
Follower
NOTE
When
is displayed and the specified word clock is not synchronized
with a device acting as a Dante leader, the audio might cut out.
4 Clock status display
 LEADER CLOCK SELECT field
Indicates the status of synchronization with the leader clock for each clock source. Each
indicator is explained below:
1 Leader clock frequency display
Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected leader clock. If the
unit is not synching to the leader clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
• LOCKED (light blue)
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an
external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is
occurring properly between that device and the QL series console. If the sampling
frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
NOTE
• If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante
Controller application, this area indicates the change in the
sample rate as a percentage, such as -4.0%, -0.1%, +0.1%, and
+4.1667%.
• To change the leader clock when sample rate pull-up/down has
been specified, disable the pull-up/down in the Dante Controller, change the leader clock, then
specify pull-up/down again.
• LOCKED, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an
external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot
occur correctly between that device and the QL series console.
2 Leader clock select buttons
• SRC ON (green)
This is a special status that applies only to SLOT1–2, indicating that the corresponding
channel’s SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that even if the signal
is not synchronized, normal input/output with the QL series console is occurring.
Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock leader
from the following options:
• INT 48 k
• INT 44.1 k
The QL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock
source.
• UNLOCKED (red)
A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding
connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the QL series
console.
• WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console
will be used as the clock source.
240
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Using cascade connections
• UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is
connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this
connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is
established.
Using multiple QL series consoles, or a QL console and an external mixing console (such as
a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade connection enables buses to be shared among the devices.
This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two QL
units are connected in a cascade configuration.
NOTE
• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device
is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your
speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock
setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will
appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
About cascade connections
To cascade two QL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate
slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade follower) to the input ports
of the receiving unit (the cascade leader).
The following illustration shows an example in which two eight-channel digital I/O cards for
each unit are installed in the cascade follower QL unit and in the cascade leader QL unit. The
DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving
unit.
 SLOT field
This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the
console.
5 Card name
Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
Audio signals of
A+B
Audio signals of
unit A
6 SRC buttons
The SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which
an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of
card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.
DIGITAL
OUT
DIGITAL
IN
QL A
QL B
7 FREQUENCY display
Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the
substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed,
or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
(Cascade follower)
8 EMPHASIS STATUS display
(Cascade leader)
Digital I/O card
Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the
substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed,
or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1–16, MATRIX bus 1–8,
STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals
transmitted from the cascade leader QL unit. (If you use two 16-channel digital I/O cards, all
buses can be shared among the devices.) When the required settings are made for the
cascade follower and for the cascade leader, the bus signals of the cascade follower will be
sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade leader, and the combined signals of both buses
will be output from the cascade leader. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified
operations or parameter changes performed on either QL series console will be followed by
the other QL console.
You must specify bus assignments for each slot or channel on each QL unit. Separate
procedures are outlined for the cascade follower and the cascade leader.
241
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
CASCADE window (CASCADE OUT PATCH page)
NOTE
• In Surround mode, you cannot use cascade output on MIX buses 1-6. In addition, if you have
selected 5.1 SOLO in CUE mode, you cannot monitor CUE from the cascade follower at the
cascade leader.
• If you are making a cascade connection between the QL unit and the PM5D, you can use the QL
unit as the cascade follower by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot.
However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card or OMNI OUT jack to make cascade connections with an analog
mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at
the cascade follower will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade
leader.
You can select the slot and output port that will output each bus.
2
3
Operations on a cascade follower QL unit
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab.
4. In the CASCADE OUT PATCH page, press the OUT PATCH button for the bus to which
you want to assign the port.
5. Use the category select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and output
ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button.
6. In the CASCADE COMM PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive
control signals for cascade link.
7. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
1
4
1 Port select popup buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section)
Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1–16,
MATRIX 1–8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select a port.
NOTE
2 CASCADE LINK buttons
• You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a
signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select
a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask
whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
Used to select the operations to be linked when making cascade connections between
QL series consoles. Multiple selection is possible.
• DCA 1-8
The following parameters related to DCA 1 to 8 will be linked.
• DCA 1 - 8 level
• DCA 1 - 8 on/off
• DCA 1 - 8 cue
• DCA 1 - 8 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets)
NOTE
Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time
for consoles linked by cascade connections.
242
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons
• DCA 9-16
The following parameters related to DCA 9 to 16 will be linked.
• DCA 9 - 16 level
• DCA 9 - 16 on/off
• DCA 9 - 16 cue
• DCA 9 - 16 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets)
Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information
when operations such as cue and scene store/recall are linked between cascadeconnected QL series consoles.
• NONE.....................No link operation
• MIDI .......................Use MIDI port
• SLOT1....................Use SLOT1
NOTE
4 Tabs
Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time
for consoles linked by cascade connections.
Switches between pages (CASCADE IN PATCH, CASCADE IN ATT, and CASCADE OUT
PATCH).
• MUTE GROUP
Links ON/OFF for mute group controls.
PORT SELECT window
NOTE
Press the OUT PATCH button to open this window.
The settings of Dimmer function are not linked. Make these settings individually on each
console.
• SENDS ON FADER
Links SENDS ON FADER behavior.
• SENDS ON FADER mode
• The send destination bus
• CUE
The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked.
• Cue enable/disable
• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE, 5.1 SOLO)
2
1
NOTE
Regarding 5.1 SOLO, no links are made if the console at the cascade destination is set to
Stereo mode.
• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels
• SOLO MUTE
NOTE
Solo operation is used for all cascaded consoles (LEADER and FOLLOWER).
1 Category select list
• OTHERS
The following parameters will be linked.
• Scene recall operations
• Scene store operations
• Edit scene titles
• DIMMER (MONITOR window) operations
• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP window) operations
Selects the port (slot 1–2) that will be shown on the screen.
2 Port select buttons
Within the specified slot, these buttons select the ports that will be patched.
243
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
CASCADE window (CASCADE IN ATT page)
Operations on the cascade leader QL unit
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab.
4. In the CASCADE IN PATCH page, press the IN PATCH button for the bus to which you
want to assign the port.
5. In the PORT SELECT screen, use the category select list and the port select buttons
to select the slot and input ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE
button.
6. As described in step 6 of “Operations on a cascade follower QL unit” on page 242,
in the CASCADE LINK PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive
control signals for cascade link.
7. As described in step 7 of “Operations on a cascade follower QL unit” on page 242,
in the CASCADE COMM LINK field, select the same item as the cascade follower.
1
NOTE
• You can assign the same input port to two or more buses.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select
a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask
whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
1 ATT knobs
Display the attenuator values (-96.0dB to 0.0dB) for cascade input signals. You can
adjust these values using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
NOTE
You can use these knobs as SUB IN with adjustable input level. Doing so allows you to sum the
signals from other consoles to a bus, without using up inputs and buses.
244
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
BUS SETUP window
You can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.
Follow the steps below to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such
as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the
signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure are
saved as part of the scene.
1
2
4
1
3
4
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button.
3. Use the tabs in the BUS SETUP window to select the buses whose settings you want
to edit.
4. Use the SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons to specify whether each bus will function as
STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5. Use the bus type/send point select buttons to select the bus type and the position
from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.
6. As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.
5
5
MIX page
MATRIX page
1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons
Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO
(stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2).
2 Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only)
For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send
point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
SETUP screen
BUS SETUP window
Bus type
Pre-fader send point
VARI [PRE EQ]
VARI
Immediately before the EQ
VARI [PRE FADER]
VARI
Immediately before the fader
FIXED
FIXED
---
3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only)
Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the
following parameters.
Button
245
Pre-fader send point
PRE EQ
Immediately before the EQ
PRE FADER
Immediately before the fader
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
4 PAN LINK button
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen,
LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps
This button appears if SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and the bus type is set to VARI. If
the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the
corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting.
Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel
name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors. You can save two
different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired.
5 Tabs
Enable you to switch between the MIX and MATRIX buses.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the
BANK A or BANK B button.
3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the brightness of each item.
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/
off
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V ACTIVE field’s ON button or OFF
button.
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an
OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.
NOTE
You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch
between banks A and B.
SETUP screen (brightness setting field)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 BANK A/B buttons
Switch between the brightness settings.
 CONTRAST field
2 NAME
Adjusts the contrast of the characters of the channel name displays on the top panel.
SETUP screen
NOTE
 BRIGHTNESS field
This +48V ACTIVE setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs
(I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V ACTIVE switch, and will operate according to its setting.
3 NAME
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.
This will also change the CH COLOR brightness and LED brightness in the lower part of
the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR brightness after
setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob.
4 CH COLOR
Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel.
This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without
changing the channel name display brightness.
246
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
5 SCREEN
3 FORMAT (Display format)
Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
If the brightness is set to lower than level 2, the QL will start up next time with a
brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen.
Specifies the format in which the date and time of the internal clock are displayed.
You can select from the following display formats.
• Date
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)
DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
6 PANEL
Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs.
NOTE
If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.
• Time
24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0–23)
12-Hour (hours shown from 0am–11am, and 0pm–11pm)
7 LAMP
Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
Setting the network address
This section explains how to set the date and time of the QL console’s internal clock, and how
to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the
time stamp used when saving a scene.
This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the
NETWORK connector on the QL series console to connect it to a computer.
If you plan to connect the QL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we
recommend that you use the following default values.
IP Address:
192.168.0.128
Gateway address:
192.168.0.1
Subnet mask:
255.255.255.0
Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other
device on the network.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the DATE/TIME button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3. In the FORMAT field of the DATE/TIME window, press the MODE buttons several
times to select the desired format for date and time display.
4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the current date and time.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
NOTE
• Only the Administrator can change network settings.
• For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the QL Editor Installation Guide.
DATE/TIME window
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the NETWORK button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3. Press and select the knobs in the NETWORK window to specify the address using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
5. Restart the QL series console.
Press the DATE/TIME button in the SETUP screen to open this window.
1
2
3
1 DATE
Specifies the date of the internal clock.
2 TIME
Specifies the time of the internal clock.
247
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
NETWORK window (FOR MIXER CONTROL page)
NETWORK window (FOR DEVICE CONTROL page)
Use this window to set the console’s IP address, in order to use the NETWORK connector on
the rear panel to remote-control the console from QL Editor, StageMix, or the MonitorMix
application.
Set the UNIT Name and PIN for the MonitorMix application here.
For the IP SETTING MODE select buttons, only STATIC IP button is enabled. The other
buttons cannot be selected.
Use this window to set the console’s IP address, in order to use the Dante PRIMARY
connector on the rear panel to remote-control external devices. DHCP, AUTO IP, and fixed IP
settings are supported.
Even on DHCP networks, it is possible to remotely control external devices such as Tio1608D and Shure’s ULDX4.
1
1
3
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 CURRENT IP SETTING field
1 MAC ADDRESS
This field shows the current setting.
Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a
network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited.
NOTE
If you use the IP SETTING MODE select buttons to select DHCP or AUTO IP, it may take some
time for the IP address to be configured. During this time, the window will appear as shown below.
2 UNIT NAME
Sets the name to be shown on the network.
3 PIN for MonitorMix
Sets the PIN (4-digit numeric password) to be entered when using the MonitorMix
application to connect to a QL series console. MonitorMix is an iOS application that
musicians can use on stage to adjust their own monitor balance.
You can register a PIN with all 4 digits blank. In that case, PIN authentication with
MonitorMix is not required. However, you cannot leave only 1, 2, or 3 of the PIN digits
blank.
NOTE
The NETWORK connector on the QL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX
(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).
248
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 NEXT IP SETTING field
Setting up the Dante audio network
2 IP SETTING MODE select buttons
You will use the QL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself
and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the QL series console. This section
explains how to make Dante audio network settings.
Use these buttons to select how to set the IP address the next time the console is turned
on. Select DHCP, AUTO IP, or STATIC IP.
NOTE
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to
open the DANTE SETUP window.
3. Press the SETUP tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
If you select AUTO IP, the Dante network automatically sets the console’s IP address to
169.254.xxx.xxx.
If you select DHCP or AUTO IP, the window will appear as shown below and you will be
unable to set the IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and GATEWAY ADDRESS.
3 IP ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.
4 SUBNET MASK
Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the
network address that distinguishes the network.
SETUP screen
DANTE SETUP window
5 GATEWAY ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between
different media or protocols to allow communication within the network.
6 APPLY button
Press this button after you have changed the IP address settings. When the ATTENTION
window appears, press the OK button and then turn the console off and back on again.
7 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a group of items to view (FOR MIXER CONTROL or FOR DEVICE
CONTROL).
249
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
2 CONSOLE ID select buttons
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
Set the IDs for the QL series consoles.
If five or more QL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to
some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.
When the CONSOLE ID select button is set to OFF in the DANTE SETUP screen, the NOT
CTRL indicator appears below the Display switch button of each device.
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
7
9
1 STATUS indicators
Show the operating status of the QL series console and the Dante network.
The NOT CTRL indicator also appears on the icons of the DANTE PATCH screen.
3 SECONDARY PORT select buttons
Specify how the Dante audio network is configured.
4 CANCEL button
When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button
to cancel the changes you made.
5 APPLY button
After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to
apply the changes you made.
6 BIT select buttons
Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.
• 24bit................... Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an R series
unit. When using a QL series system, you will normally use this
setting.
250
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Dante Device Lock
• 32bit................... This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data
(when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data
being transmitted will increase 20-30% compared to 24-bit.
Dante Device Lock prevents changes to the Dante audio network settings of a Dante device
by another computer on the same network. Dante Device Lock settings are configured in
Dante Controller.
7 LATENCY select buttons
Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms,
or 5.0 ms.
The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For
details, refer to “Setting the Dante audio network latency” (page 254).
When Dante Device Lock is enabled on a QL console, the following parameters cannot be
changed.
• CONSOLE ID
• SECONDARY PORT
• BIT
• LATENCY (ms)
• PREFERRED LEADER
8 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons
If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT
PATCH settings can be edited from the QL series console.
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante
patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE
PATCH BY select buttons on other CL/QL series consoles on the network.
When Dante Device Lock is enabled on a QL console, the DANTE DEVICE LOCKED indicator
lights up in red on the top left side of the DANTE SETUP window.
9 PREFERRED LEADER button
If this button is turned ON, the console’s status as a leader is given greater priority in the
Dante audio network.
If this button is turned OFF, the console’s status as a leader is given less priority in the
Dante audio network.
• If there is only one QL console for which this button is turned ON, that console will become the
leader.
• If there are multiple QL consoles for which this button is turned ON, only one of them will become
the leader.
• If this button is turned OFF for all QL consoles, one unit out of all Dante devices, including I/O
devices, will become the leader.
NOTE
• Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of
the QL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.
• If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you
attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not
Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.
• DANTE patch information is applied to the device if the QL settings file (file name extension .CLF)
is loaded under the following conditions. Otherwise, the information is not applied and the current
state will be maintained.
• In the SAVE/LOAD window (page 232), the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is
on.
• Either #1, #2, #3, or #4 CONSOLE ID select button is on.
• The THIS CONSOLE button of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons is on.
• With QL V1.07 and later, when settings are initialized, including Dante audio network settings, or
a firmware update is installed, the Preferred Leader setting is turned on. This setting is not
changed when console settings are changed or when the console is restarted. It can be turned
off using the Dante Controller, if necessary. If this default setting is used to change CL or QL word
clock settings for anything other than Dante, that console is given priority as the clock leader for
the Dante network to prevent clock synchronization errors. Further, you can use Dante Controller
to clearly specify the leader by turning on only Preferred Leader for the device that will always be
running (off for all other devices).
If you try to change any of these parameters, the following message will appear at the bottom
of the window.
251
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Support for Dante Domain Manager
If a device connected to the console is online, and Dante Device Lock is enabled for that
device, the LOCKED indicator will appear in each window as shown below.
When a DDM server exists in the network, or when enrolling a domain, the DANTE DOMAIN
MANAGER field is shown at the top of the DANTE SETUP screen.
1
If Dante Device Lock is enabled for the console, the following specifications will apply.
• The leader clock select buttons in the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window cannot be changed.
• None of the parameters in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window can be changed. RECALL
and AUTO SETUP in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY window will be disabled.
• None of the parameters in the I/O DEVICE [OUTPUT PATCH] window can be changed.
• If a file is being loaded from USB memory to a device that has Dante Device Lock enabled,
the settings will not be changed by the loaded file. A message is displayed on the screen.
• If the console’s internal memory is initialized to the factory settings, Dante Device Lock will
remain enabled and cannot be changed. Locked parameters will also not be initialized.
• If the console’s Dante settings are initialized to the factory settings, Dante Device Lock will
be disabled. Locked parameters will also be initialized. Refer to “Initializing the Dante audio
2
3
1 STATE
Displays the status of domain participation.
• Domain: Domain is enrolled
• Disconnected: Domain is enrolled without connecting to the DDM server
• Unmanaged: Domain is not enrolled
network settings” (page 274).
2 LOCAL
• USB memory cannot be used to update the Dante module firmware. In addition, Dante
Firmware Update Manager will not update the firmware.
Displays the access status of the Dante settings (including the DANTE PATCH settings)
on the current operating unit.
• Read Write: Editing is available
• Read Only: Editing is disabled
NOTE
• If Dante Device Lock is enabled for a remote device, all offline settings (such as Dante Patch) for
the device will be disabled.
• Even if Dante Device Lock is enabled for an I/O device, remote control that is unrelated to Dante
settings (such as HA control for R series) is possible.
252
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
3 REMOTE
Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT
Displays the access status of the Dante settings of the external Dante devices.
• Operator: Editing is available
• Guest: Reading is available, editing is disabled
• None: Reading and editing are disabled
STEP
1. In the DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page), select the CONSOLE ID and the
SECONDARY PORT.
2. Press the APPLY button.
3. In the window to confirm the change, press the OK button.
The display changes depending on the REMOTE settings.
• I/O DEVICE screen
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
The button you switched is shown in red.
When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return
to its original appearance.
• DANTE PATCH screen, DANTE SETUP DEVICE MOUNT screen
NOTE
• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between
the QL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the
REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will
become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you
change the setting.
• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the
QL series console.
• When the CONSOLE ID is OFF or is set to 2, 3, or 4 for a QL series console, the console’s BIT/
LATENCY will not change even if the BIT/LATENCY is changed in the DANTE SETUP window
for the QL series console within a network for which the CONSOLE ID is set to 1.
253
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 Connection examples and latency settings
• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, the DANTE PATCH BY field is fixed to “DANTE
CONTROLLER.” Also, patching cannot be changed in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window.
• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, all the mounted devices will be “NOT CTRL”.
You can edit HA GAIN and other settings for R series units, but notification of the settings will not
be sent to the device. This is the same as when the devices are not connected.
Daisy chain connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
3
Setting the Dante audio network latency
2
An appropriate latency setting for signals sent and received via a Dante audio network varies
depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an
appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices
that are connected to the QL series console.
2
3
 Relationship between the switches and the number of hops
An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of
hops in the network.
One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting
from the leader device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in
series).
Switches mean network switches and routers, as well as the switches that are built into QL
series consoles and I/O devices. Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The
following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops.
Number of hops
1
0.25
Up to 5
0.5
Up to 10
1.0
Up to 20
2.0
21 or more (or if a problem occurs)
5.0
QL
3 hops = 0.25 ms
3 hops = 0.25 ms
Daisy chain connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
Latency (ms)
Up to 3
1
QL
4
2
3
QL
NOTE
QL
2
• Depending on network conditions, you may want to raise the latency value even if the number of
hops is small.
• If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting
is the cause of the problem.
• When a DDM server is connected, the latency can be set to 10.0ms, 20.0ms, or 40.0ms. Use
Dante Controller to set it. The QL console does not support these settings.
3
1
QL
4 hops = 0.5 ms
254
1
QL
3 hops = 0.25 ms
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Redundant connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
Daisy chain connections
256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
9
3
8
3
4
7
6
4
5
4
1
2
2
3
QL
2
4 hops = 0.5 ms
1
QL
Redundant connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
9 hops = 1.0 ms
1
QL
4 hops = 0.5 ms
3
QL
4
1
2
QL
4 hops = 0.5 ms
255
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Redundant connections
Two consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be
mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one QL series console.
With V4.1 or later, the Shure AXT400, QLXD4, and ULXD4 wireless systems, which do not
feature Dante output, can now be controlled. These Shure devices can be connected to the
same physical network as Dante, mounted, and controlled.
However, the actual audio signals are physically connected to an R series I/O rack mounted
on the QL console or to OMNI IN. By associating the port where audio is input with the
mounted Shure device, control and monitoring are possible from the input channel that is
patched to the input port. For details about the explanation of how to control the Shure wireless
systems, which do not feature Dante output, refer to C on page 178, “PORT ASSIGN tab.”
4
5
STEP
1. Press the DEVICE MOUNT tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2. Press the I/O device select button.
3. In the DEVICE SELECT window, press the setup method select button.
4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
3
QL
DANTE SETUP window (DEVICE MOUNT page)
QL
1
2
1
2
5 hops = 0.5 ms
3
256
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
•
•
•
•
NOTE
QL console can recognize up to 24 Shure AXT400, QLXD4, and ULXD4 devices on the same
Dante audio network, including Shure ULXD4D and ULXD4Q Dante output devices that are set
to YAMAHA ID mode. Note that if a greater number of devices is connected, some of the devices
will not be recognized by the console based on the order in which their power is turned on, etc,
regardless of the mount setting.
DEVICE LIST ...................... Select and mount from the device list
SUPPORTED DEVICE ....... Select and mount a supported device
DVS..................................... Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)
MANUAL............................. Enter a device label and mount
 When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST
1 CLEAR ALL button
To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the
DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
3 I/O device select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT window. The upper line of the
button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and
the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will
indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,
refer to 1 on page 163, “I/O device list.”
1
DANTE SETUP window
1
3
2
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.
3 DEVICE IDENTIFY button
If a device has the DEVICE IDENTIFY function, the DEVICE IDENTIFY button is enabled.
Otherwise, this button will be grayed out and cannot be pressed.
1 Setup method select buttons
Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not mounted
257
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
4 UNIT ID knob
 When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to specify the UNIT ID.
The indicator shows the UNIT ID.
If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the QL series, press the
SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be
made even when not connected to a Dante audio network.
NOTE
• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1.”
• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between
devices.
• For devices other than the R series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned
to the same ID as an R series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However, since
the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish
between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers
to overlap.
• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit
screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or Dante Accelerator), and you want to use that
device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.
• An I/O device will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as
follows.
Y###-**********
# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0–9 and uppercase A–F (000–FFF)
* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or - (hyphen)
may be used)
• If you are controlling the QL series console from an R series unit, we recommend that you set the
R unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting,
since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with QL units whose system
setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”
With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings
that were backed up by the R series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.
• A single QL series console can control the HA of up to eight R series units.
If nine or more R series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between
multiple QL series consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the R series
units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to
“RESUME.”
3
1
4
2
1 DEVICE TYPE
This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the QL series.
From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE TYPE select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to
mount.
3 I/O device indication
This area shows the selected I/O device.
The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device.
The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. The
REMOTE icon appears in the remote control supported device.
For devices that do not future Dante output, “NO DANTE PORT” appears on the right
side.
NOTE
If a device does not feature Dante output, offline mounting is not possible. Mount it when online
(make sure the DEVICE LIST button is on).
258
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 When the setup method select button is DVS or MANUAL
REMOTE HA settings
If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL
button to access the DVS/MANUAL field.
Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be
mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one QL series console.
A device having a large number of channels occupies two racks. For such device, you can
only mount on odd numbered racks. Also, it is necessary to have two racks in a row. Up to
four units can be mounted.
STEP
1. Press the REMOTE HA ASSIGN tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2. Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT window.
3. Select the HA device to mount and press the OK button.
If you have changed the setting by pressing the WITH RECALL button, a
confirmation dialog box will appear. Press the OK button.
2
1
DANTE SETUP window (REMOTE HA page)
3
3
1
2
1 DEVICE LABEL
Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.
2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the
Dante audio network.
3 Device label entry keyboard
Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device.
NOTE
• If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button.
• If DEVICE LABEL is left blank, the first DVS detected is automatically mounted.
• If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will
be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.
259
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
3 HA device select buttons
Displaying the device status
Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT window. The upper line of
the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name
and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row
will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,
refer to 1 on page 163, “I/O device list.”
You can use the touch screen to verify the status of a connected QL series or R-series unit
(except the Ro8-D) or the Dante status. In order to verify the status of an R-series unit from
the console, it must be assigned to REMOTE HA in DANTE SETUP.
 QL series
The SETUP field of the DANTE SETUP window shows indicators for the status of the QL
series console and the Dante network.
REMOTE HA SELECT window
1
2
3
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network.
2 WITH RECALL button
If this button is on, the settings saved in the QL series console will be applied to the HA
device when the QL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled.
3 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.
NOTE
• Do not specify “WITH RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple QL series consoles and
settings have already been made on a different QL series console.
• The HA device can also be operated from a QL series console that is not set to “WITH RECALL.”
• If an external QL series console has been mounted, you can set up and control the QL series
console’s INPUT HA in this window. However, make sure that the UNIT ID of the QL series
console does not match the UNIT IDs of any other HA device.
260
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 R-series
 Error messages
The I/O field of the I/O DEVICE screen shows indicators for the status of the R-series units
and the Dante network.
For firmware that predates support for V1.60, the version indication will be yellow and the
indicator will be unlit.
The SYSTEM indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically as follows until the problem has been
resolved.
If service is necessary, please contact the Yamaha service center listed in the QL5/QL1
Owner’s Manual.
[SYSTEM] indicators
Meaning
Possible solution
An internal error has occurred.
Flash x2
Flash x3
Lit
The device has failed. Contact
your Yamaha dealer for repair.
The MAC address setting has
been corrupted and no
communication can occur via
Dante.
The internal memory has
been corrupted.
If the problem persists after
setting START UP MODE back to
RESUME and turning the power
on again, consult your Yamaha
dealer.
UNIT ID is not unique.
Set a unique UNIT ID number for
the Dante network.
The DIP switches are not set
correctly.
Check the DIP switch settings,
and set them correctly.
Dante flow number limit was
exceeded.
Examine the Dante network
routing.
Flash x3
Messages
Error, warning, and information messages are displayed.
Messages are also displayed in the Dante Controller Error Status field.
Each indicator lights or flashes as described below:
No call-out
Lit
Unlit
Lit
The indicator remains lit steadily.
Blinking
The indicator continues to flash.
Flash x2
The indicator flashes twice cyclically.
Flash x3
The indicator flashes three times cyclically.
Blinking
Lit
261
Blinking
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
[SYSTEM] indicators
Lit
Meaning
Possible solution
The positions of the device
setting DIP switches do not
match the actual Dante settings.
If the Device Lock setting was
enabled from Dante Controller or
if the device is set to READ ONLY
in DDM mode, disable the setting.
Check the device setting DIP
switch positions, and set them to
accommodate the current
situation.
Lit
Power supply problem has
occurred on Rio3224-D2/
Rio1608-D2.
If the green indicator is blinking, the unit is operating as the word clock leader.
If the green indicator lights, the unit is operating as a word clock follower and synching to the
word clock.
[SYNC] indicators
Check whether power is supplied
correctly to the AC IN connectors
A and B respectively.
The indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically until the problem has been resolved.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined.
Meaning
The word clock is not set
correctly.
Blinking
Lit or Blinking
blinking
Possible solution
Set the word clock leader and the
sampling frequency correctly on
the QL5/QL1-native device or in
Dante Controller.
Dante Network circuit is
broken.
Make sure that the Ethernet
cables are not removed or shortcircuited.
Dante Network is connected
incorrectly. Other Dante
devices cannot be found.
Make sure that the Ethernet
cables are connected correctly.
Lit or Flash x2
blinking
Possible solution
A non-GbE-compatible device
is connected.
If audio is transmitted over the
Dante network, use a GbEcompatible device.
The SECONDARY connector
has taken over
communications during
redundant network operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
PRIMARY connector.
An abnormality has occurred
on the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector
during redundant network
operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector.
Lit or Lit
blinking
 Warning messages
[SYNC] indicators
Meaning
Flash x2
Flash x3
262
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 Information messages
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The indicators will remain lit /blinking cyclically to report the status.
If the orange [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the unit is operating correctly.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined.
[SYNC] indicators
Meaning
Syncing the Dante network
Lit
The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output
connector. This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example
you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the QL series console or to
switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the QL series console
can send control signals to an external device.
For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer
to “Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)”
on page 99.
Possible solution
Please wait until started has
completed or until the unit has
finished synchronization. It may
take up to 45 seconds for
completion.
Waiting to receive setting data
Use REMOTE HA ASSIGN in the
system to sync with a console or
R Remote set to “WITH RECALL.”
For an R series console with the
START UP MODE set to
REFRESH, after startup both
input and output are muted until
the setting data is received.
For a single R series console, do
not set “WITH RECALL” from
multiple consoles.
The device is operating
correctly as a word clock
leader.
This indicates that the device is
operating as a word clock leader.
The device is operating
correctly as a word clock
follower.
This indicates that the device is
operating as a word clock follower
and synching to the word clock.
Using GPI IN
You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the QL series
console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the
QL series console’s Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.
STEP
1. Connect an external device to the QL series console’s GPI connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5. Specify the switch attribute and POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for
the specifications of the external device you’re using.
6. To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN
SETUP button.
7. In each field of the GPI IN SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter,
then press the OK button.
Blinking
Lit
SETUP screen
263
MIDI/GPI screen
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
3 POLARITY MODE select button
NOTE
• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is
input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of
external switch.
• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch
is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type
of external switch as appropriate for your needs.
• Settings in the GPI page of the MIDI/GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved
as SETUP data.
This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.
..................... (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will
become active when the switch is grounded.
..................... (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will
become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level
voltage is input.
4 GPI IN SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this
button to display the GPI IN SETUP window.
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
4
1
2
3
NOTE
The items that can be selected in the GPI IN SETUP window are the same as for the USER
DEFINED keys (page 221).
Using GPI OUT
The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by
performing operations on the QL series console.
1 GPI IN status indicator
STEP
1. Connect an external device to the QL series console’s GPI connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of
the external device you’re using.
6. To assign a function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT
SETUP button.
7. In each field of the GPI OUT SETUP window, select the desired function and
parameter, then press the OK button.
This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.
2 Switch attribute select button
This button selects the switch attribute. Each time you press the button, its indication
will alternate between LATCH and UNLATCH.
................. LATCH (a switch that alternately turns on/off each time it is pressed)
is selected.
................. UNLATCH (a switch that is on only while pressed and is off when
released) is selected.
264
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
3 GPI OUT SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this
button to display the GPI OUT SETUP window.
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
4
3
You can assign the following functions.
Function
1
2 POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port.
..................... (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.
Description
-
No assignment
CUE ACTIVE
CUE ON
-
Turn on the [CUE] key of the
selected channel
DCA ONLY
-
Turn on the DCA [CUE] key
INPUT ONLY
-
Turn on the [CUE] key of an input
channel
OUTPUT ONLY
-
Turn on the [CUE] key of an output
channel
REDUNDANCY
IND.
PRIMARY
This function activates when the
unit is operating on the primary
Dante audio network with a star
connection (redundant network).
SECONDARY
This function activates when the
unit is operating on the secondary
Dante audio network with a star
connection (redundant network).
DANTE
This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.
PARAMETER 2
-
2
1 GPI OUT status indicator
PARAMETER 1
NO ASSIGN
GPI IN ACTIVE
IND.
SPECIFIC PORT PORT 1 to PORT 5
The function assigned to GPI IN
port 1 - 5 becomes active
POWER ON
-
-
The power of the QL series
console is turned on
USER DEF.
KEY ACTIVE
IND.
SPECIFIC
NUMBER
USER DEFINED
KEY 1 to USER
DEFINED KEY 16
The function assigned to the
USER DEFINED key becomes
active
4 TEST button
While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control
signal.
..................... (High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.
265
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Using FADER START
MIDI/GPI screen (FADER START page)
Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate
in tandem with fader operations.
1
STEP
1. Connect an external device to the QL series console’s GPI connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the FADER START tab.
5. For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to
operate, and the type of operation.
2
3
4
8
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen
5
6
7
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all selections.
 OUTPUT DESTINATION field
2 GPI OUT1–GPI OUT5 buttons
Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.
3 Fader indicator
This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
266
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
 THRESHOLD field
The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI PORT will change
in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the
THRESHOLD field is set to –60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to –∞. (This illustration shows
is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is
, the
the case in which
polarity of the output signal will be reversed.)
4 UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs
These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger
signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls
below the DOWNSTROKE level. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate
these parameters.
NOTE
• The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all
GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT port.
• Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the
DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER
TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.
 MODE field
Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output
from the GPI OUT port. You can choose from the following fader modes.
FADER
START
5 FADER START
250 msec
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel
moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a
point below it.
FADER
STOP
250 msec
6 FADER STOP
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel
reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB).
FADER
TALLY
7 FADER TALLY
A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward
through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it. This
signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to
9.95 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger.
NOTE
At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high
level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited;
for details, refer to “Control I/O specifications” on the QL Data List (End of Manual).
8 NO ASSIGN
Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.
267
V5.8 Reference Manual
Help function
Help function
NOTE
By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding
a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force
recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code
set when using your text editor to save the text file.
The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets /languages).
• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese)
• Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set
• The maximum size of the text file is 1024 Kbytes.
You can view Help files (file extension .xml) provided by Yamaha. For the latest information on
help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
In addition, using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with Microsoft
Windows, you can create a text file (file extension .txt) and display it on the console*.
* We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files
created by a third party other than Yamaha.
Viewing Help
Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive
STEP
1. Load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive.
NOTE
2. In the Function Access Area, press the
A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the
help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you
press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the
help file to be loaded from internal memory. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently
pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly.
(Help) button.
3. To close the HELP window, press the
(Help) button of the Function Access
Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP window.
 Operation in the HELP window
STEP
1. Save the Help file provided by Yamaha or a user-created text file on your USB flash
drive.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
4. To select the Help/text file that you want to load, press one of the Help/text files in
the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
5. Press the LOAD button.
6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to load the file.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob or screen buttons to access the HELP window.
• Turning the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob
.............To scroll through the index area, use the left knob; to scroll through
main area, use the right knob.
• Pressing a link (underlined text) in the text
.............Scrolls to the linked destination.
• Pressing a window link (a location with an ➞ symbol and underlined text)
.............Closes the HELP window and opens the corresponding window.
• Pressing the
button
.............Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed
location.
• Pressing the
button
.............Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed.
• Pressing the
button
.............Advances to the next item in the history of links you pressed.
SAVE/LOAD window
268
V5.8 Reference Manual
Help function
 Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function,
press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is
available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is
assigned.
 Assigning the Help function to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1. Load the Help file from your USB flash drive.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
4. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
5. In the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button corresponding to the USER
DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function.
6. In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.
7. Press the “x” symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
NOTE
• Panel controllers (other than the faders will not function as long as you continue holding down
the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to
successively display these explanations.
 Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function,
press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available
for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is
assigned.
NOTE
• The on-screen controllers will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER
DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to
successively display these explanations.
SETUP screen
USER SETUP window (USER
DEFINED KEYS page)
 Recalling the HELP window using only a USER DEFINED key
Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP window will
appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help
function is assigned.
269
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
Other functions
NOTE
• Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
of pressing the EXIT button.
This chapter explains various functions of QL series consoles that are not covered in other
chapters.
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen
(Calibration function)
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
If an error occurs in the QL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot
operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
There are two types of initialization of the internal memory as shown below.
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default
settings.
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
The contents of memory - except for scene memories and libraries - will be returned to its
factory default settings.
Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch
screen.
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.
3. Press the START button in the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen.
4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start calibration.
5. A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen (a total of three times). Press each
location at which it appears.
6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal
operating mode.
NOTICE
The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! Proceed with the operation
only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory. However, the settings in DANTE
SETUP will not be initialized. To initialize these settings, refer to “Initializing the Dante audio
network settings” (page 274).
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, select the initialization method.
3. Press the INITIALIZE button in the dialog box to confirm initialization.
4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start initialization.
5. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button
on the startup menu screen.
Startup menu screen
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
MODE screen
NOTE
• If you are unable to start calibration by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you
can use the [B1]/[B2] keys in the Fader Bank section to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION,
and then press the [B4] key to start.
• To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and
posture in which you normally operate the unit.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
of pressing the EXIT button.
Startup menu screen
270
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
NOTE
• Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected in step 3.
• If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute
calibration once again.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
of pressing the EXIT button.
Depending on the environment in which you use the QL series console, discrepancies may
occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these
discrepancies.
NOTE
With this operation, the specified faders in the Channel Strip section and MAIN section will be
semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader
settings while the QL is starting up.
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration
function)
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
3. Press a [SEL] key to select the faders that you want to calibrate.
4. Press the START button in the FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen.
5. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
6. Each of the specified faders will move to –∞ dB (all the way down). If the fader
positions are not correct, move them manually to –∞ dB (all the way down).
7. After you adjust the fader position, press the NEXT button.
8. Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust three fader positions at 20 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB (all the way
up).
When adjustment to the +10 dB position is complete, calibration starts.
9. When calibration has been completed, press the APPLY button.
10. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal
operating mode.
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain.
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. In the MODE SELECT field on the startup menu screen, press the button for the item
you want to adjust.
3. Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to
adjust the value.
4. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal
operating mode.
Startup menu screen
NOTE
• If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset
to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also 0 dB.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
of pressing the EXIT button.
Startup menu screen
271
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)
Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the
specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain)
Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the
output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)
Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the
specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.
272
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
Adjusting the LED color (Calibration function)
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name
display
If necessary, you can adjust the LED colors. Adjust the LED colors one by one.
If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display.
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust
the channel color.
If you want to adjust the indicator color of the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the
TOUCH AND TURN button in the LED field.
4. Press one of the color buttons in the COLOR field to select the desired color.
5. While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the
other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), adjust the color
by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate the RGB knobs in the RPG
ADJUSTMENT field.
6. When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located in the
right of the screen to confirm the change.
7. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal
operating mode.
LED COLOR CALIBRATION MODE
screen
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust.
Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will
decrease the brightness.
4. When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in
the right of the screen to confirm the change.
5. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal
operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
LED field
NOTE
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be
shown.
• You cannot adjust more than one channel simultaneously.
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values.
• To reset all LED color indicators to the factory default setting, press the
RESET ALL button.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a
different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
273
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name
display
Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware
If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the NAME
SUB CPU firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “QL5/QL1 Firmware Update
Guide”.
If you mistakenly use a file for CL to perform this update, the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs will
stop functioning. Use this function only if that happens.
Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding.
To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button.
If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.
STEP
1. While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn
on the power to the QL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Turn the [GAIN] knob in the Selected Channel section.
Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward
the right will darken the contrast of all channels.
4. If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other
channels, hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or
[ON] key.
Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the
contrast.
5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in
the right of the screen to confirm the change.
6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal
operating mode.
NOTE
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.
• Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Initializing the Dante audio network settings
It is possible for Dante-related settings to be initialized to their factory-set state when an error
occurs on the Dante audio network.
NOTICE
When you initialize, all console settings including the Dante audio network settings that had
been previously saved in memory will be lost.
Disconnect all connections from the Dante audio network before initializing.
STEP
1. While holding down both [SEL] keys for Faders A and B in the MAIN section on the
panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2. A message indicates that initialization process is complete. Press the CLOSE button.
274
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
Update function to Dante firmware
If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the Dante
module firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “QL5/QL1 Firmware Update
Guide”.
Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding.
To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button.
275
V5.8 Reference Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Meaning
DANTE module Error!
The Dante module has malfunctioned.
DANTE switched to secondary port.
Only the SECONDARY PORT is used, even though a QL series console
is being used via a redundant connection.
5.1SOLO : Only input cue is enabled.
If switched to Surround mode, only the input channel can be cuemonitored when CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO. (Attempted to cuemonitor a different channel.)
Different File Format! Some Data was
not Loaded.
Data was loaded in a format that is not supported.
xxx Parameters Copied.
Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
Directory Not Empty!
xxx Parameters Initialized.
Parameter xxx was initialized.
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were
files remaining in the directory.
xxx Parameters Pasted.
Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
Editor: Data Framing Error!
Editor: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being exchanged with QL Editor.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy
Buffer.
Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
Editor: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the QL Editor input port.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off!
ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.
Editor: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the QL Editor output port.
Cannot Assign!
In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the QL1, you attempted to edit
an item that cannot be edited for that model.
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup
window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.
Cannot Bookmark This Popup.
This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
Error occurred at Secondary Port.
The Ethernet cable of the SECONDARY connector has been removed
during the REDUNDANT setting.
Cannot Mount This Type of Device in
This Position.
You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it
cannot be mounted.
External HA Connection Conflict!
Cannot Open This Page.
This window cannot be opened.
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of
connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was
stored.
Cannot Paste to Different Parameter
Type!
Fader Bank Snapshot is Done.
A snapshot was taken of the current bank settings.
Parameters of one type cannot be pasted to another different type.
File Access is Busy!
Cannot Paste!
Cannot paste the character string.
The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB
flash drive is being accessed.
Cannot Recall!
Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
File Already Exists!
The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same
name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.
Cannot Select This Channel.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to
your user level or some other reason.
File Error [xx]!
Internal file access error
Cannot Store!
Failed to store a scene memory or library.
File Protected!
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is
write-protected.
Cannot Undo!
You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available.
Flash Memory Initializing Finished.
Memory initialization has been completed.
Channel Copied.
Channel settings have been copied.
Help File Not Found!
The help file has not been loaded.
Channel Moved.
Channel settings have been moved.
Illegal Address!
The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.
Channel Returned to Default Settings.
Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.
Illegal DIP Switch Setting.
The DIP switches of the R series are not set correctly.
Console initialized due to memory
mismatch.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup
memory has been lost, due to an update or some other reason. Please
contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s
Manual (separate document).
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use
Ethernet.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible because
the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason.
Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the
Owner’s Manual (separate document).
Corrupted data fixed!
Data has been repaired.
Illegal MAC Address!
The QL series started up with an illegal MAC Address.
Couldn’t Access File.
File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.
Couldn’t Write File.
File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.
Illegal Storage Format!
The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid
or unsupported.
Current User Changed. [xxx]
Current user was changed to [xxx].
Invalid value
DANTE audio resource overflow.
Audio resources are not enough for the Dante audio network.
The MonitorMix application PIN that is set on the QL series console
must be a 4-digit numeric password.
DANTE Connection Error!
You have the wrong connection of PRIMARY and SECONDARY in the
daisy chain network.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the
DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different
screen.
DANTE is not working by GIGA bit.
The Dante audio network is not functioning as Giga-bit Ethernet.
LIBRARY #xxx is Empty!
No data has been stored in library #xxx that you attempted to recall.
DANTE is working at Secondary.
The Dante audio network is operating in the SECONDARY PORT.
Loading Aborted.
Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.
Message
Meaning
276
V5.8 Reference Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Meaning
Message
Meaning
RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was canceled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the
RECORDER screen to another screen.
Re-Enter Password!
When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a
second time.
The backup memory of the R series has been corrupted.
REMOTE: Data Framing Error!
REMOTE: Data Overrun!
An inappropriate signal has been input to the Remote connector.
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
MIDI: Data Overrun!
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data has been received at the Remote connector.
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data has been transmitted from the Remote connector.
Removed from the Channel Link group.
The channel was removed from the link group.
Saving Aborted.
Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.
Loading Finished.
Finished loading from USB flash drive.
Low Battery!
The backup battery voltage is low.
Maximum Number of Audio Files
Exceeded!
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory
recorder has been exceeded.
Memory Error.
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
Monitor Assignment is Restricted to
Max. 8 Sources!
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to
be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.
Saving Finished.
Finished saving to USB flash drive.
No Access From Recorder!
In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher
than \YPE\SONGS\.
SCENE #xxx is Empty!
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the
data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.
No Channel Selected.
A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen.
SCENE #xxx is Protected!
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
No Copy Item Selected.
In the GLOBAL PASTE screen, you attempted to paste without having
selected an item to paste.
SCENE #xxx is Read Only!
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
Scene Playback Link Canceled!
The audio playback link for the scene was canceled.
No Corresponding Help Items.
The corresponding section was not found in the Help file.
No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit.
The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input to the SLOT x input port.
No Response from External HA.
No response from an external AD8HR.
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
No Response from I/O DEVICE.
The I/O devices not responding.
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the SLOT x output port.
Operating as the word clock leader.
The QL series is operating correctly as a word clock leader.
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
Page Bookmarked.
The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified
might be used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK.
Parameter out of range!
Some data could not be loaded because of a parameter mismatch.
Song File Not Found!
The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a USER
DEFINED key does not exist.
Password Changed.
The password has been changed.
Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in
progress.
STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!
STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!
STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.
PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was canceled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the
RECORDER screen to another screen.
STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port.
Please use Dante Controller.
DANTE PATCH settings from the console are not enabled.
STEREO Mode: Cannot Use This
Function.
You cannot use this function in Stereo mode.
Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding
now.
You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when
patching was not possible.
STEREO MODE ON.
The console has switched to Stereo mode.
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. Please
contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s
Manual (separate document).
Storage Full!
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the
USB flash drive.
Storage Not Found!
The USB flash drive could not be recognized.
Storage Not Ready!
Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.
You cannot use this function in Surround mode.
PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used
during Preview.
PREVIEW Mode : Disabled
Preview was disabled.
SURROUND Mode: Cannot Use This
Function.
PREVIEW Mode : Enabled
Preview was enabled.
SURROUND MODE ON.
The console has switched to Surround mode.
Processing Aborted.
Processing was interrupted.
Sync Error! [xxx]
The QL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
Operation of the button was canceled because time is required for
recorder processing.
Tap Operation Ignored.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not
displayed in the screen.
RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] !
A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.
277
V5.8 Reference Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Meaning
Target device is in WGM Mode.
Operation Denied.
Attempted to operate RMio64-D when the mounted RMio64-D is in
WGM mode (RMio64-D operating as a member of the NUAGE
Workgroup).
This Operation is Not Allowed.
This operation has been ignored because the current user does not
have permission.
This Operation is Not Allowed in This
View.
Message
Meaning
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was
lost.
Wrong Audio File Format!
The format of the audio file is invalid.
Wrong Password!
The password you input was incorrect.
This function is not allowed in this screen.
Wrong Word Clock!
The QL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected
by LEADER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not
appropriate.
This page does not exist in this model.
You attempted to open a bookmark or window that does not exist in
the QL series.
You Cannot Create User Key.
The current user does not have permission to create a user
authentication key.
Too Large File! Loading Failed.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The
maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.
Or loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The
maximum supported file size is 1024 kilobytes.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot
Compare.
Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed
because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because
more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has
exceeded the rated value.
Unassigned Encoder.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that
corresponds to the knob you operated.
Unit Fan has Malfunctioned
The fan of the R series has malfunctioned.
Unit ID Duplicated!
The currently entered UNIT ID is not unique on the Dante audio
network.
Unsupported File Format!
The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an
unsupported format.
USB Currently Active for Recorder
function!
Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory
recorder is recording or playing.
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!
The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library
data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!
Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash
drive processing.
USB Memory Full !
Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free
space on the USB flash drive.
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity
ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.
USB Memory is Protected!
The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on.
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was
disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB
device.
The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current.
USER DEFINED KEY BANK CHANGED [x].
The bank for the USER DEFINED KEY has switched to [x]. (x is A, B, C,
or D.)
Version Changed. All Memories were
Initialized.
The contents of the current memory are initialized by the upgrade.
Version mismatch.
The current version of the R series is not compatible with the version
of the CL series and the QL series.
278
V5.8 Reference Manual
Index
Index
F
8BandPEQ .................................................. 137
Factory set ................................................... 270
Fade function ................................................. 97
Focus Recall function..................................... 95
Function Tree................................................... 4
A
G
Numerics
Audio file (links to a scene recall)................ 100
AUTOMIXER ............................................... 140
B
BUS SETUP window ................................... 245
C
Calibration ................................... 270, 271, 273
Cascade connections .................................. 241
Channel color ........................................ 27, 246
Channel Job .................................................. 67
Channel library ........................................ 49, 58
Channel Link ................................................. 76
Channel name displays ............................... 246
Console Lock............................................... 231
Control change
Control parameters.................................. 190
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel ..... 80
Cue...................................................... 103, 110
Operating................................................. 111
Custom fader bank ...................................... 229
D
Dante audio network ............................. 16, 249
Dante Device Lock ...................................... 251
Dante Domain Manager .............................. 252
DAW ............................................................ 199
DCA group..................................................... 67
Directly outputting.......................................... 22
Dynamics................................................. 59, 63
Libraries..................................................... 66
E
Effect ........................................................... 129
Libraries................................................... 162
Effects and tempo synchronization ............. 149
EQ ................................................................. 59
Libraries..................................................... 66
External head amp .............................. 163, 180
Gain ............................................................... 28
Analog gain ................................................ 28
Gain Compensation ....................................... 33
Global Paste function..................................... 92
GPI............................................................... 263
Graphic EQ .......................................... 129, 133
Libraries ................................................... 162
H
HA .................................................................. 28
Head Amp ...................................................... 28
Help function ................................................ 268
I
I/O device..................................................... 163
Initializing ..................................................... 270
Input channels................................................ 25
Channel library ........................................... 49
Channel name and icon ............................. 26
Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ..................... 38
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ............... 34
Input Delay..................................................... 41
Input patch ..................................................... 17
Inserting ......................................................... 20
Internal clock................................................ 247
Internal effects ............................................. 143
Internal head amp ........................................ 184
L
Lamps .......................................................... 246
LED .............................................................. 246
LED color ..................................................... 273
Library ............................................ 66, 162, 188
M
MATRIX buses....................................... 54, 245
METER screen............................................. 123
Meters .......................................................... 123
MIDI ............................................................. 185
MIX buses.................................................... 245
MIX channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 54
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus............... 52
MIX MINUS.................................................... 84
MIX/MATRIX buses ....................................... 38
Monitor function ................................... 103, 104
Mute group .................................................... 69
Signal quality meter....................... 29, 176, 177
Slot .............................................................. 239
Solo function................................................ 114
STEREO/MONO buses........................... 34, 52
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 54
Surround...................................................... 108
SURROUND SETUP screen....................... 210
N
T
Name displays ............................................. 246
Network address.......................................... 247
Nuendo Live ................................................ 202
Talkback ......................................................
Title list ........................................................
TOUCH AND TURN ....................................
Touch screen...............................................
O
Oscillator.............................................. 118, 120
Output channels ............................................ 50
Channel library........................................... 58
Channel name and icon............................. 51
Output Delay.................................................. 56
Output patch .................................................. 18
P
Parameter changes ..................................... 192
Patching......................................................... 16
Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)................ 227
PORT TO PORT function .............................. 57
Preferences ................................................. 219
Premium Rack ............................................. 151
Libraries ................................................... 162
Operating ................................................. 151
Preview mode .............................................. 102
Program change .......................................... 188
R
Recall Safe function....................................... 72
REMOTE HA ............................................... 259
RTA ............................................................. 125
S
118
198
227
246
U
USB flash drive
Formatting ...............................................
Loading a file ...........................................
Loading Help/text file ...............................
Playing back audio files ...........................
Recording ................................................
Saving and loading setup data ................
USB memory recorder.................................
Assigning channels .................................
USER DEFINED keys .................................
Functions that can be assigned...............
Recalling Help .........................................
USER DEFINED knobs ...............................
Functions that can be assigned...............
User settings ...............................................
238
235
268
197
195
232
193
193
221
222
269
227
228
212
V
Virtual rack .................................................. 129
Operations ............................................... 130
W
Warning/Error Messages............................. 276
WIRELESS.................................................. 175
Word clock................................................... 239
Scene
Editing........................................................ 90
SELECTED CHANNEL section ....................... 6
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ............. 6
Setup ........................................................... 209
SETUP screen ............................................. 209
279
V5.8 Reference Manual
Table of Contents
Data List
EQ Library List........................................................................ 2
DYNAMICS Library List .......................................................... 3
Dynamics Parameters............................................................. 5
Effect Type List........................................................................ 7
Effects Parameters.................................................................. 8
Premium Rack Processor Parameters .................................. 20
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes ....... 23
NRPN Parameter Assignments ............................................ 27
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability ............................. 31
MIDI Data Format ................................................................. 37
Input/Output Characteristics ................................................. 44
Electrical Characteristics ...................................................... 45
Mixer Basic Parameters........................................................ 47
Pin Assignment..................................................................... 48
MIDI Implementation Chart................................................... 49
EN
EQ Library List
#
• Libraries created by the user also include type parameters
and BYPASS parameters (ON/OFF) for each band.
• The type parameter for all read-only presets is “LEGACY
(TYPE1).”
#
01 Bass Drum 1
02 Bass Drum 2
03 Snare Drum 1
04 Snare Drum 2
05 Tom-tom 1
06 Cymbal
07 High Hat
08 Percussion
09 E. Bass 1
10 E. Bass 2
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–3.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
100 Hz
265 Hz
1.06 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
1.25
10.0
0.90
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
LPF
G
+8.0 dB
–7.0 dB
+6.0 dB
ON
F
80.0 Hz
400 Hz
2.50 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
1.4
4.5
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+4.5 dB
F
132 Hz
1.00 kHz
3.15 kHz
5.00 kHz
Q
1.25
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+1.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
335 Hz
2.36 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
10.0
0.70
0.10
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+2.0 dB
–7.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+1.0 dB
F
212 Hz
670 Hz
4.50 kHz
6.30 kHz
Q
1.4
10.0
1.25
0.28
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
106 Hz
425 Hz
1.06 kHz
13.2 kHz
Q
—
8.0
0.90
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+1.0 dB
+0.5 dB
F
95.0 Hz
425 Hz
2.80 kHz
7.50 kHz
Q
—
0.50
1.0
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
100 Hz
400 Hz
2.80 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
—
4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
35.5 Hz
112 Hz
2.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
5.0
4.5
—
11 Syn. Bass 1
+0.5 dB
4.00 kHz
0.10
5.0
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
+8.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
85.0 Hz
950 Hz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
8.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
180 Hz
1.12 kHz
12.5 kHz
1.6
8.0
2.2
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–6.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
95.0 Hz
950 Hz
3.15 kHz
7.50 kHz
—
8.0
0.90
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
224 Hz
600 Hz
3.15 kHz
5.30 kHz
5.6
10.0
0.70
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
265 Hz
400 Hz
1.32 kHz
4.50 kHz
0.18
10.0
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
140 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.60 kHz
8.0
4.5
0.63
9.0
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
450 Hz
3.35 kHz
19.0 kHz
8.0
0.40
0.16
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+5.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
355 Hz
950 Hz
3.35 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
9.0
10.0
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+6.0 dB
–8.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
315 Hz
1.06 kHz
4.25 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
20 A. G. Stroke 1
0.10
PEAKING
G
Q
19 E. G. Dist. 2
H.SHELF
+2.5 dB
Q
18 E. G. Dist. 1
PEAKING
2.24 kHz
Q
17 E. G. Crunch 2
PEAKING
0.0 dB
Q
16 E. G. Crunch 1
PEAKING
112 Hz
Q
15 E. G. Clean
HIGH
112 Hz
Q
14 Piano 2
H-MID
+3.0 dB
Q
13 Piano 1
L-MID
F
Q
12 Syn. Bass 2
LOW
G
Q
Parameter
Title
Parameter
Title
—
10.0
4.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
106 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
0.90
4.5
3.5
—
2
#
Parameter
Title
21 A. G. Stroke 2
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–3.5 dB
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
300 Hz
750 Hz
2.00 kHz
3.55 kHz
Q
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
224 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
4.5
4.5
0.125
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
0.0 dB
–5.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
355 Hz
4.00 kHz
4.25 kHz
—
7.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
1.00 kHz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
170 Hz
236 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.70 kHz
0.11
10.0
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–1.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
F
118 Hz
400 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.00 kHz
0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
112 Hz
335 Hz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
0.16
0.20
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
30 Total EQ 1
2.8
2.0
0.70
7.0
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+6.5 dB
F
95.0 Hz
950 Hz
2.12 kHz
16.0 kHz
Q
31 Total EQ 2
7.0
PEAKING
190 Hz
Q
29 Chorus & Harmo
0.70
PEAKING
–0.5 dB
Q
28 Female Vo. 2
2.0
PEAKING
F
Q
27 Female Vo. 1
2.8
PEAKING
G
Q
26 Male Vocal 2
—
PEAKING
–0.5 dB
Q
25 Male Vocal 1
4.5
PEAKING
F
Q
24 Brass Sec.
9.0
PEAKING
G
Q
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
—
L.SHELF
7.0
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+6.0 dB
F
95.0 Hz
750 Hz
1.80 kHz
18.0 kHz
Q
7.0
2.8
5.6
—
Data List
#
32 Total EQ 3
34 Snare Drum 3
36 Piano 3
38 Piano High
40 Narrator
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
+0.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
67.0 Hz
850 Hz
1.90 kHz
15.0 kHz
—
0.28
0.70
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+3.5 dB
–10.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
118 Hz
315 Hz
4.25 kHz
20.0 kHz
Q
2.0
10.0
0.40
0.40
PEAKING
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
224 Hz
560 Hz
4.25 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
4.5
2.8
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–9.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
212 Hz
5.30 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
—
4.5
1.25
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.5 dB
–13.0 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
100 Hz
475 Hz
2.36 kHz
10.0 kHz
8.0
10.0
9.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+6.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
10.0
6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+5.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
5.60 kHz
Q
39 Fine-EQ Cass
H-MID
L.SHELF
Q
37 Piano Low
L-MID
+1.5 dB
Q
35 Tom-tom 2
LOW
G
Q
33 Bass Drum 3
DYNAMICS Library List
Parameter
Title
10.0
6.3
2.2
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–1.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
75.0 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
—
4.5
1.8
—
H.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–4.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
106 Hz
710 Hz
2.50 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
4.0
7.0
0.63
—
#
Title
Type
1
Gate
GATE
2
Ducking
DUCKING
3
A. Dr. BD
GATE
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
5
6
7
8
9
De-Esser
Comp
Expand
Compander (H)
Compander (S)
DE-ESSER
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
COMPANDER-S
3
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Frequency (kHz)
Type
Q
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
#
Value
–26
–56
0
2.56
331
–19
–22
93
1.20 S
6.32 S
–11
–53
0
1.93
400
–8
–23
1
0.63
238
–8
2.00
HPF
1.6
–8
2.5
30
0.0
2
250
–23
1.7
1
3.5
2
70
–10
3.5
1
0.0
6
250
–8
4
25
0.0
24
180
Title
Type
10
A. Dr. BD
COMPRESSOR
11
A. Dr. BD
COMPANDER-H
12
A. Dr. SN
COMPRESSOR
13
A. Dr. SN
EXPANDER
14
A. Dr. SN
COMPANDER-S
15
A. Dr. Tom
EXPANDER
16
A. Dr. OverTop
COMPANDER-S
17
E. B. Finger
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Value
–24
3
9
5.5
2
58
–11
3.5
1
–1.5
7
192
–17
2.5
8
3.5
2
12
–23
2
0
0.5
2
151
–8
1.7
11
0.0
10
128
–20
2
2
5.0
2
749
–24
2
38
–3.5
54
842
–12
2
15
4.5
2
470
Data List
#
Title
Type
18
E. B. Slap
COMPRESSOR
19
Syn. Bass
COMPRESSOR
20
Piano1
COMPRESSOR
21
Piano2
COMPRESSOR
22
E. Guitar
COMPRESSOR
23
A. Guitar
COMPRESSOR
24
Strings1
COMPRESSOR
25
Strings2
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Value
–12
1.7
6
4.0
hard
133
–10
3.5
9
3.0
hard
250
–9
2.5
17
1.0
hard
238
–18
3.5
7
6.0
2
174
–8
3.5
7
2.5
4
261
–10
2.5
5
1.5
2
238
–11
2
33
1.5
2
749
–12
1.5
93
1.5
4
1.35 s
#
Title
Type
26
Strings3
COMPRESSOR
27
BrassSection
COMPRESSOR
28
Syn. Pad
COMPRESSOR
29
SamplingPerc
COMPANDER-S
30
Sampling BD
COMPRESSOR
31
Sampling SN
COMPRESSOR
32
Hip Comp
COMPANDER-S
33
Solo Vocal1
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Value
–17
1.5
76
2.5
2
186
–18
1.7
18
4.0
1
226
–13
2
58
2.0
1
238
–18
1.7
8
–2.5
18
238
–14
2
2
3.5
4
35
–18
4
8
8.0
hard
354
–23
20
15
0.0
15
163
–20
2.5
31
2.0
1
342
#
Title
Type
34
Solo Vocal2
COMPRESSOR
35
Chorus
COMPRESSOR
36
Click Erase
EXPANDER
37
Announcer
COMPANDER-H
38
Limiter1
COMPANDER-S
39
Limiter2
COMPRESSOR
40
Total Comp1
COMPRESSOR
41
Total Comp2
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Value
–8
2.5
26
1.5
3
331
–9
1.7
39
2.5
2
226
–33
2
1
2.0
2
284
–14
2.5
1
–2.5
18
180
–9
3
20
–3.0
90
3.90 s
0
∞
0
0.0
hard
319
–18
3.5
94
2.5
hard
447
–16
6
11
6.0
1
180
* At fs=44.1 kHz
4
Data List
 DUCKING
Dynamics Parameters
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is
reduced automatically when an announcer speaks.
When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is
attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).
Dynamics Parameters are the following types.
Input channels
DYNAMIC section 1
DYNAMIC section 1
GATE
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
DUCKING
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
EXPANDER
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN)
required to activate ducking.
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft)
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when
ducking is activated.
EXPANDER
DE-ESSER
COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft)
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once
the ducker has been triggered.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains active
once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its
normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
Parameter
 GATE
Range
Description
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–72 to 0 (73 points)
This determines the level at which the gate effect is
applied.
RANGE (dB)
–∞, –69 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when the
gate closes.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when the
signal exceeds the threshold level.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open once
the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once the
hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
Output Level
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
• Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
HOLD
ATTACK
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
• Time Series Analysis
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
• I/O Characteristics
Input Level
Range
Output Level
Parameter
Output Level
Type
Output channels
DYNAMIC section 2
Output Signal
HOLD
ATTACK
DECAY
Input Level
Time
Time
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
Time
Time
5
Data List
 COMPRESSOR
 EXPANDER
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO.
The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the
level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the
threshold.
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
Range
Parameter
Description
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander
returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level exceeds the threshold.
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that is,
the change in output signal level relative to change
in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be
compressed once the compressor has been
triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor returns to
its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops
below the threshold. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This determines how soon the signal is
expanded once the signal level drops below
the threshold. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is
applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified
threshold, creating a more natural sound.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
KNEE
This determines how expansion is applied at
the threshold. For higher knee settings,
expansion is applied gradually as the signal
exceeds the specified threshold, creating a
more natural sound.
RELEASE
Output Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
Input Level
Input Signal
Output Level
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Level
Output Signal
Output Level
RATIO
Output Level
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
KNEE
Time
RATIO
Time
6
Input Level
Time
Time
Data List
 COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT
(COMPANDER-S)
Effect Type List
Title
Output Level
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
WIDTH
0dB
Input Level
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0 dB and higher ..................................Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold ....................Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width .........Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an
expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to
maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and
expansion processes.
Parameter
Range
Description
This determines the level at which compression is
applied.
Type
Description
REV-X Hall
REV-X HALL
REV-X Room
REV-X ROOM
REV-X Plate
REV-X PLATE
New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay,
and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL,
REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Room reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Stereo Reverb
ST REVERB
Stereo reverb
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
Gated early reflections
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
Gated reverse early reflections
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Simple mono delay
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
Simple stereo delay
Mod.Delay
MOD.DELAY
Simple repeat delay with modulation
Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
Chorus
CHORUS
Chorus
Flange
FLANGE
Flanger
Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation
than normal chorus
Phaser
PHASER
16-stage stereo phase shifter
Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or
expanded once the compander has been triggered.
HQ. Pitch
HQ.PITCH
Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shifter
Tremolo
TREMOLO
Tremolo
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or
expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger
signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold
respectively. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
Auto-panner
Rotary
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulation
Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
Ring modulator
Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
Modulated filter
Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter
Rev+Chorus
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in parallel
 DE-ESSER
Rev→Chorus
REV→CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the
vocal.
Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel
Rev→Flange
REV→FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
WIDTH (dB)
–18.0 to 0.0 (181 points)
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
1–90 (90 points)
This determines how far below the threshold
expansion will be applied. The expander is activated
when the level drops below the threshold and width.
Parameter
THRESHOLD
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Description
Threshold level at which the de-esser effect is applied.
Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series
FREQUENCY
1kHz–12.5kHz (45 points)
Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies.
Rev→Pan
REV→PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in series
TYPE
HPF, BPF
Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.
Delay+Er.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Q
10.0–0.10 (41 points)
Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.
7
Data List
Title
Type
Effects Parameters
Description
Delay→Er.
DELAY→ER.
Delay and early reflections in series
Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel
 REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Delay→Rev
DELAY→REV
Delay and reverb in series
Dist→Delay
DIST→DELAY
Distortion and delay in series
Multi Filter
MULTI FILTER
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Freeze
FREEZE
Simple sampler
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich
reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the
original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X
HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion
Parameter
Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar amp simulation
REV TIME
0.28–27.94 s
Reverb time
Comp276
COMP276
This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has
become a sought-after classic in recording studios.
INI. DLY
0.0–120.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Range
*1
Description
Comp276S
COMP276S
This is a stereo model of COMP276.
LO. RATIO
0.1–1.4
Comp260
COMP260
This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter
1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.
LO.FREQ
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Comp260S
COMP260S
This is a stereo model of the COMP260.
Equalizer601
EQUALIZER601
This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It
can be used to obtain a sense of drive.
OpenDeck
OPENDECK
This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by
two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
M.Band Dyna.
M.BAND DYNA.
Multi-band dynamics processor
ROOM SIZE 0–28
Size of room
DECAY
0–53
Gate closing speed
HPF
THRU, 22.0 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending
on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting.
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
 REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Gate opening speed
HOLD
*1
Gate open time
DECAY
*2
Gate closing speed
*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
8
Data List
 STEREO REVERB
 GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Type-A, Type-B
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
TYPE
Type of early reflection simulation
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reflection spacing
 MONO DELAY
 EARLY REF.
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Delay time
Type of early reflection simulation
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Parameter
TYPE
Range
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Description
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
SYNC
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
NOTE
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
 STEREO DELAY
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
Parameter
Description
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
*1.
9
Range
DELAY L
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
 MOD. DELAY
 ECHO
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
L→R FBG
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine/Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
R→L FBG
–99 to +99%
MOD.NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
 DELAY LCR
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
NOTE FBL
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel feedback
DELAY
NOTE FBR
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel feedback
DELAY
*1.
*2.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0–2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
 CHORUS
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
Two input, two output chorus effect.
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1.
Parameter
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE C
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine center channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
FREQ.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1.
10
Data List
 FLANGE
 PHASER
Two input, two output flange effect.
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
Range
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left and right modulation phase balance
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
SYNC
OFF/ON
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1.
*1.
 DYNA.FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
 SYMPHONIC
Parameter
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
Range
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
Modulation speed
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
0–100%
Modulation depth
DECAY
*1
Decay speed
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
OFFSET
0–100
Delay time offset
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
*1.
11
Data List
 DYNA.PHASER
 DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
DIR.
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
PITCH 1
–24 to +24 semitones
0–100
Sensitivity
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
DECAY
*1
Decay speed
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse
phase)
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
PAN 1
L63 to R63
Channel #1 pan
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY 1
FB. G 1
–99 to +99%
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel #2 pitch shift
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse
phase)
PAN 2
L63 to R63
Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE 1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
NOTE 2
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
 HQ.PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
 TREMOLO
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1.
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Parameter
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1.
12
Data List
 AUTOPAN
 RING MOD.
Two input, two output autopanner.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
Range
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
DIR.
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
Modulation speed
SOURCE
OSC, SELF
0–100%
Modulation depth
OSC FREQ
0.0–5000.0 Hz
Oscillator frequency
*1
Panning direction
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
FM DEPTH
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
FM NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1.
 MOD.FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
 ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
Range
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Description
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
ROTATE
STOP, START
Rotation stop, start
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW
0.05–10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
0–100
Overdrive level
ACCEL
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
 DYNA.FILTER
LOW
0–100
Low-frequency filter
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
*1.
Parameter
Range
Description
Control source:
input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
*1
Filter frequency change decay speed
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
13
Data List
 REV+CHORUS
 REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
Reverb time
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV/CHO
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
REV/FLG
0–100%
Reverb and flange balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
*1.
 REV→CHORUS
 REV→FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
Range
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
Parameter
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Range
Description
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DIFF.
0–100%
Reverb density
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance
(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
DENSITY
REV.BAL
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance
(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
LPF
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
PM DEPTH
Pitch modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
FREQ.
MOD. DLY
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
*1.
14
Data List
 REV+SYMPHO.
 REV→PAN
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect.
Parameter
Range
Parameter
Description
Range
Description
Reverb time
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
0–100%
Reverb density
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
DIFF.
Reverb time
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DENSITY
REV/SYM
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and panned reverb balance
(0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
*1
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
DIR.
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*2
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
NOTE
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
*1.
 DELAY+ER.
 REV→SYMPHO.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Parameter
Description
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/ER
0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance
(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
*1.
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
15
Reflection spacing
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
 DELAY→ER.
Parameter
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
Parameter
Range
Description
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
NOTE R
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
NOTE FB
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance
(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
 DELAY→REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Range
Description
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
 DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/REV
0–100%
Delay and reverb balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Left channel delay time
16
Data List
 DIST→DELAY
 FREEZE
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
One input, two output basic sampler.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY
buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the
REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.
REC DLY
–1000 to +1000 ms
Recording delay.
For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus
values, recording starts before the trigger is received.
PLY MODE
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the PLAY button is
pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has
been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP
NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
TRG LVL
–60 to 0 dB
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or
playback)
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
TRG MASK 0–1000 ms
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
START
*1
Playback start point in milliseconds
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
END
*1
Playback end point in milliseconds
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
LOOP
*1
Loop start point in milliseconds
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
LOOP
NUM
0–100
Number of times the sample plays
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Playback pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift fine
MIDI TRG
OFF, C1–C6, ALL
The PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
START
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Loop start point in samples
DLY.BAL
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
*2.
 MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
Range
Description
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the
duration of the TRG MASK time.
*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
TYPE 1
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 1
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
LEVEL 1
0–100
Filter 1 level
RESO. 1
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
 DISTORTION
TYPE 2
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
One input, two output distortion effect.
FREQ. 2
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
LEVEL 2
0–100
Filter 2 level
RESO. 2
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
TYPE 3
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 3
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
LEVEL 3
0–100
RESO. 3
0–20
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
Filter 3 frequency
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
Filter 3 level
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
Filter 3 resonance
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
17
Data List
 AMP SIMULATE
 COMP276S
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in
recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You
can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter
Range
Description
AMP TYPE
*1
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
MASTER
0–100
BASS
MIDDLE
Parameter
Range
Description
INPUT
–180 to 0 dB
Distortion drive
OUTPUT
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the output gain
Master volume
RATIO
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1
Ratio of the compressor
0–100
Bass tone control
ATTACK
0.022–50.4 ms
Attack time of the compressor
0–100
Middle tone control
RELEASE
10.88–544.22 ms
Release time of the compressor
TREBLE
0–100
High tone control
MAKE UP
OFF, ON
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is
applied
CAB DEP
0–100%
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
SIDE HPF
OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
 COMP260
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard
for live SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several
parameters via stereo links.
 COMP276
Parameter
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in
recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You
can control two monaural channels independently.
Parameter
Range
Adjusts the input level
Description
Range
Description
THRE.1
–60 to 0.0 dB
Threshold of CH compressor
KNEE1
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
Knee of CH1 compressor
ATTACK1
0.01–80.0 ms
Attack time of CH1 compressor
RELEASE1
6.2–999 ms
Release time of CH1 compressor
1.0–500, ∞
Ratio for CH1 compressor
INPUT 1
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the CH1 input level
RATIO1
OUTPUT 1
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
OUTPUT1
–20 to 40 dB
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
RATIO 1
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1
Ratio for CH1 compressor
THRE.2
–60 to 0.0 dB
Threshold of CH2 compressor
Attack time of CH1 compressor
KNEE2
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
Knee of CH2 compressor
0.01–80.0 ms
Attack time of CH2 compressor
Release time of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 1
0.022–50.4 ms
RELEASE1
10.88–544.22 ms
Release time of CH1 compressor
ATTACK2
6.2–999 ms
OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is
applied
RELEASE2
MAKE UP1
RATIO2
1.0–500, ∞
Ratio of CH2 compressor
OUTPUT2
–20 to 40 dB
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
ST LINK
OFF, ON
Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and
RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked
SIDEHPF1
INPUT 2
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the CH2 input level
OUTPUT 2
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
RATIO 2
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1
Ratio of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 2
0.022–50.4 ms
Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2
10.88–544.22 ms
Release time of CH2 compressor
MAKE UP2
OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is
applied
SIDEHPF2
OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
 COMP260S
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard
for live SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter
18
Range
Description
THRE.
–60 to 0.0 dB
Threshold of the compressor
KNEE
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
Knee of the compressor
ATTACK
0.01–80.0 ms
Attack time of the compressor
RELEASE
6.2–999 ms
Release time of the compressor
RATIO
1.0–500, ∞
Ratio of the compressor
OUTPUT
–20 to 40 dB
Adjusts the output gain
Data List
 EQUALIZER601
 OPENDECK
This effect emulates the characteristics of 70’s analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion
of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound.
It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck
and a playback deck). You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such
as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
LO TYPE
HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2
Type of EQ1
LO F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
Cut-off frequency of EQ1
LO G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Gain of EQ1
MID1 Q
0.50–16.0
Q of EQ2
MID1 F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
Center frequency of EQ2
MID1 G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
MID2 Q
0.50–16.0
MID2 F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
Center frequency of EQ3
MID2 G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Gain of EQ3
INPUT
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
OUTPUT
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
MID3 Q
0.50–16.0
Q of EQ4
MID3 F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
Center frequency of EQ4
MID3 G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Gain of EQ4
MID4 Q
0.50–16.0
Q of EQ5
MID4 F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
Center frequency of EQ5
MID4 G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Gain of EQ5
HI TYPE
LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2
Type of EQ6
HI F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz *1
Cut-off frequency of EQ6
HI G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Gain of EQ6
LO SW
OFF, ON
Switches EQ1 on/off
MID1 SW
OFF, ON
Switches EQ2 on/off
Parameter
MID2 SW
OFF, ON
Switches EQ3 on/off
L-M XOVER
MID3 SW
OFF, ON
Switches EQ4 on/off
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
REC DEC
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
Selects the recording deck type
REC LVL
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape
compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts
the sound.
Gain of EQ2
REC HI
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
Q of EQ3
REC BIAS
–1.00 to +1.00
Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
REPR DEC
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
Selects the playback deck type
Input gain
REPR LVL
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the output level of the playback deck
Output gain
REPR HI
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck
REPR LO
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck
MAKE UP
Off, On
When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change,
maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of
distortion without changing the output level.
TP SPEED
15ips, 30ips
Selects the tape speed
TP KIND
Old, New
Selects the tape type
 M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction
metering for each band.
Range
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
MID4 SW
OFF, ON
Switches EQ5 on/off
SLOPE
HI SW
OFF, ON
Switches EQ6 on/off
LOW GAIN
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Low band gain
MID GAIN
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Mid band gain
HI. GAIN
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
High band gain
CLEAN, DRIVE
Selects the equalizer type.
The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound,
emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The
DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog
flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits.
TOTAL
–72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Overall gain
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
CMP.THRE
–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Threshold of the compressor
CMP.RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Ratio of the compressor
CMP.ATK
0–120 ms
Attack time of the compressor
CMP.REL
*1
Release time of the compressor
CMP.KNEE
0–5
Knee of the compressor
CMP.BYP
OFF/ON
Bypasses the compressor
EXP.THRE
–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB
Threshold of the expander
EXP.RAT
1:1 to 5:1
Ratio of the expander
EXP.REL
*1
Release time of the expander
EXP.BYP
OFF/ON
Bypasses the expander
LIM.THRE
–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Threshold of the limiter
TYPE
*1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)
19
Data List
Parameter
LIM.ATK
Range
0–120 ms
Premium Rack Processor Parameters
Description
Attack time of the limiter
LIM.REL
*1
Release time of the limiter
LIM.KNEE
0–5
Knee of the limiter
LIM.BYP
OFF/ON
Bypasses the limiter
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the
threshold of the low band. Negative (–) values do the opposite. If this is
set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.
ALL BYPASS OFF, ON
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
TRIM
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Input gain
MAKE UP
OFF/ON
Automatically adjusts the output level
LF FREQ
30.00 to 300.0 Hz
Center frequency of the LF band
LF GAIN
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Gain of the LF band
LMF IN
OFF, ON
Switches the LMF band on/off
 M.BAND COMP
LMF Q
0.70 to 5.00
Q of the LMF band
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for
each band.
LMF FREQ
50.00 to 400.0 Hz
Center frequency of the LMF band
LMF GAIN
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Gain of the LMF band
MF IN
OFF, ON
Switches the MF band on/off
MF Q
0.70 to 5.00
Q of the MF band
MF FREQ
330.0 to 2500 Hz
Center frequency of the MF band
MF GAIN
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Gain of the MF band
HMF IN
OFF, ON
Switches the HMF band on/off
HMF Q
0.70 to 5.00
Q of the HMF band
HMF FREQ
1.80k to 16.0k Hz
Center frequency of the HMF band
HMF GAIN
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Gain of the HMF band
LF/HF IN
OFF, ON
Switches the LF/HF bands on/off
HF FREQ
2.50k to 25.0k Hz
Center frequency of the HF band
HF GAIN
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Gain of the HF band
 Portico5033
This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company.
Parameter
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Parameter
L-M XOVER
Range
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
LOW GAIN
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Low band gain
MID GAIN
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Mid band gain
HI. GAIN
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
High band gain
TOTAL
–72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Overall gain
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
LOW THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Threshold of the low band compressor
LOW RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Ratio of the low band compressor
LOW ATK
0–120 ms
Attack time of the low band compressor
LOW REL
*1
Release time of the low band compressor
LOW KNEE
0–5
Knee of the low band compressor
LOW BYP
OFF/ON
Bypasses the low band compressor
MID THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Threshold of the mid band compressor
MID RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Ratio of the mid band compressor
MID ATK
0–120 ms
Attack time of the mid band compressor
MID REL
*1
Release time of the mid band compressor
MID KNEE
0–5
Knee of the mid band compressor
MID BYP
OFF/ON
Bypasses the mid band compressor
HI. THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Threshold of the high band compressor
HI. RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Ratio of the high band compressor
HI. ATK
0–120 ms
Attack time of the high band compressor
HI. RAT
*1
Release time of the high band compressor
HI. KNEE
0–5
Knee of the high band compressor
HI. BYP
OFF/ON
Bypasses the high band compressor
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
MAKE UP
OFF/ON
Automatically adjusts the output level
Range
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will
pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
 Portico5043
This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company.
Parameter
Range
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will
be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through
the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
IN
OFF, ON
FB
OFF, ON
Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type
THRESHOLD
–50.0 to 0.0 dB
Threshold level
RATIO
1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio
ATTACK
20 to 75 ms
Attack time
RELEASE
100 ms to 2.50 sec
Release time
GAIN
–6.0 to 20.0 dB
Output level
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
20
Data List
 Portico 5045
 EQ-1A
This models the Primary Source Enhancer made by Rupert Neve Designs.
This processor emulates a vintage EQ that’s considered a classic example of a passive EQ.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
PROCESS ENGAGE
OFF, ON
Turns the enhancement circuit on/off. Even when this is off, the signal
passes through the audio transformer and discrete amp circuit.
(LOW) BOOST
0.0 to 10.0
Boost amount of the low range filter
RMS/Peak
RMS, Peak
Operation mode of the level detector.
(LOW) ATTEN
0.0 to 10.0
Attenuation amount of the low range filter
TIME CONSTANT
A, B, C, D, E, F
Attack and release time.
HIGH FREQUENCY
3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz
Frequency range of the high range filter
THRESHOLD
-42.0 to -12.0 dB
Threshold level.
(HIGH) BOOST
0.0 to 10.0
Boost amount of the high range filter
DEPTH
0.0 to -20.0 dB
Amount of attenuation for signals below the threshold level.
(HIGH) BAND WIDTH
0.0 to 10.0
Band width of the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL
5k, 10k, 20k Hz
Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN
0.0 to 10.0
Attenuation amount of the high range filter
IN
OFF, ON
Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section
will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the
input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
 U76
LOW FREQUENCY
20, 30, 60, 100 Hz
Frequency range of the low range filter
This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.
Parameter
Range
Description
INPUT
–96.0 to 0.0 dB
OUTPUT
–96.0 to 0.0 dB
Output level
 Dynamic EQ
ATTACK
5.50 to 0.10 ms
Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right
produces the fastest attack.
RELEASE
1100.0 to 56.4 ms
Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right
produces the fastest release.
This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the
input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or
expander.
RATIO
ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20
Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest
effect.
METER
Input level
OFF, +4, +8, GR
Parameter
Switches the meter display
Range
OFF, ON
Turns the corresponding band on/off
SIDECHAIN CUE
OFF, ON
If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will
be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
SIDECHAIN LISTEN
OFF, ON
If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics
will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/
MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.
 Opt-2A
This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.
Parameter
Range
Description
Description
BAND ON/OFF
FILTER TYPE
Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf
Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter
GAIN
–56.0 dB to 40.0 dB
Output level
FREQUENCY
20.0 to 20.0k Hz
Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter
PEAK REDUCTION
–48.0 dB to 48.0 dB
Amount of gain reduction
Q
15.0 to 0.50
Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter
RATIO
2.00 to 10.00
Compression ratio
THRESHOLD
–80.0 to 10.0 dB
Threshold value at which processing begins to apply
OUTPUT+10,
GAIN REDUCTION,
OUTPUT+4
RATIO
∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal
METER SELECT
Switches the meter display
MODE
BELOW, ABOVE
Specifies whether the processor will operate when the
sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or
when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)
ATTACK/RELEASE
FAST, SLOW, AUTO
Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is
applied
21
Data List
 Buss Comp 369
Parameter
Parameter
Range
Description
Switches the compressor of low mid band on/off
LOW MID CUE ON
ON, OFF
If this is on, the low mid band signal will be sent to the CUE bus
for monitoring.
HIGH MID GAIN
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
High mid band gain
HIGH MID
THRESHOLD
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
Threshold of high mid band
HIGH MID RATIO
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
Ratio of high mid band
HIGH MID ATTACK
0.1ms to 120ms
Attack time of high mid band
HIGH MID RELEASE
5ms to 1000ms
Release time of high mid band
HIGH MID COMP IN
ON, OFF
Switches the compressor of high mid band on/off
HIGH MID CUE ON
ON, OFF
If this is on, the high mid band signal will be sent to the CUE
bus for monitoring.
HIGH GAIN
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
High band gain
HIGH THRESHOLD
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
Threshold of high band
HIGH RATIO
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
Ratio of high band
HIGH ATTACK
0.1ms to 120ms
Attack time of high band
HIGH RELEASE
5ms to 1000ms
Release time of high band
HIGH COMP IN
ON, OFF
Switches the compressor of high band on/off
HIGH CUE ON
ON, OFF
If this is on, the high band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for
monitoring.
Master gain
INPUT ADJUST
–15.0 to +15.0dB
LINK
ON, OFF
Stereo link function (STEREO only)
METER
IN, GR, OUT
Meter switch (STEREO only)
VU
IN, OUT
Meter switch (DUAL only)
COMP IN
ON, OFF
Compressor on/off
COMP RATIO
1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1
Ratio of the compressor
COMP GAIN
0.0 to +20.0dB
Compressor gain
COMP RECOVERY
100ms, 400ms, 800ms
1500ms, a1, a2
Compressor release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2
(auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically
between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically
between 50 ms and 5 sec.
COMP THRESHOLD
–40 to –5 dBFS
Threshold of the compressor
LIMIT IN
ON, OFF
Limiter on/off
LIMIT ATTACK
FAST, SLOW
Attack time of the limiter FAST: 2 ms, SLOW: 4 ms
LIMIT RECOVERY
50ms, 100ms, 200ms
800ms, a1, a2
Limiter release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto
2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between
100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms
and 5 sec.
–16 to –5 dBFS
Threshold of the limiter
 MBC4
Parameter
Range
Description
ON, OFF
Input gain. However, the output gain is also linked so that there
is no change in the pass-through volume. For example, if
INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output
gain is –5dB.
LIMIT THRESHOLD
Range
LOW MID COMP IN
Description
MASTER GAIN
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
LOW CROSSOVER
20 to 500Hz
Crossover frequency between the low and low mid bands
KNEE
HARD, 1, 2, 3, SOFT
Knee of compressor
MID CROSSOVER
80 to 10kHz
Crossover frequency between the low mid and high mid bands
FLAVOUR
VCA, OPTO
Compressor type
HIGH CROSSOVER
1k to 15kHz
Crossover frequency between the low high mid and high
bands
HARMONICS
ON, OFF
Switches the harmonics on/off
LOW GAIN
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
Low band gain
LINK GAIN
-
Links and controls the gain of the four bands
LOW THRESHOLD
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
Threshold of low band
LINK THRESHOLD
-
Links and controls the threshold of the four bands
LOW RATIO
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
Ratio of low band
LINK RATIO
-
Links and controls the ratio of the four bands
LOW ATTACK
0.1 to 120ms
Attack time of low band
LINK ATTACK
-
Links and controls the attack time of the four bands
LOW RELEASE
5 to 1000ms
Release time of low band
LINK RELEASE
-
Links and controls the release time of the four bands
LOW COMP IN
ON, OFF
Switches the compressor of low band on/off
LOW CUE ON
ON, OFF
If this is on, the low band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for
monitoring.
LOW MID GAIN
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
Low mid band gain
LOW MID
THRESHOLD
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
Threshold of low mid band
LOW MID RATIO
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
Ratio of low mid band
LOW MID ATTACK
0.1ms to 120ms
Attack time of low mid band
LOW MID RELEASE
5ms to 1000ms
Release time of low mid band
22
Data List
 Automixer Parameters
Parameter
Range
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes
Description
Mode
Parameter 1
Group
a, b, c
Channel control field group
Override
OFF/ON
Turns on/off overriding of the channel control field
ChMode
man, auto, mute
Channel control field mode (man/auto/mute)
ChModePreset
man, auto, mute
Preset setting of the channel control field
Weight
–100 to 15
Relative sensitivity among input channels in the channel
control field
MeterType
gain, input, output
Meter type of the master field
MasterOverride
OFF/ON
Turns on/off overriding of the master field
MasterMute
OFF/ON
Turns on/off the mute setting of the master field
Gain
0 to 127
Automixer gain displayed for each channel when the meter
button of the master field is set to “gain”
0 to 127
Input level displayed for each channel when the meter button
of the master field is set to “input”
OutputLevel
0 to 127
Output level displayed for each channel when the meter
button of the master field is set to “output”
INPUT CUE POINT
PostWeightingFilter
0 to 127
Level indicator of the channel control field
OUTPUT CUE POINT
InputLevel
Parameter 2
NO ASSIGN
—
—
BALANCE
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–STEREO R
INPUT
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH ON
OUTPUT
CUE MODE
SURROUND CUE MODE
FADER CUE RELEASE ON
DCA CUE POINT
DCA UNITY
CUE
OUTPUT LEVEL H
OUTPUT LEVEL L
ACTIVE CUE
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
DCA 1–DCA16
ON
DCA
FADER H
DCA 1–DCA 16
FADER L
DIRECT OUT
ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
BYPASS
EFFECT
MIX BALANCE
RACK1–8
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 32 L
INPUT
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
INPUT
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
FADER H
FADER L
ON A
GEQ
ON B
GAIN 1A-GAIN 31A
GEQ RACK1–GEQ RACK8
EFFECT RACK1–EFFECT
RACK8
GAIN 1B-GAIN 31B
23
Data List
Mode
INPUT ATT
Parameter 1
INPUT
Parameter 2
Mode
LCR
ON
MIX 1 ON–MIX 16 ON
THRESHOLD
MATRIX 1 ON–MATRIX 8 ON
RANGE
MIX 1 POINT–MIX 16 POINT
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
MIX/MATRIX SEND
MIX 1 H–MIX 16 H
MATRIX 1 H–MATRIX 8 H
DECAY/RELEASE L
MIX 1 L–MIX16 L
RATIO
MATRIX 1 L–MATRIX 8 L
KNEE
MIX 1/ 2 PAN–MIX 15/16 PAN
GAIN H
MATRIX 1/2 PAN–MATRIX 7/8 PAN
GAIN L
MATRIX 1 POINT–MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H–MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1/2 PAN–MATRIX 7/8 PAN
RELEASE H
TO STEREO ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX TO STEREO
TO MONO ON
GAIN H
PAN
GAIN L/Q
OUTPUT
KNEE/WIDTH
SOURCE SELECT
FILTER FREQ
ON
DEFINE ASSIGN
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
MONITOR
LOW MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
DELAY AUTO BYPASS
DELAY ON
MUTE CONTROL
HIGH FREQ
ON
CONTROL 1–CONTROL 8
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
HIGH GAIN
OUTPUT ATT
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
ON
HIGH TYPE
INSERT
—
MONITOR FADER L
HIGH Q
INPUT HPF
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX1–MATRIX8
STEREO, MONO
INPUT 25-26–INPUT 31-32*2
PB OUT
PHONES LEVEL LINK
MONITOR FADER H
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
HIGH MID GAIN
ON
—
DIMMER ON
MONO MONITOR
LOW MID GAIN
INPUT EQ
MIX 1–MIX 16
CUE INTERRUPTION
LOW MID FREQ
HIGH MID Q
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L–MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
THRESHOLD
RATIO/TYPE
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MATRIX 1 ON–MATRIX 8 ON
MIX TO MATRIX
ATTACK
RELEASE L
Parameter 2
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1 POINT–MATRIX 8 POINT
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
ON
INPUT DYNAMICS2
CSR
ATTACK
HOLD H
INPUT DYNAMICS1
Parameter 1
ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
ATTACK
*1
FREQ
CH 1–CH 64
STIN1L–STIN8R
INPUT
CH 1–CH 64*1
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
OUTPUT DYNAMICS1
RELEASE L
RATIO
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
24
Data List
Mode
Parameter 1
Mode
LOW Q
BAND6 GAIN L
LOW FREQ
BAND6 FREQ
LOW GAIN
BAND6 Q
LOW MID Q
BAND7 BYPASS
LOW MID FREQ
BAND7 GAIN H
LOW MID GAIN
BAND7 GAIN L
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
BAND7 Q
BAND8 BYPASS
HIGH Q
BAND8 GAIN H
HIGH FREQ
BAND8 GAIN L
HIGH GAIN
BAND8 FREQ
LOW TYPE
BAND8 Q
HIGH TYPE
HPF ON
PEQ
HIGH LPF ON
INPUT
HPF SLOPE
LPF FREQ
LPF SLOPE
ON
NOTCH A ON
BAND1 BYPASS
NOTCH A FREQ H
BAND1 GAIN H
NOTCH A FREQ L
BAND1 GAIN L
NOTCH A Q
BAND1 FREQ
NOTCH B ON
BAND1 Q
NOTCH B FREQ H
BAND2 BYPASS
NOTCH B FREQ L
BAND2 GAIN H
NOTCH B Q
BAND2 GAIN L
NOTCH C ON
BAND2 FREQ
NOTCH C FREQ H
BAND2 Q
NOTCH C FREQ L
BAND3 GAIN L
GEQ RACK 1A–8B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
LPF ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
BAND3 BYPASS
PEQ
HPF FREQ
A/B LINK
BAND3 GAIN H
Parameter 2
BAND7 FREQ
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
LOW HPF ON
PAN/BALANCE
Parameter 1
BAND6 GAIN H
HIGH MID Q
OUTPUT EQ
Parameter 2
ON
NOTCH C Q
GEQ RACK 1A–8B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
PHASE
BAND3 FREQ
PREMIUM EFFECT A
BAND3 Q
BAND4 BYPASS
PREMIUM EFFECT B
BAND4 GAIN H
INPUT
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H–PARAM 64 L
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H–PARAM 64 L
BAND4 GAIN L
BAND4 FREQ
BAND4 Q
BAND5 BYPASS
RECALL SAFE
BAND5 GAIN H
BAND5 GAIN L
BAND5 FREQ
ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
RACK1–8
RACK1–8
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GEQ RACK 1A–8B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
PREMIUM RACK 1A–8B
DCA 1–DCA16
BAND5 Q
BAND6 BYPASS
25
Data List
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
MATRIX 1 POINT–MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON–MATRIX 8 ON
STEREO TO MATRIX
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H–MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
STEREO L–MONO(C)
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L–MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN–MATRIX 7/8 PAN
SOURCE SELECT
2CH MONITOR ASSIGN
DOWNMIX
SURROUND SPEAKER SOLO
SURROUND MONITOR
SURROUND SPEAKER L
SURROUND SPEAKER R
—
SURROUND SPEAKER C
SURROUND SPEAKER LFE
SURROUND SPEAKER Ls
SURROUND SPEAKER Rs
LR PAN
FR PAN
FR PAN REVERSE
DIV
L ON
SURROUND PAN
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
SELECTED CH
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
Ls ON
Rs ON
LFE LEVEL H
LFE LEVEL L
TO MONO
ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
TO STEREO
ON
CH 1–CH 64*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
*1. QL1: CH1-CH32
*2. QL1: INPUT 9-10-INPUT 15-16
26
Data List
NRPN Parameter Assignments
Parameter
INPUT
FADER
MIX1-16, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
LEVEL
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MIX1-16, STEREO LR to
MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
INPUT
ON
MIX1-16, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
INPUT to MIX9-16 ON
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MIX1-16, STEREO LR to
MATRIX ON
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1-8 to STEREO ON
MIX TO ST
PHASE
INPUT
From (HEX)
0000
To (HEX)
0057
0060
007D
007E
00DE
013E
019E
01FE
025E
02BE
031E
037E
03DE
043E
049E
04FE
0514
052A
0540
0556
056C
0582
0598
05B6
00D5
0135
0195
01F5
0255
02B5
0315
0375
03D5
0435
0495
04F5
0513
0529
053F
0555
056B
0581
0597
05AD
060D
0616
0633
0634
0694
06F4
0754
07B4
0814
0874
08D4
0934
0994
09F4
0A54
0AB4
0ACA
0AE0
0AF6
0B0C
0B22
0B38
0B4E
0B64
0B6C
068B
06EB
074B
07AB
080B
086B
08CB
092B
098B
09EB
0A4B
0AAB
0AC9
0ADF
0AF5
0B0B
0B21
0B37
0B4D
0B63
0B6B
0BC3
Parameter
INPUT
INSERT ON
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/
POST
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
PRE/POST
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
LEVEL
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
ON
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
PRE/POST
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
27
From (HEX)
0BCC
To (HEX)
0C13
0C2C
0C49
0C4A
0CAA
0D0A
0D6A
0DCA
0E2A
0E8A
0EEA
0F4A
0FAA
100A
106A
10CA
10D2
10DA
10E2
10EA
10F2
10FA
1102
110A
1112
111A
1122
112A
1132
113A
1142
114A
1152
115A
1162
116A
1172
117A
1182
118A
1192
119A
11A2
11AA
11B2
11BA
11C2
11CA
11D2
11DA
11E2
0CA1
0D01
0D61
0DC1
0E21
0E81
0EE1
0F41
0FA1
1001
1061
10C1
10D1
10D9
10E1
10E9
10F1
10F9
1101
1109
1111
1119
1121
1129
1131
1139
1141
1149
1151
1159
1161
1169
1171
1179
1181
1189
1191
1199
11A1
11A9
11B1
11B9
11C1
11C9
11D1
11D9
11E1
11E9
Parameter
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT57-64 HPF
FREQ
MIX1/2
MIX3/4
INPUT57-64 to MIX1/27/8 PAN
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
MATRIX5/6
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX7/8
INPUT57-64 to STEREO
ON
INPUT57-64 RECALL
ON
SAFE
INPUT57-64 to MONO
ON
RATIO
INPUT49-64
KNEE/WIDTH
DYNAMICS1
GAIN
reserved
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS2
FILTER FREQ
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
EQ INPUT, MIX1-16,
HIGH MID FREQ
MATRIX, STEREO LR
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
ATT
HPF ON
LPF ON
HPF TYPE
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
INPUT DYNAMICS1
RANGE
HOLD
DECAY/RELEASE
INPUT DYNAMICS2
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
MIX1-16, MATRIX,
STEREO LR DYNAMICS1
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
PAN/BALANCE
INPUT
INPUT57-64 EQ
From (HEX)
11EA
11F2
11FA
1202
120A
1212
121A
1222
122A
1232
To (HEX)
11F1
11F9
1201
1209
1211
1219
1221
1229
1231
1239
123A
1241
1242
124A
125A
126A
127A
128A
1304
1382
1400
147E
14FC
157A
15F8
1676
16F4
1772
17F0
186E
18EC
196A
19E8
1A66
1249
1259
1269
1279
1289
1299
1381
13FF
147D
14FB
1579
15F7
1675
16F3
1771
17EF
186D
18EB
1969
19C1
1A65
1AE3
1AE4
1B44
1BA4
1C04
1C64
1CC4
1D24
1DA2
1E20
1E9E
1F1C
1F9A
2018
2096
1B3B
1B9B
1BFB
1C5B
1CBB
1D1B
1DA1
1E1F
1E9D
1F1B
1F99
2017
2095
20ED
Data List
Parameter
MIX9/10
INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16 MIX11/12
PAN
MIX13/14
MIX15/16
MATRIX1/2
INPUT to MATRIX1/2,
3/4 PAN
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX PAN
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN
MIX TO ST
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
BALANCE
STEREO LR
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MIX, STEREO LR, MONO MATRIX4 SEND
to MATRIX PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MONO to MATRIX ON
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM1
PARAM2
PARAM3
PARAM4
PARAM5
PARAM6
PARAM7
PARAM8
PARAM9
EFFECT RACK1-8
PARAM10
PARAM11
PARAM12
PARAM13
PARAM14
PARAM15
PARAM16
PARAM17
PARAM18
PARAM19
PARAM20
From (HEX)
20F6
2156
21B6
2216
2276
22D6
2336
234C
2362
2378
238E
To (HEX)
214D
21AD
220D
226D
22CD
232D
234B
2361
2377
238D
2395
2396
23B3
23B4
23D0
23EC
2408
2424
2440
245C
2478
2494
249A
24A0
24A6
24AC
24B2
24B8
24BE
26B4
26BC
26C4
26CC
26D4
26DC
26E4
26EC
26F4
26FC
2704
270C
2714
271C
2724
272C
2734
273C
2744
274C
2754
275C
23CE
23EA
2406
2422
243E
245A
2476
2492
2498
249E
24A4
24AA
24B0
24B6
24BC
24C2
26BB
26C3
26CB
26D3
26DB
26E3
26EB
26F3
26FB
2703
270B
2713
271B
2723
272B
2733
273B
2743
274B
2753
275B
2763
Parameter
PARAM21
PARAM22
PARAM23
PARAM24
PARAM25
PARAM26
EFFECT RACK1-8
PARAM27
PARAM28
PARAM29
PARAM30
PARAM31
PARAM32
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GEQ RACK1A-3B
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
FADER
MIX21-24, MONO
28
From (HEX)
2764
276C
2774
277C
2784
278C
2794
279C
27A4
27AC
27B4
27BC
27C4
27CA
27D0
27D6
27DC
27E2
27E8
27EE
27F4
27FA
2800
2806
280C
2812
2818
281E
2824
282A
2830
2836
283C
2842
2848
284E
2854
285A
2860
2866
286C
2872
2878
287E
28E4
To (HEX)
276B
2773
277B
2783
278B
2793
279B
27A3
27AB
27B3
27BB
27C3
27C9
27CF
27D5
27DB
27E1
27E7
27ED
27F3
27F9
27FF
2805
280B
2811
2817
281D
2823
2829
282F
2835
283B
2841
2847
284D
2853
2859
285F
2865
286B
2871
2877
287D
2883
28E8
Parameter
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MONO to MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
ON
MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 ON
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX9-16 to STEREO ON
MIX TO ST
INSERT
MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
ON
DCA13-16
FADER
From (HEX)
28EA
292A
296A
29AA
29EA
2A2A
2A6A
2AAA
2AEA
2B2A
2B6A
2BAA
2BEA
2BF0
2BF6
2BFC
2C02
2C08
2C0E
2C14
2C2A
2C30
2C70
2CB0
2CF0
2D30
2D70
2DB0
2DF0
2E30
2E70
2EB0
2EF0
2F36
2F46
2F4C
2F8C
2FCC
300C
304C
308C
30CC
310C
314C
318C
31CC
320C
324C
3252
To (HEX)
2929
2969
29A9
29E9
2A29
2A69
2AA9
2AE9
2B29
2B69
2BA9
2BE9
2BEE
2BF4
2BFA
2C00
2C06
2C0C
2C12
2C18
2C2E
2C6F
2CAF
2CEF
2D2F
2D6F
2DAF
2DEF
2E2F
2E6F
2EAF
2EEF
2F2F
2F45
2F4A
2F8B
2FCB
300B
304B
308B
30CB
310B
314B
318B
31CB
320B
324B
324F
3255
Data List
Parameter
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
MONO EQ
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
HPF ON
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
HIGH TYPE
FADER
SPEAKER MUTE
SOLO
SPEAKER MUTE L
MONITOR
SPEAKER MUTE R
SURROUND MONITOR
SPEAKER MUTE C
SPEAKER MUTE LFE
SPEAKER MUTE Ls
SPEAKER MUTE Rs
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
MONO DYNAMICS1
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
MIX1/2
MIX3/4
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
MATRIX5/6
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX7/8
MATRIX1/2
MONO to MATRIX1/2-7 MATRIX3/4
/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX9-16 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST
From (HEX)
325E
3264
326A
3270
3276
327C
3282
3288
328E
3294
329A
32A0
32A6
32AC
32B2
3440
3480
34C0
34E4
3620
To (HEX)
3262
3268
326E
3274
327A
3280
3286
328C
3292
3298
329E
32A4
32AA
32B0
32B6
347F
34BF
34E2
3506
3620
3621
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3640
3680
3686
368C
3692
3698
369E
36A4
36AA
36EA
372A
376A
37AA
37EA
382A
3830
3836
383C
3842
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
367F
3684
368A
3690
3696
369C
36A2
36A8
36E9
3729
3769
37A9
37E9
3829
382E
3834
383A
3840
3851
Parameter
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GEQ RACK4A-6B
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4, ON
MIX1-16
CSR
DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
ON
STEREO
ON
DCA1-12
FADER
MUTE CONTROL
ON
RECALL SAFE
ON
29
From (HEX)
3852
3858
385E
3864
386A
3870
3876
387C
3882
3888
388E
3894
389A
38A0
38A6
38AC
38B2
38B8
38BE
38C4
38CA
38D0
38D6
38DC
38E2
38E8
38EE
38F4
38FA
3900
3906
390C
3912
396A
39C2
To (HEX)
3857
385D
3863
3869
386F
3875
387B
3881
3887
388D
3893
3899
389F
38A5
38AB
38B1
38B7
38BD
38C3
38C9
38CF
38D5
38DB
38E1
38E7
38ED
38F3
38F9
38FF
3905
390B
3911
3969
39C1
3A01
3A02
3A41
3A42
3A4E
3A5A
3A66
3A4D
3A59
3A61
3B05
Parameter
EXTERNAL GAIN1
INPUT GAIN 1
EXTERNAL GAIN2
INPUT GAIN 2
EXTERNAL GAIN3
INPUT GAIN 3
EXTERNAL GAIN4
INPUT GAIN 4
EXTERNAL GAIN5
INPUT GAIN 5
EXTERNAL GAIN6
INPUT GAIN 6
EXTERNAL GAIN7
INPUT GAIN 7
EXTERNAL GAIN8
INPUT GAIN 8
EXTERNAL +48V 1
INPUT +48V 1
EXTERNAL +48V 2
INPUT +48V 2
EXTERNAL +48V 3
INPUT +48V 3
EXTERNAL +48V 4
INPUT +48V 4
HA
EXTERNAL +48V 5
INPUT +48V 5
EXTERNAL +48V 6
INPUT +48V 6
EXTERNAL +48V 7
INPUT +48V 7
EXTERNAL +48V 8
INPUT +48V 8
EXTERNAL HPF1
INPUT HPF1
EXTERNAL HPF2
INPUT HPF2
EXTERNAL HPF3
INPUT HPF3
EXTERNAL HPF4
INPUT HPF4
EXTERNAL HPF5
INPUT HPF5
EXTERNAL HPF6
INPUT HPF6
EXTERNAL HPF7
INPUT HPF7
EXTERNAL HPF8
INPUT HPF8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
ON
MONO
MIX1-16 TO MONO
ON
From (HEX)
3B06
3B0F
3B16
3B1F
3B26
3B2F
3B36
3B3F
3B46
3B4F
3B56
3B5F
3B66
3B6F
3B76
3B7F
3B86
3B8F
3B96
3B9F
3BA6
3BAF
3BB6
3BBF
3BC6
3BCF
3BD6
3BDF
3BE6
3BEF
3BF6
3BFF
3C06
3C0F
3C16
3C1F
3C26
3C2F
3C36
3C3F
3C46
3C4F
3C56
3C5F
3C66
3C6F
3C76
3C7F
To (HEX)
3B0B
3B15
3B1B
3B25
3B2B
3B35
3B3B
3B45
3B4B
3B55
3B5B
3B65
3B6B
3B75
3B7B
3B85
3B8B
3B95
3B9B
3BA5
3BAB
3BB5
3BBB
3BC5
3BCB
3BD5
3BDB
3BE5
3BEB
3BF5
3BFB
3C05
3C0B
3C15
3C1B
3C25
3C2B
3C35
3C3B
3C45
3C4B
3C55
3C5B
3C65
3C6B
3C75
3C7B
3C85
3C86
3CC5
3CC6
3CD5
Data List
Parameter
ON
SLOT OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
OMNI OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
DIGITAL OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
RATIO
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
KNEE/WIDTH
DYNAMICS1
GAIN
reserved
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS2
FILTER FREQ
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GEQ RACK7A-8B
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
ATT
LR, MONO EQ
From (HEX)
3CD6
3D06
3D36
3D66
3D76
3D86
3D96
3D98
3D9A
3D9C
3DD4
3E0C
3E44
3E7C
3EB4
3EB8
3EBC
3EC0
3EC4
3EC8
3ECC
3ED0
3ED4
3ED8
3EDC
3EE0
3EE4
3EE8
3EEC
3EF0
3EF4
3EF8
3EFC
3F00
3F04
3F08
3F0C
3F10
3F14
3F18
3F1C
3F20
3F24
3F28
3F2C
3F30
To (HEX)
3D05
3D35
3D65
3D6D
3D7D
3D8D
3D97
3D99
3D9B
3DD3
3E0B
3E43
3E7B
3EB3
3EB7
3EBB
3EBF
3EC3
3EC7
3ECB
3ECF
3ED3
3ED7
3EDB
3EDF
3EE3
3EE7
3EEB
3EEF
3EF3
3EF7
3EFB
3EFF
3F03
3F07
3F0B
3F0F
3F13
3F17
3F1B
3F1F
3F23
3F27
3F2B
3F2F
3F33
3F34
3F56
30
Data List
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability
This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.
It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.
 Input channels
Parameter
HA
Stereo*1
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8
ALL
Channel
Library
USER LEVEL
Parameter Select button
Gain
O*10
HA*10
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA
Gain Compensation
O
HA
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA
O
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA
O
+48V
Phase
AG-DG Link
Digital Gain
O
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA
O
O
HA
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA
O
O*10
DIGITAL GAIN*10
O
DIGITAL GAIN
HA
O
Name, Icon, Color
O
INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME
INPUT NAME
O
Input Patch
O
INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
O
INPUT TO ST
INPUT PROCESSING
Out Patch
O
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
In Patch
O
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
HA
LR-MONO
SELECT
Insert1,
Insert2
* ST IN channels only
O
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
INPUT INSERT
O
INPUT INSERT
INPUT PROCESSING
O
Point
INPUT INSERT
O
INPUT INSERT
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
Out Patch
Direct Out
O
On, Level
DIRECT OUT
O
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT PROCESSING
Point
DIRECT OUT
O
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
O
HPF
O
INPUT HPF
O
INPUT HPF
INPUT PROCESSING
Att
O
INPUT EQ
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT PROCESSING
O
EQ
O
INPUT EQ
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT PROCESSING
Key-In Filter
O
INPUT DYNAMICS1
O
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT PROCESSING
O
Others
O
INPUT DYNAMICS1
O
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT PROCESSING
Others
O
INPUT DYNAMICS2
O
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT PROCESSING
O
On
O
INPUT MIX ON*2
O
INPUT MIX ON*7
INPUT FADER/ON*4
O
Level
O
INPUT MIX SEND*2
O
INPUT MIX SEND*7
INPUT FADER/ON*4
O
O
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
*4
O
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT PROCESSING
O
Key-In Source
Dynamics1
Dynamics2
To Mix
Key-In Source
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
O
O
Pan
Surround
*11
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
INPUT FADER/ON
O
*4
Divergence
O
O
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT PROCESSING
O
LFE
O
O
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT PROCESSING
O
31
Data List
Parameter
To Matrix
DELAY
Stereo*1
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8
CHANNEL LINK
ALL
INPUT MATRIX ON*3
Parameter Select button
INPUT MATRIX ON*7
Channel
Library
USER LEVEL
INPUT FADER/ON*4
O
*4
O
FADER/ON*4
O
On
O
Level
O
Pan/Balance
O*11
O
INPUT MATRIX
Pre/Post
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND*3
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND*7
INPUT PROCESSING*4
ms
O*10
INPUT DELAY*10
O
INPUT DELAY
INPUT PROCESSING
O
ON
O
INPUT DELAY
O
INPUT DELAY
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
SEND*7
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT
O
To Stereo
O
TO STEREO
O
INPUT TO ST
INPUT PROCESSING
O
To Mono
O
TO STEREO
O
INPUT TO MONO
INPUT PROCESSING
O
Pan/balance
O*11
O
INPUT TO ST
INPUT FADER/ON
O
Pan Mode
O
O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING
O
On
O
TO STEREO
O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING
O
CSR
O
TO STEREO
O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING
O
Mode
O
TO STEREO
O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING
O
On
O
INPUT CH ON
O
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER/ON
O
Fader
O*10
INPUT FADER*10
O
INPUT FADER
INPUT FADER/ON
O
LCR
Mute Assign
O
INPUT MUTE
O
INPUT MUTE ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
O
DCA Assign
O
INPUT DCA
O
INPUT DCA ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
O
O
*9
STORE
O*6
Fade Time, On
O*6
Channel Link
O
Cue
O
GLOBAL CH LINK
Key In Cue
Mute Safe
O
Recall Safe
O
EACH PARAMETER
Focus Recall
O
EACH PARAMETER
Global Paste
O
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
*14
These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1–8.
Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–16 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1–8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
Applicable only to On/Off.
Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
Operates differentially
Balance only
Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
32
Data List
 MIX Channels
Parameter
Linked for a
stereo pair
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12
ALL
Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color
O
MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT NAME
Output Patch
O
MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
Out Patch
O
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch
O
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
O
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MIX PROCESSING
Insert1,
Insert2
Channel
Library
USER LEVEL
O
On
O
INSERT
O
MIX INSERT
MIX PROCESSING
O
Point
O
INSERT
O
MIX INSERT
MIX PROCESSING
O
Att
O
EQ
O
MIX EQ
MIX PROCESSING
O
EQ
O
EQ
O
MIX EQ
MIX PROCESSING
O
O
MIX DYNA1
MIX PROCESSING
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
Others
O
DYNAMICS
O
MIX DYNA1
MIX PROCESSING
O
On
O
TO MATRIX ON
O
MIX MATRIX ON*7
MIX FADER/ON*4
O
Level
O*13
TO MATRIX SEND
O
MIX MATRIX SEND*7
MIX FADER/ON*4
O
Pan/Balance
O
TO MATRIX SEND
O
MIX MATRIX SEND*7
MIX FADER/ON*4
Pre/Post
O
TO MATRIX SEND
O
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
MIX PROCESSING
To Stereo
O
TO STEREO
O
MIX TO ST
MIX PROCESSING
O
To Mono
O
TO STEREO
O
MIX MONO
MIX PROCESSING
O
Pan/Balance
O*11
O
MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
MIX FADER/ON
O
To Matrix
O
*4
O
On
O
TO STEREO
O
*5
MIX PROCESSING
O
CSR
O
TO STEREO
O
*5
MIX PROCESSING
O
Mode
O
TO STEREO
O
*5
MIX PROCESSING
O
On
O
CH ON
O
MIX CH ON
MIX FADER/ON
O
Fader
O
FADER
O
MIX FADER
MIX FADER/ON
O
LCR
From Input
On
O
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND*4
Level
O
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND*4
Pan/Balance
O*11
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND*4
Pre/Post
O
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND*4
Mute Assign
O
MUTE
O
MIX MUTE ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
O
DCA Assign
O
DCA
O
MIX DCA ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
O
O
*9
STORE
O*6
Fade Time, On
O
Channel Link
O
Cue
O
Mute Safe
O
*6
GLOBAL CH LINK
Recall Safe
O
EACH PARAMETER
Focus Recall
O
EACH PARAMETER
Global Paste
O
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
Applicable only to On/Off.
Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
33
Data List
*11
*12
*13
*14
Balance only
For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
Linked only for stereo MATRIX
Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
 MATRIX Channels
Parameter
Linked for a
stereo pair
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12
ALL
Parameter Select button
USER LEVEL
Name, Icon, Color
O
MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT NAME
Output Patch
O
MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
Insert1, Insert2
Out Patch
O
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch
O
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
O
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MATRIX PROCESSING
O
INSERT
O
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX PROCESSING
Point
O
INSERT
O
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX PROCESSING
O
O
EQ
O
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX PROCESSING
O
O
EQ
O
EQ
To Matrix
O
On
Att
Dynamics1
Channel
Library
Key-In Source
Others
O
DYNAMICS
On
TO MATRIX ON
Level
TO MATRIX SEND
Pan/Balance
TO MATRIX SEND
Pre/Post
TO MATRIX SEND
O
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX PROCESSING
O
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX PROCESSING
O
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX PROCESSING
O
O
Balance
O
O
MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
MATRIX FADER/ON
O
On
O
CH ON
O
MATRIX CH ON
MATRIX FADER/ON
O
O
FADER
O
O
Fader
On
From Input
Level
From Mix
From Stereo/Mono Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
MATRIX FADER
MATRIX FADER/ON
O
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND*4
O
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND*4
O*11
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND*4
O
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND*4
Mute Assign
O
MUTE
O
MATRIX MUTE ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
O
DCA Assign
O
DCA
O
MATRIX DCA ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
O
Fade Time, On
O*6
O
*9
STORE
O*6
Channel Link
O
Cue
O
GLOBAL CH LINK
Mute Safe
O
Recall Safe
O
EACH PARAMETER
Focus Recall
O
EACH PARAMETER
Global Paste
O
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
Applicable only to On/Off.
Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
34
Data List
*9
*11
*12
*14
Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
Balance only
For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
 STEREO, MONO Channels
Parameter
Linked for a
stereo pair
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12
ALL
USER LEVEL
Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color
O
STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
Output Patch
O
STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
Out Patch
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
Insert1,
Insert2
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
OUTPUT NAME
Channel
Library
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
On
O
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
Point
O
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
Att
O
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
EQ
O
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
Others
O
O
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
On
O
O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON*7
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4
O
Level
O*13
O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4
O
Pan/Balance
O
O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4
O
Pre/Post
O
O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX
SEND*7
Balance
O
O
STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
O
On
O
O
STEREO, MONO CH ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
O
Fader
O
O
STEREO, MONO FADER
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
O
Mute Assign
O
O
STEREO, MONO MUTE ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
O
DCA Assign
O
O
STEREO, MONO DCA ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
O
Fade Time, On
O*6
O
*9
STORE
O*6
Cue
O
Dynamics1
To Matrix
Key-In Source
Mute Safe
O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste
O
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*12
*14
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING*4
O
These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
Applicable only to On/Off.
Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
35
Data List
 DCA
 MUTE
Parameter
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL
Parameter Select button
USER LEVEL
Parameter
RECALL SAFE
ALL
Name, Icon, Color
O
DCA NAME
DCA MAIN
Name
On
O
DCA LEVEL/ON
DCA MAIN
On
MUTE GROUP CONTROL
Fader
O
DCA LEVEL/ON
DCA MAIN
Dimmer
MUTE GROUP CONTROL
Fade Time, On
O
*9
STORE
MUTE Assign
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
Input
*9
O
USER LEVEL
MUTE GROUP CONTROL
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
DCA Assign
Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
 BUS SETUP
Parameters
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL
Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan
Link
Parameter Select button
MIX 1/2, …, MATRIX 7/8
USER LEVEL
BUS SETUP
 SURROUND BUS
Parameters
Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan
Link
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL
Parameter Select button
SURROUND SETUP
USER LEVEL
BUS SETUP
36
Data List
MIDI Data Format
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
This section explains the format of the data that the QL series
is able to understand, send, and receive.
STATUS
DATA
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF
(8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
00
0vvvvvvv vv
1011nnnn Bn
20
0vvvvvvv vv
Control change
Control number (00)
Control Value (0-127)
Control change
Control number (32)
Control Value (0-127)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–01 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data
1.2 NOTE ON
(9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
= paramMax – paramMin + 1;
= paramWidth / paramSteps;
= paramWidth – add * paramSteps;
= paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps
paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE
paramSteps
add
mod
curValue
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps
paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received
(Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]
(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110)
messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx]
is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings
of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be
assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes”
(page 23).
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx]
is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,
63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the
specified parameter.
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a
parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these
messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can
be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes”
(page 23).
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a
specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be
Assigned to Control Changes” (page 23).
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to QL Editor because
there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152
steps
paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received
(3-4) When only High data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128;
If [NRPN] is selected
1011nnnn Bn Control change
01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
00000110 06 Data entry MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
00100110 26 Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not
be added during transmission.
Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is
omitted.
STATUS
DATA
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE
(Cn)
Reception
If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed
from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx]
is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are
received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene
memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled according to the
settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
Transmission
If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to
the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and
premium rack library are recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library have been
assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered
PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to QL Editor because
there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select
messages will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
if ( rxValue > paramWidth)
rxValue = paramWidth;
param = ( rxValue – mod / 2) / add;
37
Data List
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
2.1 SONG SELECT
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
(F3)
Reception
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder.
STATUS
11110011 F3 Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127)
2.2 TIMING CLOCK
(F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four
times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
STATUS
11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS
3.1 MMC
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000001
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
01
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Stop(MCS)
End of exclusive
< MMC PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Deferred Play(MCS)
End of exclusive
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts
recording.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000110
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
06
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Record strobe
End of exclusive
< MMC PAUSE >
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00001001
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
09
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Pause(MCS)
End of exclusive
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000010
11110111
3.2 BULK DUMP
This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored
within the unit.
The basic format is as follows.
Command
< MMC STOP >
EOX
F0
7F
dd
06
03
F7
11111111 FF System reset
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000011
11110111
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.
11111110 FE Active sensing
2.4 SYSTEM RESET
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
F0
7F
dd
06
02
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Play(MCS)
End of exclusive
rx/tx
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm ... mm dd rx/tx
dd ... ee F7
F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm ... mm dd dd F7 rx
Function
BULK DUMP DATA
BULK DUMP REQUEST
The QL series console uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
Module Name(mm)
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“PEFFECT_”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
38
Data Number(dd)
*1) *15) *16) *17)
*2) *7) *8)
*3) *9) *10) *11)
*4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *22) *23)
*18) *7) *8)
*19) *9) *10) *11)
*5) *12)
*13)
*6) *14)
*20)
*21)
*21)
*21)
Module Name(mm)
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
Mixer Setup
Outport Setup
Monitor Setup
MIDI Setup
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
*1)
*2)
*3)
*4)
*5)
*6)
*7)
*8)
*9)
*10)
*11)
*12)
*13)
*14)
*15)
*16)
*17)
*18)
*19)
*20)
*21)
*22)
*23)
*24)
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
Data Number(dd)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*24)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only)
1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only)
1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only)
0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
1–199 Effect Library Number (1–27 Request Only)
512–583 Input 1-64,
584–599 STIN 1L-8R,
768–791 MIX 1-16,
1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8,
1280–1282 STEREO L-C,
512–530 GEQ 1–19, 531–538 EFFECT GEQ 1–8,
0-199 8BandPEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
512–519 EFFECT 1–8,
512 Current Data,
768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,
0–199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
0–199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
512–527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, ... 8A, 8B
0–100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)
1536–1607 Input 1–64 (for Dynamics2),
1608–1623 STIN 1L–8R (for Dunamics2),
0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a QL series.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE
COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary
complement, and set bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time
when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump
Request.
Data List
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of
7-bit data.
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
0x01
00000001
4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
0x41
01000001
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches
the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is
received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER
REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be
transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which
CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE
will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be
transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
Command
rx/tx
F0 43 1n 3E 19 ... F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 19 ... F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
rx/tx
Function
QL series native parameter change
rx/tx
QL series native parameter request
4.1.3 Data category
Data Category
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL
CHANGE EVENT LIST].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA Category
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
0ccccccc
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
19
cc
eh
el
ih
il
ch
cl
dd
:
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL –
4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
QL Series
Element no High.
Element no Low.
Index no High.
Index no Low.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
Channel no High.
Channel no Low.
Data
End of exclusive
4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
MODULE NAME
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE
immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA Category
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011001
0ccccccc
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
19
cc
eh
el
ih
il
ch
cl
F7
Name
Current Scene /Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
Premium Rack Data
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
DATA
Digital mixer
QL Series
Element no High.
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Number High
nl Number Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
F7 End of exclusive
Element no Low.
Index no High.
Index no Low.
Channel no High.
Channel no Low.
End of exclusive
39
4.2.2 Function Name
Function Name
Store
Recall
Unknown Factor Store
Unknown Factor Recall
Store Undo (only Score)
Recall Undo (only Scene)
“LibStr__”
“LibRcl__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibUnRcl”
“LibStrUd”
“LibRclUd”
Data List
4.2.3 Module Name
Module Name
Scene
Input EQ
Output EQ
Dynamics
Input CH
Output CH
GEQ
8BandPEQ
Effect
Portico5033
Portico5043
Portico5045
U76
Opt-2A
EQP-1A
Dynamic EQ
Buss Comp 369
MBC4
Dante Input Patch
Function
“LibStr__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibRcl__”
Function
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
8BandPEQ LIB
Number
1-199
*6)
EFFECT LIB
1-199
*7)
Premium Effect LIB
0-100
*9)
Dante Input Patch LIB
0-10
*5)
SCENE
0
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
0
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
0
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
0
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
INPUT CH LIB
0
*1)
OUTPUT CH LIB
0
*2) *3) *4)
GEQ LIB
0
*6)
8BandPEQ LIB
0
*6)
EFFECT LIB
0
*7)
Premium Effect LIB
0
*9)
Dante Input Patch LIB
0
*5)
“LibStrUd”
SCENE
0
0
“LibRclUd”
SCENE
0
0
“LibUnRcl”
*1)
SCENE
Number
1-300
Channel*1)
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
41-199
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
4-199
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
42-199
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
INPUT CH LIB
1-199
*1)
OUTPUT CH LIB
1-199
*2) *3) *4)
GEQ LIB
1-199
*6)
8BandPEQ LIB
1-199
*6)
EFFECT LIB
28-199
*7)
Premium Effect LIB
1-100
*9)
Dante Input Patch LIB
1-10
*5)
SCENE
1-300
0
INPUT EQ LIB
41-199
0
OUTPUT EQ LIB
4-199
0
Dynamics LIB
42-199
0
INPUT CH LIB
1-199
0
OUTPUT CH LIB
1-199
0
GEQ LIB
1-199
0
8BandPEQ LIB
1-199
0
EFFECT LIB
28-199
0
Premium Effect LIB
1-100
0
Dante Input Patch LIB
1-10
0
SCENE
0-300
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
1-199
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
1-199
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
1-199
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
INPUT CH LIB
0-199
*1)
OUTPUT CH LIB
0-199
*2) *3) *4)
GEQ LIB
0-199
*6)
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
*2)
*3)
*4)
*5)
*6)
*7)
*8)
*9)
Channel*1)
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
0: CH1
– 63: CH64
72: ST IN 1L
– 79: ST IN 4R
256: MIX 1
– 271: MIX 16
512: MATRIX 1
– 519: MATRIX 8
1024: STEREO L – 1026: STEREO C
512: will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, ... 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B
38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,
40: EFFECT GEQ2A, ... 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B
0: Effect1- 7: Effect8
1280: CH1
– 1343: CH64
1352: ST IN 1L
– 1367: ST IN 8R
0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,
2: Premium Rack 2A, ... 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B
4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT –
4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is
received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
40
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0sssssss
0sssssss
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
ff
ff
ff
ff
ff
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
sh
sl
eh
el
dh
dl
F7
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
number -source start High
number -source start Low
number -source end High
number -source end Low
number -destination start High
number -destination to start Low
End of exclusive
4.3.2 Function Name
Function Name
Copy
Paste
Clear
Cut
Insert
Edit Undo
“LibCpy__”
“LibPst__”
“LibClr__”
“LibCut__”
“LibIns__”
“LibEdtUd”
4.3.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
Function
Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Data List
4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE –
4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding memory/library title will be changed immediately the data is
received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
01000001
01110100
01110010
01100010
01110100
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
0000dddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"A" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Scene/Library number High
nl Scene/Library number Low
eh Element High
el Element Low
ih Index High
il Index Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
dd Data28~31bit
dd Data21~27bit
dd Data14~20bit
dd Data7~13bit
dd Data0~6bit
F7 End of exclusive
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
01000001
01110100
01110010
01100010
01110100
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"A" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Scene/Library number High
nl Scene/Library number Low
eh Element High
el Element Low
ih Index High
il Index Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
F7 End of exclusive
Module Name
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
When QL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer
will be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.
Top number is requested number or more.
- Example SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number: 0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
4.4.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
Number
0-300 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-40:response only)
1-200 (1-3:response only)
1-200 (1-41:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-199 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-27:response only)
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
41
Number
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-10 (0:response only)
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
01000101
01111000
01101001
01110011
01110100
0mmmmmmm
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"E" (ASCII CODE)
"x" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"s" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0sssssss
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
ss
nh
nl
th
tl
eh
el
F7
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )
Request Number High
Request Number Low
Top Number High
Top Number Low
End Number High
End Number Low
End of exclusive
Data List
4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE –
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
01000101
01111000
01101001
01110011
01110100
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"E" (ASCII CODE)
"x" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"s" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Request Number High
nl Request Number Low
F7 End of exclusive
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
DATA
4.5.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
Number
1-300
41-200
4-200
42-200
1-200
1-200
1-200
1-199
55-200
1–100
1–100
1-100
1–100
1–100
1–100
1–100
1-100
1-100
1-10
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
01010101
01101110
01010011
01110100
01110010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"C" (ASCII CODE)
"o" (ASCII CODE)
"l" (ASCII CODE)
"U" (ASCII CODE)
"n" (ASCII CODE)
"S" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Number High
nl Number Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
F7 End of exclusive
Module Name
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE –
4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received
(depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
4.6.2 Function Name
Function
“ColUnStr”
Number
0
Setup
User Defined Key
0
Program Change
0
Control Change
0
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
DATA
4.6.3 Module Name
Module Name
Mixer Setting
Outport Setting
Monitor Setting
MIDI Setting
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
42
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01001101
01101111
01100100
01000110
01111000
01010100
01110010
01100111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0ppppppp
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"M"
"o"
"d"
"F"
"x"
"T"
"r"
"g"
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
ee Effect number (0:RACK1 - 7:RACK8)
pp Release:0, Press:1
F7 End of exclusive
4.7.2 Module Name
Module Name
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
“FRZPLAY_”
“FRZREC__”
Number
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
Data List
4.8
FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL –
4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00000000
01000011
01101000
01101100
01010000
01101001
01110010
01000011
01110000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
19 QL Series
00 OTHER DATA
"C"
"h"
"l"
"P"
"i"
"r"
"C"
"p"
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
sh Source Channel Number H *1)
sl Source Channel Number L *1)
dh Destination Channel Number H *1)
dl Destination Channel Number L *1)
F7 End of exclusive
4.8.2 Module Name
Module Name
Pair On (with Copy)
Pair On (with Reset Both)
Pair Off
*1)
“PAIRONCP”
“PAIRONRS”
“PAIROFF_”
0 : CH1
– 63: CH64
256 : MIX 1
– 271: MIX 16
512 : MATRIX 1 – 519: MATRIX 8
4.9 LEVEL METER DATA
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the
corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.
If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to
be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Reception
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering
data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and
time will vary depending on devices).
When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011001
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
19
21
mm
mm
mm
dd
:
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
QL Series
REMOTE LEVEL METER
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Data1
End of exclusive
4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for
a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be
immediately stopped [disabled].
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011001
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
19
21
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
QL Series
REMOTE LEVEL METER
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive
43
Data List
Input/Output Characteristics
Digital input/output characteristics
Analog input characteristics
Input
Connectors
INPUT 1-32
*6
Gain
Input
Source
Impedance Impedance Sensitivity*1
+66dB
7.5 kΩ
–6dB
50-600 Ω
Mics &
600 Ω Lines
Input Level
Defined Level
Maximum
Non-Clip Level
–82dBu
(61.6μV)
–62dBu
(0.616mV)
–42dBu
(6.16mV)
–10dBu
(245mV)
+10dBu
(2.45V)
+30dBu
(24.5V)
Connector
Connectors
Format
Data
Length
Level
Audio
Primary/
Secondary
Dante
24bit or
32bit
1000Base-T
64ch Input/64ch Output
@48kHz*1
XLR-3-31
type
(Balanced)*2
Digital output characteristics
Format
Data
Length
Level
AES/EBU Professional Use
24 bit
RS422
Connectors
DIGITAL OUT*1
Byte
OMNI OUT
1-16 *7
PHONES
75 Ω
+24dB
(default)
+4dBu
(1.23V)
+24dBu
(12.3V)
+18dB
–2dBu
(616mV)
+18dBu
(6.16V)
8 Ω Phones
–
75mW*6
150mW
40 Ω Phones
–
65mW*6
150mW
15 Ω
0
Output Level
Defined Level
600 Ω Lines
Bit
Maximum
Non-Clip
Level
Field Name
0
Block Format
1
Mode
2-4
Maximum
Output
Level SW*5
Load
Impedance
AES/EBU
Connector
XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)*2
*1. Channel Status of DIGITAL OUT
Analog output characteristics
Output
Impedance
etherCON CAT5e
*1. QL1: 32ch Input/32ch Output@48kHz
*1. The sensitivity is the input level required for output at +4dBu (1.23V) or at the defined
level when all the faders and level controllers are set to the maximum value.
*2. XLR-3-31 connectors are balanced jacks (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
*3. 0dBu=0.775 Vms for all specifications.
*4. All the AD converters use 24-bit linear/128-times oversampling.
*5. The INPUT connectors have +48V DC (phantom power) jacks, each of which can be
turned on/off individually from the console software.
*6. QL1: INPUT1-16
Output
Connectors
Connector
5
Emphasis
Fixed/Variable
fixed
Fs Lock
Connector
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)*1
1
Stereo Phone Jack
(TRS)
(Unbalanced)*2
2
3
*1. XLR-3-32 connectors are balanced jacks (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
*2. The PHONES connectors for stereo headphones are balanced jacks (Tip=LEFT,
Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve= GND).
*3. 0 dBu=0.775 Vms for all specifications.
*4. All the DA converters use 24-bit linear/128-times oversampling.
*5. The console has an internal switch for toggling the maximum output level.
*6. This is a value measured with the PHONES LEVEL knob set to 10 dB below the
maximum position.
*7. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
6-7
Sampling Frequency
0-3
Channel Mode
4-7
Users Bit Management
0-2
Use of AUX
3-7
Source
0-7
Multi Channel
0-1
4
2
3-6
7
Digital Audio Reference Signal
Sampling Frequency
Sampling Frequency Scan Flag
variable
fixed
fixed
fixed
fixed
Data
Description
1
professional use
0
audio
0x4
off
0
lock
0x0
others
0x3
32 kHz
0x2
44.1 kHz
0x1
48 kHz
0x1
2ch mode
0x0
-
0x1
24 bits Audio Data
0x00
-
0x00
-
0x0
0
-
variable
0x0
others
fixed
0
-
*2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
44
Data List
I/O SLOT (1-2) characteristics
Electrical Characteristics
A Mini-YGDAI card can be inserted into slots 1-2.
Only slot 1 supports serial interfaces.
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator: 150 ohms
 Frequency Response.
Control I/O characteristics
Connectors
MIDI
WORD CLOCK
Format
Level
IN
MIDI
–
DIN Connector 5P
OUT
MIDI
–
DIN Connector 5P
IN
–
TTL/75 Ω terminated
BNC Connector
OUT
–
TTL/75 Ω
BNC Connector
–
–
GPI (5IN/5OUT)
NETWORK
IEEE802.3
10BASE-T/100Base-TX
LAMP
(QL5: x2, QL1: x1)
–
0V-12V
USB HOST
USB 2.0
–
Input
Connector
INPUT 1-32*1
Fs= 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal
output level @1 kHz
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-16*2
600 Ω
PHONES
Conditions
GAIN: +66dB
8Ω
Min.
Typ.
Max.
–1.5
0.0
0.5
–3.0
0.0
0.5
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
dB
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
D Sub Connector 15P
(Female)*1
 Total Harmonic Distortion.
Input
RJ-45
XLR-4-31 type*2
INPUT 1-32*1
USB A Connector (Female)
*1. Input pin: TTL level, w/ internal pull-up (47kΩ)
Output pin: Open drain output (Vmax=12V, maximum sink current/pin=75mA)
Power supply pin: Output voltage Vp=5V, Max. output current Imax=300mA
*2. 4 pin=+12V, 3 pin=GND, Lamp nominal power: 5W, Brightness (voltage) can be
adjusted from the software.
Output
Fs= 48 kHz
RL
OMNI OUT 1-16*2
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-16*2
600 Ω
Internal OSC
PHONES
8Ω
Conditions
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN:
+66dB
Unit
0.1
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: –6dB
0.05
Full Scale Output @1 kHz
0.02
Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES
Level Control: Max.
0.2
%
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
*3. Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
 Hum & Noise.
Input
INPUT 1-32*1
All INPUTs
—
—
Fs= 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-16*2
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Main fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
*2
600 Ω
*2
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-16
OMNI OUT 1-16
PHONES
600 Ω
Conditions
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB
Main fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
8Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Main fader at nominal level and all
Min.
Typ.
Max.
–62
–84
–80
level.
QL5:
–64
QL1:
–67
Residual Output Noise, ST Main Off
–88
Residual Output Noise, PHONES
Level Control Min.
–88
INPUT 1-32*1 in faders at nominal
Unit
–128
EIN
dBu
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
*3. Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.
45
Data List
 Dynamic Range.
Input
INPUT 1-32*1
—
Fs= 48 kHz
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-16*2
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
600 Ω
AD + DA, GAIN: –6dB
108
dB
OMNI OUT 1-16*2
600 Ω
DA Converter
112
dB
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
*3. Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.
 Sampling Frequency
Parameter
External Clock
Frequency
Range
Jitter of PLL
Frequency
Internal Clock
Accuracy
Jitter
Conditions
Fs= 44.1 kHz
Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz –4.0%)
Fs= 48 kHz
Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz –4.0%)
Min.
Typ.
–200
DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz
DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Unit
+200
ppm
10
ns
44.1
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Max.
kHz
48
–50
+50
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
4.429
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
4.069
ppm
ns
46
Data List
Mixer Basic Parameters
Function
Parameter
Function
Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
 Libraries
Name
Number
Releace= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Total
Scene Memory
Preset 1 + User 300
301
Input CH Library
Preset 1 + User 199
200
Output CH Library
Preset 1 + User 199
Input EQ Library
Output EQ Library
Dynamics 1
Range= Gate: –∞ dB to 0 dB
Ducking: –70 dB to 0 dB
Gain=
0.0 dB to +8dB
200
Knee=
Hard to 5 (soft)
Preset 40 + User 159
199
Key In:
Preset 3 + User 196
199
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Dynamics Library
Preset 41 + User 158
199
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Effect Library
Preset 27 + User 172
199
Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
GEQ Library
Preset 1 + User 199
200
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio=
Premium Rack Library
Portico5033
Portico5043
Portico5045
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
Dynamic EQ
Buss Comp 369
MBC4
Preset 1 + User 199
Dante Input Patch Library
Preset 1 + User 10
1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Dynamics2
Function
11
Parameter
Gain=
–18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee=
Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In:
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Matrix Send
Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
LCR Pan
CSR= 0% to 100%
Threshold=Gate: –72 dB to 0 dB
Others: –54 dB to 0 dB
DELAY
0 ms to 1000 msec
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec
 Output Function
Function
Attenuator
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16/
MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Oscillator
Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
Function
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes (Surround Pan
can be set 1 to 6 mixes)
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
1:1 to ∞:1
Key In:
 Output Port
8 Groups
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Hard to 5 (soft)
8 Groups
8 Sends
PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type II)
–18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee=
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB (Position L63 to
R63, R63 to F63 for Surround)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Gain=
Mute Group
24 sends
Mix Send
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
16 Groups
Hold=
Dynamics 1
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
DCA Group
Ratio=
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
TYPE= HPF, BPF
Position L63 to R63
Pan Mode: Pan/Balance
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Position L63 to R63
Pan/Balance
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Ratio=
16 Groups
On/Off
–96 dB to 0 dB
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
DCA Group
On
Dynamics 1
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Pan/Balance
L-MONO/R-MONO/LR-MONO/STEREO IN
Mute Group
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz
L, R-MONO
Direct Out
Insert
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Normal/Reverse
Insert
PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type
II)
On/Off
–96 dB to +24 dB
4 Band
Equalizer
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
On
Digital Gain
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
Low Shelving (Low Band)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Phase
Slope= –12dB/Oct, –6dB/Oct
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Fader
Fader
Attenuator
4 Band
Equalizer
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
 Input Function
HPF
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
200
Parameter
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Parameter
Parameter
Out Port Delay
0 msec to 1000 msec
Out Port Phase
Normal/Reverse
Gain
–96 to +24 dB
 Processor
Function
Parameter
GEQ
31 bands x 8(16) or 15 bands x 16(32) or
16 ch Automixer x1 or 8 ch Automixer x1
PEQ
(8 bands PEQ + 3 notchs + HPF, LPF) x 16(32) systems
Effects
Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems
Premium Rack
Parameter
Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x
8 systems
–96 dB to 0 dB
47
Data List
Pin Assignment
8
15
3
2
1
11 10 9
GPI
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
1
GPO1
9
Signal Name
GPO2
2
GPO3
10
GPO4
3
GPO5
11
GND
4
GND
12
GND
5
+5V
13
+5V
6
GPI1
14
GPI2
7
GPI3
15
GPI4
8
GPI5
48
Data List
49
:True#
0,32
6,38
98,99
1-31,33-95, 102119
O: Yes
X: No
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Aux
Messages
*1 Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request.
*2 MMC
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
Effect Control
Recorder Control
Assignable
Bank Select
Data Entry
NRPN LSB,MSB
Assignable Cntrl
Effect Control
Notes
O
X
X
X
:Clock
:Commands
X
O
X
System
Real Time
X
X
X
O *1,*2
:Song Pos.
:Song Sel.
:Tune
O *1
O 0–127
0–300
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O 0–127
**************
X
X
X
X
X
X
O 9nH, v=1-127
O
Common
System Exclusive
Prog
Change
Control
Change
Pitch
Bend
Key’s
Ch’s
After
Touch
O 9nH, v=0,127
X
Note On
Note Off
Velocity
0–127
X
0–127
X
True Voice
Note
Number
Memorized
1, 3
X
X
X
X
**************
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode
Remarks
Memorized
Recognized
Version: 1.0
Date: 8 Jan. 2014
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Changed
Transmitted
MIDI Implementation Chart
Basic
Channel
Function...
Model: QL5/QL1
YAMAHA [ Digital Mixing Console ]
MIDI Implementation Chart
Data List
Yamaha Pro Audio global website
https://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Downloads
https://download.yamaha.com/
© 2014 Yamaha Corporation
Published 10/2022 IP-E0

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project